Nikon D6 Reference Manual Download Page 112 | Manualshive

Page: 112 / 1198

background image

60

Taking Photographs

D

The Count-Down Display

A count down will appear in the top left corner of the display
approximately 30 s before live view ends automatically.

•

If the timer has been triggered by Custom Setting c4 [

Monitor off

delay

], the count down will be displayed in black starting 30 s before

the timer expires, switching to red when there are only 5 s to go. If [

No

limit

] is selected for [

Monitor off delay

] > [

Live view

], the camera may

nevertheless terminate live view as necessary to protect its internal
circuits from high temperatures and the like.

•

A count down will be displayed in red starting 30 s before the camera
shuts down to protect its internal circuits. Depending on shooting
conditions, the timer may appear immediately when live view is
selected.

D

Exposure Preview

•

Exposure preview is not available when

A

(Bulb) or

%

(Time) is

selected for shutter speed. The preview may not accurately reflect the
final results when:
- Flash lighting is used
- [

Active D-Lighting

] or [

HDR (high dynamic range)

] is in effect

- [

A

] (auto) is selected for the Picture Control [

Contrast

] parameter

(

-

p

is selected for shutter speed

- Bracketing is in effect

•

If the subject is very bright or very dark, the exposure indicators will
flash to warn that the preview may not accurately reflect exposure.

«
...
110
111
112
113
114
...
»

Summary of Contents for D6

Page 1: ...e Manual En Read this manual thoroughly before using the camera To ensure proper use of the camera be sure to read For Your Safety page xli After reading this manual keep it in a readily accessible place for future reference ...

Page 2: ... Package Contents Camera BF 1B body cap BS 3 accessory shoe cover 0 1066 EN EL18c rechargeable Li ion battery with terminal cover MH 26a battery charger with power cable and two contact protectors shape of power cable depends on country or region of sale HDMI USB cable clip 0 1068 UC E24 USB cable AN DC22 strap Warranty User s Manual ...

Page 3: ...kon Download Center Visit the Nikon download center to download firmware updates ViewNX i and other Nikon software and manuals for Nikon products including cameras NIKKOR lenses and flash units https downloadcenter nikonimglib com ...

Page 4: ...e two types Throughout this manual battery chargers are referred to as battery chargers or chargers Throughout this manual smartphones and tablets are referred to as smart devices Throughout this manual the term default settings is used to refer to the settings in effect at shipment The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used About This Manual D This icon marks notes info...

Page 5: ...v About This Manual A For Your Safety For Your Safety contains important safety instructions Be sure to read them before using the camera For more information see For Your Safety 0 xli ...

Page 6: ...ist xxxv For Your Safety xli Notices xlix Getting to Know the Camera 1 Parts of the Camera 1 Camera Body 1 The Power Switch 8 The Top Control Panel 9 The Rear Control Panel 11 The Viewfinder 12 The Live View Displays Photos Movies 15 Touch Controls 18 Table of Contents ...

Page 7: ...ery Level and Number of Exposures Remaining 47 Battery Level 47 Memory Card Indicators and Number of Exposures Remaining 48 Basic Photography and Playback 50 Taking Photographs 50 Framing Photographs in the Viewfinder Viewfinder Photography 50 Framing Photographs in the Monitor Live View 55 Recording Movies 63 Taking Photos During Filming 70 Playback 71 Viewing Movies 73 Deleting Unwanted Pictures...

Page 8: ...ton 80 Using the Menus 81 The i Button the i Menu 88 The Still Photography i Menu 90 The Movie i Menu 92 The Playback i Menu 93 The R Button 94 Viewfinder Photography 94 Live View Photography 95 The Focus Mode Selector 97 The AF Mode Button 98 Choosing an AF Mode 98 Choosing an AF Area Mode 101 The AF ON Button 107 The I Button 108 Choosing an Exposure Mode 108 ...

Page 9: ...Enabling Auto ISO Sensitivity Control 116 The E Button 117 Adjusting Exposure Compensation 117 The T Button 118 Adjusting Image Quality 118 Choosing an Image Size 120 The U Button 121 Adjusting White Balance 121 The g h Q Button 125 Choosing a Picture Control 125 The W N Button 131 Choosing a Flash Mode 131 Adjusting Flash Compensation 133 The Pv Button 134 The Fn1 Fn2 Fn3 C and Fn Vertical Button...

Page 10: ...uses Focus 148 Choosing a Focus Mode 148 Autofocus Mode 149 AF Area Mode 153 Focus Point Selection 164 Custom Focus Groups 167 Focus Lock 170 Manual Focus 174 Exposure Related Settings Metering and Exposure Compensation 178 Choosing How the Camera Sets Exposure 178 Choosing an Exposure Mode 182 Long Time Exposures Mode M Only 191 Shutter Speed and Aperture Lock 194 Autoexposure Lock 196 Exposure C...

Page 11: ... Camera s Sensitivity to Light ISO Sensitivity 213 ISO Sensitivity 213 Auto ISO Sensitivity Control 216 Achieving Natural Colors with Different Light Sources White Balance 221 White Balance 221 Fine Tuning White Balance 227 Choosing a Color Temperature 231 Preset Manual 234 Varying Exposure or White Balance over a Series of Photographs Bracketing 249 Bracketing 250 Exposure and Flash Bracketing 25...

Page 12: ... and HDR 281 Active D Lighting 281 High Dynamic Range HDR 283 Movie Recording and Editing 292 Image Area Choosing a Movie Crop 292 Frame Size Frame Rate and Movie Quality 294 The Movie Crop 296 Points to Note When Recording Movies 297 Editing Movies 300 Trimming Movies 301 Saving Selected Frames as JPEG Stills 306 Adding Indices to Movies 307 Other Shooting Options 308 Using Two Memory Cards 308 D...

Page 13: ...ng Multiple Exposures 330 Taking Photos at a Set Interval Interval Timer Shooting 331 Interval Timer Shooting Options 331 Interval Timer Photography 336 Pausing Interval Timer Photography 345 Resuming Interval Timer Shooting 346 Ending Interval Timer Shooting 347 Creating a Movie from Photos Time Lapse Movie 348 Time Lapse Movie Options 348 Recording Time Lapse Movies 350 Varying Focus over a Seri...

Page 14: ...Recalling Non CPU Lens Data 383 Location Data 384 Location Data Options 384 Playback 390 Viewing Pictures 390 Full Frame Playback 390 Thumbnail Playback 391 Playback Controls 392 Playback Touch Controls 395 The i Button 399 Photo Information 405 File Information 406 Exposure Data 407 Highlights 407 RGB Histogram 408 Shooting Data 410 Overview 416 Playback Zoom 418 Using Playback Zoom 419 ...

Page 15: ...tures 429 Using the Delete Button 429 Deleting Multiple Pictures 431 Voice Memos 436 Recording Voice Memos 436 During Playback 436 During Shooting 438 Playing Voice Memos 443 Deleting Voice Memos 444 Connecting to Computers and TVs 445 Connecting to Computers 445 Connecting via USB 445 Ethernet and Wireless Networks Wi Fi 451 Connecting to HDMI Devices 453 TVs 454 Recorders 454 ...

Page 16: ...ions 460 Connecting via Wi Fi Wi Fi Mode 461 Connecting via Bluetooth 469 Connecting to Computers via Wi Fi 485 What Wi Fi Can Do for You 485 The Wireless Transmitter Utility 485 Infrastructure and Access Point Modes 486 Connecting in Access Point Mode 488 Connecting in Infrastructure Mode 494 Uploading Pictures 503 Disconnecting and Reconnecting 510 Troubleshooting Built in Wi Fi 512 ...

Page 17: ...e Photography Camera Control Mode 517 Browser Based Remote Photography HTTP Server Mode 517 Camera Based Remote Photography Synchronized Release 518 Clock Synchronization Synchronize Date and Time 518 Connecting an Ethernet Cable or WT 6 520 Connecting an Ethernet Cable 520 Attaching the WT 6 521 Creating a Network Profile Ethernet 522 Image Transfer and Camera Control Modes 523 HTTP Server Mode 5...

Page 18: ...necting to a Computer or FTP Server 585 Camera Control 595 The Wired LAN WT Status Display 598 HTTP Server 601 The Wired LAN WT Status Display 607 Computer Android and iPad Web Browsers 610 iPhone Web Browsers 622 Synchronized Release 628 About Synchronized Release 628 Using Synchronized Release 629 Synchronizing Camera Clocks 633 Ethernet Wireless Transmitter Troubleshooting 636 Problems and Solu...

Page 19: ...sh Mode 651 Flash Compensation 653 Adjusting Flash Compensation 653 FV Lock 655 Flash Info for On Camera Units 659 Flash Control Mode Displays 660 Remote Flash Photography 663 What Is Remote Flash Photography 663 Using Remote Flash Units 664 Radio AWL 665 Establishing a Wireless Connection 665 Remote Flash Photography 670 Adding a Shoe Mounted Flash Unit 679 Optical AWL 680 Using Optical AWL with ...

Page 20: ...Menu Defaults 700 Movie Shooting Menu Defaults 707 Custom Settings Menu Defaults 709 Setup Menu Defaults 722 D The Playback Menu Managing Images 730 Delete 731 Playback Folder 732 Playback Display Options 733 Delete Images from Both Slots 734 Dual Format Recording PB Slot 735 Filtered Playback Criteria 735 Image Review 735 After Delete 736 After Burst Show 737 Rotate Tall 738 ...

Page 21: ... Menu Bank 752 Renaming Photo Shooting Menu Banks 753 Restoring Default Settings 753 Extended Photo Menu Banks 754 Storage Folder 755 Renaming Folders 755 Select Folder by Number 756 Select Folder from List 758 File Naming 760 Role Played by Card in Slot 2 761 Image Area 761 Image Quality 761 Image Size 762 NEF RAW Recording 762 NEF RAW Compression 763 NEF RAW Bit Depth 763 ...

Page 22: ... Vignette Control 769 Diffraction Compensation 770 Auto Distortion Control 771 Flicker Reduction 772 Flash Control 774 Flash Control Mode 775 Wireless Flash Options 776 Remote Flash Control 777 Radio Remote Flash Info 777 Auto Bracketing 778 Multiple Exposure 779 HDR High Dynamic Range 779 Interval Timer Shooting 780 Time Lapse Movie 780 Focus Shift Shooting 780 Silent Live View Photography 781 ...

Page 23: ... Frame Rate 784 Movie Quality 785 Movie File Type 785 ISO Sensitivity Settings 786 White Balance 787 Set Picture Control 788 Manage Picture Control 788 Active D Lighting 788 High ISO NR 789 Diffraction Compensation 789 Flicker Reduction 790 Electronic VR 791 Microphone Sensitivity 792 Attenuator 793 Frequency Response 793 Wind Noise Reduction 794 Headphone Volume 794 Timecode 795 ...

Page 24: ...05 Blocked Shot AF Response 806 Subject Motion 806 a4 Focus Points Used 807 a5 Store Points by Orientation 808 a6 AF Activation 810 a7 Single Point AF Watch Area 811 a8 3D Tracking Face Detection 811 a9 Group Area AF Face Detection 812 a10 Custom Groupings C1 C2 812 a11 Auto Area AF Face Detection 812 a12 Auto Area AF Starting Point 813 a13 Focus Point Persistence 813 a14 Limit AF Area Mode Select...

Page 25: ...osure Cntrl 818 b3 Exp Flash Comp Step Value 818 b4 Easy Exposure Compensation 819 b5 Matrix Metering 820 b6 Center Weighted Area 820 b7 Fine Tune Optimal Exposure 821 c Timers AE Lock 822 c1 Shutter Release Button AE L 822 c2 Standby Timer 822 c3 Self Timer 823 c4 Monitor Off Delay 823 d Shooting Display 824 d1 Continuous Shooting Speed 824 d2 Max Continuous Release 825 d3 Limit Release Mode Sele...

Page 26: ...d11 Framing Grid Display 832 d12 Rear Control Panel 833 d13 LCD Illumination 833 d14 Live View in Continuous Mode 835 d15 Optical VR 835 e Bracketing Flash 836 e1 Flash Sync Speed 836 e2 Flash Shutter Speed 838 e3 Exposure Comp for Flash 838 e4 Auto N ISO Sensitivity Control 839 e5 Flash Burst Priority 840 e6 Modeling Flash 840 e7 Auto Bracketing Mode M 841 e8 Bracketing Order 842 e9 Bracketing Bu...

Page 27: ...y 864 Live View 865 Playback Mode 866 f5 Shutter Spd Aperture Lock 867 f6 Customize Command Dials 867 Reverse Rotation 868 Change Main Sub 868 Aperture Setting 869 Menus and Playback 870 Sub Dial Frame Advance 871 f7 Multi Selector 872 f8 Release Button to Use Dial 872 f9 Reverse Indicators 873 f10 Live View Button Options 874 f11 D Switch 874 f12 Full Frame Playback Flicks 875 Flick Up Flick Down...

Page 28: ...splay 884 Display Pattern 885 Highlight Display Threshold 885 B The Setup Menu Camera Setup 886 Format Memory Card 887 Language 888 Time Zone and Date 889 Monitor Brightness 889 Monitor Color Balance 890 Virtual Horizon 892 Information Display 893 AF Fine Tuning Options 894 Creating and Saving Fine Tuning Values 897 Choosing a Default Fine Tuning Value 899 Auto AF Fine Tuning 900 Non CPU Lens Data...

Page 29: ...11 Input Comment 911 Attach Comment 912 Copyright Information 912 Artist Copyright 913 Attach Copyright Information 913 IPTC 914 Renaming Editing and Copying Presets 915 Deleting Presets 915 Embedding Presets 916 Copying Presets to a Memory Card 916 Copying Presets to the Camera 917 Voice Memo Options 920 Voice Memo 920 Voice Memo Overwrite 921 Voice Memo Control 921 Audio Output 922 ...

Page 30: ...ilt In 925 Wireless Remote WR Options 925 LED Lamp 926 Link Mode 926 Assign Remote WR Fn Button 928 Airplane Mode 929 Connect to Smart Device 929 Pairing Bluetooth 930 Select to Send Bluetooth 930 Wi Fi Connection 931 Send While Off 932 Location Data Smart Device 932 Connect to PC Built in Wi Fi 932 Wi Fi Connection 932 Network Settings 933 Options 935 MAC Address 936 ...

Page 31: ...ty Release Lock 951 Save Load Menu Settings 952 Save Menu Settings 956 Load Menu Settings 956 Reset All Settings 957 Firmware Version 957 N The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies 958 Creating Retouched Copies 959 NEF RAW Processing Converting NEF RAW to JPEG 962 Trim 967 Resize 968 Resizing Multiple Pictures 968 D Lighting 973 Red Eye Correction 974 Straighten 975 ...

Page 32: ...nt Settings 990 O My Menu Creating a Custom Menu 990 m Recent Settings Accessing Recently Used Settings 997 Troubleshooting 998 Before Contacting Customer Support 998 Problems and Solutions 1000 Battery Display 1000 Shooting 1002 Playback 1009 Bluetooth and Wi Fi Wireless Networks 1011 Miscellaneous 1011 Alerts and Error Messages 1012 Alerts 1012 Error Messages 1017 ...

Page 33: ... 1036 Compatible F Mount Lenses 1037 CPU lenses 1037 Non CPU lenses and Other Accessories 1045 The Electronic Rangefinder 1049 Compatible Flash Units 1051 The Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS 1051 Other Compatible Accessories 1060 Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter 1069 Software 1071 Caring for the Camera 1073 Storage 1073 Cleaning 1073 The Low Pass Filter 1075 Replacing the Clock Batter...

Page 34: ... 1092 Exposure Program 1093 Specifications 1094 Nikon D6 Digital Camera 1094 Calibrating Batteries 1114 Approved Memory Cards 1119 Memory Card Capacity 1120 FX 36 24 Selected for Image Area 1120 DX 24 16 Selected for Image Area 1122 Battery Endurance 1125 Location Data GPS GLONASS 1128 Trademarks and Licenses 1129 Index 1137 ...

Page 35: ...folder Playback display options Delete images from both slots Dual format recording PB slot Filtered playback criteria Image review After delete After burst show Rotate tall Copy image s Hide image Slide show PHOTO SHOOTING MENU Photo shooting menu bank Extended photo menu banks Storage folder File naming Role played by card in Slot 2 Image area Image quality Image size NEF RAW recording ISO sensi...

Page 36: ...ive view photography PHOTO SHOOTING MENU MOVIE SHOOTING MENU Reset movie shooting menu File naming Destination Image area Frame size frame rate Movie quality Movie file type ISO sensitivity settings White balance Set Picture Control Manage Picture Control Active D Lighting High ISO NR Diffraction compensation Flicker reduction Electronic VR Microphone sensitivity Attenuator Frequency response Wind...

Page 37: ...F face detection a12 Auto area AF starting point a13 Focus point persistence a14 Limit AF area mode selection a15 Autofocus mode restrictions a16 Focus point wrap around a17 Focus point options a18 Manual focus ring in AF mode b Metering exposure b1 ISO sensitivity step value b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl b3 Exp flash comp step value b4 Easy exposure compensation b5 Matrix metering b6 Center weig...

Page 38: ...ble image area d9 File number sequence d10 Peaking highlights d11 Framing grid display d12 Rear control panel d13 LCD illumination d14 Live view in continuous mode d15 Optical VR CUSTOM SETTING MENU e Bracketing flash e1 Flash sync speed e2 Flash shutter speed e3 Exposure comp for flash e4 Auto N ISO sensitivity control e5 Flash burst priority e6 Modeling flash e7 Auto bracketing mode M e8 Bracket...

Page 39: ...back flicks g Movie g1 Customize i menu g2 Custom controls g3 Multi selector center button g4 Highlight display CUSTOM SETTING MENU SETUP MENU Format memory card Language Time zone and date Monitor brightness Monitor color balance Virtual horizon Information display AF fine tuning options Non CPU lens data Clean image sensor Lock mirror up for cleaning Image Dust Off ref photo Pixel mapping Image ...

Page 40: ...N WT Conformity marking Battery info Slot empty release lock Save load menu settings Reset all settings Firmware version SETUP MENU RETOUCH MENU NEF RAW processing Trim Resize D Lighting Red eye correction Straighten Distortion control Perspective control Monochrome Image overlay Trim movie MY MENU Add items Remove items Rank items Choose tab ...

Page 41: ...A CAUTION Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon could result in injury or property damage A WARNING Do not use while walking or operating a vehicle Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents or other injury Do not disassemble or modify this product Do not touch internal parts that become exposed as the result of a fall or other accident Failure to observe these...

Page 42: ...xplosion or fire Do not directly view the sun or other bright light source through the lens or camera Failure to observe this precaution could result in visual impairment Do not aim the flash or AF assist illuminator at the operator of a motor vehicle Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents Keep this product out of reach of children Failure to observe this precaution could res...

Page 43: ...ns could result in fire or electric shock Do not handle the plug when charging the product or using the AC adapter during thunderstorms Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock Do not handle with bare hands in locations exposed to extremely high or low temperatures Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns or frostbite A CAUTION Do not leave the lens pointed...

Page 44: ... in fire or product malfunction Do not fire the flash in contact with or in close proximity to the skin or objects Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns or fire Do not leave the product where it will be exposed to extremely high temperatures for an extended period such as in an enclosed automobile or in direct sunlight Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or p...

Page 45: ...e terminals by touching them to necklaces hairpins or other metal objects Do not expose batteries or the products in which they are inserted to powerful physical shocks Do not step on batteries pierce them with nails or strike them with hammers Charge only as indicated Failure to observe this precaution could result in the batteries leaking overheating rupturing or catching fire If battery liquid ...

Page 46: ...uld it become wet Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the batteries such as discoloration or deformation Cease charging EN EL18c rechargeable batteries if they do not charge in the specified period of time Failure to observe these precautions could result in the batteries leaking overheating rupturing or catching fire When batteries are no longer needed insulate the termin...

Page 47: ...he battery Do not expose batteries to flame or excessive heat Do not disassemble Do not short circuit the terminals by touching them to necklaces hairpins or other metal objects Do not expose batteries or the products in which they are inserted to powerful physical shocks If battery liquid comes into contact with the eyes rinse with plenty of clean water and seek immediate medical attention Delayi...

Page 48: ...s discoloration or deformation Failure to observe this precaution could result in the battery leaking overheating rupturing or catching fire Insert the battery in the correct orientation Failure to observe this precaution could result in the battery leaking overheating rupturing or catching fire When batteries are no longer needed insulate the terminals with tape Overheating rupture or fire may re...

Page 49: ...appearance and specifications of the hardware and software described in these manuals at any time and without prior notice Nikon will not be held liable for any damages resulting from the use of this product While every effort has been made to ensure that the information in these manuals is accurate and complete we would appreciate it were you to bring any errors or omissions to the attention of t...

Page 50: ...copying or reproduction of stamps issued by the government and of certified documents stipulated by law is prohibited Cautions on certain copies and reproductions The government has issued cautions on copies or reproductions of securities issued by private companies shares bills checks gift certificates etc commuter passes or coupon tickets except when a minimum of necessary copies are to be provi...

Page 51: ...re engineered and proven to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry The use of non Nikon electronic accessories could damage the camera and may void your Nikon warranty The use of third party rechargeable Li ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries o...

Page 52: ...support and education continually updated information is available on line at the following sites For users in the U S A https www nikonusa com For users in Europe and Africa https www europe nikon com support For users in Asia Oceania and the Middle East https www nikon asia com Visit these sites to keep up to date with the latest product information tips answers to frequently asked questions FAQ...

Page 53: ...mera Camera Body Parts of the Camera 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 4 1 GNSS antenna 0 384 2 I button 0 108 3 Release mode dial lock release 0 109 203 4 Eyelet for camera strap 0 27 5 BKT button 0 113 251 259 265 6 Release mode dial 0 109 203 7 Y button 0 111 178 ...

Page 54: ... 63 2 Power switch 0 8 3 Shutter release button 0 50 4 E button 0 117 199 5 S Q button 0 114 213 887 6 Top control panel 0 9 1033 7 E focal plane mark 0 177 8 Diopter adjustment control 0 14 9 Accessory shoe for optional flash unit 0 641 10 Accessory shoe cover 0 1066 ...

Page 55: ...ver 9 HDMI connector cover 10 Cover for microphone headphone and Ethernet connectors 11 Lens release button 0 37 12 Battery chamber cover latch 0 32 13 Battery chamber cover 0 32 14 AF mode button 0 98 152 163 15 Focus mode selector 0 97 148 174 16 Flash sync terminal 0 644 17 Ten pin remote terminal 18 Peripheral connector 0 521 19 USB connector 0 445 20 HDMI connector 0 453 21 Connector for exte...

Page 56: ... 135 4 Fn2 button 0 135 5 Sub command dial for vertical shooting 0 867 6 Shutter release button for vertical shooting 7 Fn button vertical 0 135 8 Security slot for anti theft cable 0 7 9 Lens mounting mark 0 35 10 Lens mount 0 35 11 CPU contacts 12 Tripod socket 13 Vertical shooting shutter release button lock 0 54 ...

Page 57: ...utton 0 87 125 273 421 6 X button 0 61 418 7 W M button 0 61 131 651 653 8 J OK button 0 81 9 Network indicator 0 593 10 Fn3 C button 0 135 436 11 Rear control panel 0 11 1036 12 S button 0 109 208 312 13 T button 0 118 144 147 14 U button 0 121 221 312 15 R button 0 94 16 Viewfinder 0 14 17 Focus selector lock 0 164 18 Memory card access lamp 0 38 19 i button 0 88 399 ...

Page 58: ...3 874 6 Live view selector 0 55 63 7 Sub selector 0 166 170 196 8 AF ON button 0 107 173 9 Main command dial 0 867 10 Multi selector 0 81 393 11 Memory card slot cover 0 38 12 Card slot cover release button cover 0 38 Card slot cover release button under cover 0 38 13 C button 0 107 14 Multi selector vertical 0 166 15 Main command dial vertical 0 867 Speaker 16 Microphone for voice memos 0 436 ...

Page 59: ...ctors could cause malfunction D The Speaker Close proximity to the speaker could corrupt data stored on magnetic stripe cards or other such magnetic storage devices Keep magnetic storage devices away from the speaker A The Security Slot The security slot serves as an attachment point for third party anti theft cables It is compatible and intended for use with Kensington security cable locks For mo...

Page 60: ...e LCD Illuminator Rotating the power switch to D activates the backlights for the buttons and control panels LCD illuminator The backlights will remain lit for a few seconds after the power switch is released The backlights turn off when the switch is rotated to D a second time or the shutter is released Activating the button backlight makes the camera easier to use in the dark ...

Page 61: ...82 3 AF area mode indicator 0 101 163 4 Metering 0 111 178 5 Photo shooting menu bank 0 752 6 Custom settings bank 0 802 7 Autofocus mode 0 98 149 8 ISO sensitivity indicator 0 114 213 9 ISO sensitivity 0 114 213 10 Aperture f number 0 186 188 11 Exposure indicator Exposure 0 190 Exposure compensation 0 117 199 12 Memory card icon Slot 2 0 41 48 13 Battery indicator 0 47 14 k appears when memory r...

Page 62: ...ted the memory card icon the number of photos in the current folder q and the number of exposures remaining w will be displayed in the top control panel Depending on the memory card the camera may in rare cases not display this information when a card is inserted This can be addressed by turning the camera on ...

Page 63: ...at default settings For a full list of the indicators that may be displayed see Camera Displays 0 1036 in Technical Notes 4 3 1 2 5 1 Release mode 0 109 203 2 Size JPEG images 0 120 145 3 Image quality 0 118 144 4 White balance 0 121 221 5 Role played by memory card in Slot 2 0 308 Image quality 0 118 144 ...

Page 64: ... 111 178 2 Focus points 0 164 3 AF area brackets 0 50 164 4 Focus indicator 0 50 176 5 Metering 0 111 178 6 Exposure mode 0 108 182 7 Shutter speed 0 185 188 Autofocus mode 0 98 149 8 Aperture f number 0 186 188 9 ISO sensitivity indicator 0 114 213 10 ISO sensitivity 0 114 213 AF area mode 0 101 157 11 Battery indicator 0 47 12 Number of exposures remaining 0 48 1120 Number of shots remaining bef...

Page 65: ...ss of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with temperature and response times may drop when the temperature is low the displays will return to normal at room temperature D The Viewfinder Eyepiece Shutter To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with photographs or exposure raise the viewfinder eyepiece shutter lever to close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter when taking ...

Page 66: ...trol With your eye to the viewfinder rotate the diopter control until display in the viewfinder is in sharp focus Corrective lenses available separately can be used to further adjust viewfinder diopter After adjusting diopter push the diopter adjustment control back into its original position Viewfinder not in focus Viewfinder in focus ...

Page 67: ...vies Live View Photography The following indicators appear in the monitor at default settings For a full list of the indicators that may be displayed see Camera Displays 0 1029 in Technical Notes 1 2 8 4 3 5 6 7 1 Exposure mode 0 108 151 2 Focus point 0 164 3 Autofocus mode 0 98 151 4 AF area mode 0 101 160 5 Active D Lighting 0 281 6 Picture Control 0 125 271 7 White balance 0 121 221 8 Image are...

Page 68: ...icon 0 88 3 k appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures 0 48 4 Number of exposures remaining 0 48 1120 5 ISO sensitivity 0 114 213 6 ISO sensitivity indicator 0 114 213 7 Aperture 0 186 188 8 Shutter speed 0 185 188 9 Metering 0 111 178 10 Battery indicator 0 47 ...

Page 69: ...4 5 6 7 1 Recording indicator 0 63 No movie indicator 0 297 2 Frame size and rate image quality 0 294 3 Time remaining 0 63 4 Release mode still photography 0 70 5 Sound level 0 66 6 Microphone sensitivity 0 792 7 Frequency response 0 793 ...

Page 70: ...rs a variety of controls that can be operated by touching the display with your fingers Touch controls can be used to Focus and release the shutter 0 19 Adjust settings 0 20 View pictures 0 21 View movies 0 23 Access the i menu 0 23 Enter text 0 24 Navigate the menus 0 25 ...

Page 71: ... Shutter Touch the monitor during live view to focus on the selected point touch AF During still photography the shutter will be released when you lift your finger from the display touch shutter Touch AF settings can be adjusted by tapping the W icon ...

Page 72: ...he Camera Adjusting Settings Tap highlighted settings in the display You can then choose the desired option by tapping icons or sliders Tap Z or press J to select the chosen option and return to the previous display ...

Page 73: ...ick left or right to view other pictures during full frame playback In full frame playback touching the bottom of the display brings up a frame advance bar Slide your finger left or right over the bar to scroll rapidly to other pictures ...

Page 74: ...e zoom ratio using stretch gestures to zoom in and pinch gestures to zoom out Use slide gestures to view other parts of the image during zoom Giving the display two quick taps while zoom is in effect cancels zoom To zoom out to a thumbnail view use a pinch gesture in full frame playback Use pinch and stretch to choose the number of images displayed from 4 9 and 72 frames ...

Page 75: ...s Movies are indicated by a 1 icon to start playback tap the on screen guide Tap the display to pause Tap again to resume Tap Z to exit to full frame playback The i Menu When the i menu 0 88 is displayed you can tap items to view options ...

Page 76: ...can enter text by tapping the keys To position the cursor tap e or f or tap directly in the text display area To cycle through the upper and lower case and symbol keyboards tap the keyboard selection button 3 2 1 1 Text display area 2 Keyboard area 3 Keyboard selection ...

Page 77: ...pressing the G button to display the menus you can slide up or down to scroll Tap a menu icon to choose a menu Tap menu items to display options You can then choose the desired option by tapping icons or sliders To exit without changing settings tap Z ...

Page 78: ...es select Enabled for Touch controls Glove mode in the setup menu Do not touch the screen with sharp objects Do not use excessive force The screen may not respond when covered with third party protective films The screen may not respond when touched simultaneously in multiple locations A Enabling or Disabling Touch Controls Touch controls can be enabled or disabled using the Touch controls item in...

Page 79: ...27 Readying the Camera First Steps Attaching the Strap To attach a strap whether the supplied strap or one that has been purchased separately Readying the Camera ...

Page 80: ...re use An exhausted battery will fully charge in about two hours and 35 minutes D The Battery and Charger Read and follow the warnings and cautions in For Your Safety 0 xli and Caring for the Camera and Battery Cautions 0 1085 1 Connect the power cable to the charger 2 Plug the charger in 3 Remove the battery terminal cover ...

Page 81: ...29 Readying the Camera 4 Remove the contact protector Slide the contact protector from the charger as shown 5 Charge the battery 1 Contacts 2 Guide 3 Chamber lamps 4 Charge lamps green ...

Page 82: ... chamber containing the battery L or R will start to flash as charging begins Charging is complete when the chamber lamp stops flashing and the charge lamps turn off Battery status is shown by the chamber and charge lamps Charge state 50 50 80 80 100 100 Chamber lamp H flashes H flashes H flashes K on Charge lamps 100 I off I off H flashes I off 80 I off H flashes K on I off 50 H flashes K on K on...

Page 83: ...D Warning Indicators If the MH 26a chamber and charge lamps flash on and off in sequence take the steps described below If no battery inserted There is a problem with the charger Unplug the charger and consult a Nikon authorized service representative If a battery is inserted A problem has occurred with the battery or charger during charging Remove the battery unplug the charger and consult a Niko...

Page 84: ...ch turn it to the open A position q and remove the battery chamber cover w 2 Attach the cover to the battery If the battery release is positioned so that the arrow H is visible slide the battery release to cover the arrow H Insert the two projections on the battery into the matching slots in the cover as shown The battery release will slide aside to completely reveal the arrow H ...

Page 85: ...tery Insert the battery fully and securely as shown 4 Latch the cover Rotate the latch to the closed position q and fold it down as shown w Be sure the cover is securely latched to prevent the battery from becoming dislodged during operation ...

Page 86: ...so that it can be removed from the battery slide the battery release in the direction indicated by the arrow H until it stops D The Battery Chamber Cover Use BL 6 battery chamber covers only other battery chamber covers cannot be used with this camera The battery can be charged with the cover attached To prevent dust accumulating inside the battery chamber replace the battery chamber cover on the ...

Page 87: ... manual for illustrative purposes is an AF S NIKKOR 50mm f 1 4G Be careful to prevent dust entering the camera Confirm that the camera is off before attaching the lens Remove the camera body cap q w and rear lens cap e r Align the mounting marks on the camera t and lens y ...

Page 88: ...nses with Aperture Rings When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring 0 1044 lock aperture at the minimum setting highest f number D Lens Focus Mode If the lens is equipped with a focus mode switch select autofocus mode A M A or A M D Image Area The DX format image area is automatically selected when a DX lens is attached ...

Page 89: ... the Camera Detaching Lenses After turning the camera off press and hold the lens release button q while turning the lens in the direction shown w After removing the lens replace the lens caps and camera body cap ...

Page 90: ...emory cards Turn the camera off before inserting or removing memory cards Do not push on the memory card while pressing the eject button Failure to observe this precaution could damage the camera or memory card 1 Open the card slot cover Open the door protecting the card slot cover release button q and press the release button w to open the card slot e ...

Page 91: ...ng the card with the rear label toward the monitor slide it all the way into the slot When the memory card is fully inserted the eject button q will pop up and the green memory card access lamp w will light briefly 3 Close the card slot cover If this is the first time the memory card will be used after being used or formatted in another device format the card in the camera before proceeding ...

Page 92: ... each memory card and each with the same image quality and size RAW Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 The NEF RAW copies of photos taken at settings of NEF RAW JPEG are recorded only to the card in Slot 1 the JPEG copies only to the card in Slot 2 JPEG Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 Two JPEG copies are recorded one to each memory card but at different sizes Removing Memory Cards After confirming that the memory card access ...

Page 93: ...Do not disconnect AC adapters Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects Do not use excessive force when handling memory cards Failure to observe this precaution could damage the card Do not bend or drop memory cards or subject them to strong physical shocks Do not expose memory cards to water heat or direct sunlight Do not format memory cards in a computer D Memory Card Ic...

Page 94: ...ard Inserted If no memory card is inserted the exposure count displays in the viewfinder and top control panel will show S If the camera is turned off with a battery and no memory card inserted S will be displayed in the top control panel ...

Page 95: ...me menus are displayed Choose a language and set the camera clock 1 Turn the camera on 2 Highlight Language in the setup menu and press 2 The Language item is automatically highlighted in the setup menu the first time the G button is pressed after purchase For information on using the menus see Using the Menus 0 81 ...

Page 96: ...n which the camera was originally purchased 4 Highlight Time zone and date and press 2 5 Choose a time zone Select Time zone in the Time zone and date display Highlight a time zone in the Time zone display and press J The display shows a time zone map listing the selected cities in the chosen zone and the difference between the time in the chosen zone and UTC ...

Page 97: ...dvances the clock one hour to undo the effect select Off 7 Set the clock Select Date and time in the Time zone and date display Press J after using the multi selector to set the clock to the date and time in the selected time zone note that the camera uses a 24 hour clock 8 Choose a date format Select Date format in the Time zone and date display Highlight the desired date year month and day displ...

Page 98: ...s time to purchase a replacement For information on replacing the clock battery see Replacing the Clock Battery 0 1083 A Setting the Clock via GNSS To record your location and the current UTC Universal Coordinated Time select On for Location data built in Record location data To set the camera clock to the time supplied by the built in GNSS receiver select Yes for Location data built in Set clock ...

Page 99: ...vel before taking photographs The battery level is shown in the top control panel and viewfinder The Battery Level and Number of Exposures Remaining Top control panel Viewfinder Description L Battery fully charged K Battery partially discharged J I H d Low battery Charge battery or ready spare battery H flashes d flashes Shutter release disabled Charge or exchange battery ...

Page 100: ... the number of exposures remaining The top control panel shows the slot or slots that currently hold a memory card the example shows the icons displayed when cards are inserted in both slots At default settings Overflow is selected for Role played by card in Slot 2 in the photo shooting menu When two memory cards are inserted pictures will first be recorded to the card in Slot 1 switching to Slot ...

Page 101: ... recorded to the card in Slot 1 When the card in Slot 1 is full the display will show the number of exposures remaining on the card in Slot 2 Values over 1000 are rounded down to the nearest hundred For example values in the vicinity of 1400 are shown as 1 4 k If the memory card is full or a card error has occurred the icon for the affected slot will flash ...

Page 102: ...finder photography or in the monitor live view photography Framing Photographs in the Viewfinder Viewfinder Photography 1 Ready the camera Holding the handgrip in your right hand and cradling the camera body or lens with your left bring your elbows in against the sides of your chest Taking Photographs ...

Page 103: ... halfway to focus The in focus indicator I will appear in the viewfinder when the focus operation is complete You can also focus by pressing the AF ON button Viewfinder display Description steady The subject is in focus steady The focus point is in front of the subject steady The focus point is behind the subject flashes The camera is unable to focus using autofocus ...

Page 104: ...e button the rest of the way down to take the photograph The memory card access lamp will light while the photograph is being recorded Do not eject the memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the lamp has gone out and recording is complete ...

Page 105: ...if no operations are performed for about 6 seconds The viewfinder display and the shutter speed and aperture indicators in the top control panel turn off when the timer expires To restart the timer and restore the displays press the shutter release button halfway a second time The length of time before the standby timer expires can be adjusted using Custom Setting c2 Standby timer Standby timer on...

Page 106: ...ols for use in portrait tall orientation including vertical shutter release Fn and AF ON buttons main and sub command dials and a multi selector Rotate the vertical shooting shutter release button lock to L to avoid accidentally operating these controls when the camera is in landscape wide orientation ...

Page 107: ...iew selector to C live view photography 2 Press the a button The mirror will be raised and live view will start The viewfinder will go dark and the view through the lens will be displayed in the monitor During live view exposure for movies and photographs can be previewed in the monitor ...

Page 108: ...aking Photographs 3 Ready the camera Hold the handgrip securely in your right hand and cradle the camera body or lens with your left 4 Frame the photograph Position the subject near the center of the frame ...

Page 109: ... focus for example because the subject is too close to the camera the focus point will flash red To preview exposure in the monitor as shown in the illustration exposure preview press the J button You can preview how the settings selected for shutter speed aperture and ISO sensitivity affect exposure during shooting Exposure compensation can be adjusted by 5 EV although only values between 3 and 3...

Page 110: ...58 Taking Photographs 6 Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to take the photograph The monitor turns off during shooting 7 Press the a button to exit live view ...

Page 111: ...is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other bright momentary light source Flicker and banding visible in the monitor under fluorescent mercury vapor or sodium lamps can be reduced using the Flicker reduction item in the movie shooting menu although they may still be visible in photographs taken at some shutter speeds To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with photographs or expo...

Page 112: ...tures and the like A count down will be displayed in red starting 30 s before the camera shuts down to protect its internal circuits Depending on shooting conditions the timer may appear immediately when live view is selected D Exposure Preview Exposure preview is not available when A Bulb or Time is selected for shutter speed The preview may not accurately reflect the final results when Flash lig...

Page 113: ...live view photography 0 19 A Live View Zoom Preview Press the X button to magnify the view in the monitor up to a maximum of about 11 Press X to zoom in W M to zoom out A navigation window will appear in a gray frame at the bottom right corner of the display Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the frame not visible in the monitor ...

Page 114: ...s the Pv button To return aperture to its original value press the Pv button again or focus using autofocus If the shutter release button is pressed all the way down to take a picture during focus preview aperture will return to the original value before the photo is taken The maximum aperture icon t is displayed while maximum aperture is selected ...

Page 115: ...ated to 1 while recording refers to the act of shooting footage using the movie record button 1 Rotate the live view selector to 1 movie live view 2 Press the a button The mirror will be raised and live view will start The viewfinder will go dark and the view through the lens will be displayed in the monitor During live view exposure for movies and photographs can be previewed in the monitor Recor...

Page 116: ...64 Recording Movies 3 Press the AF ON button to focus Focus before beginning recording Focus can be adjusted by tapping your subject in the monitor 4 Press the movie record button to start recording ...

Page 117: ...that can be recorded to the memory card The camera can be refocused during recording by pressing the AF ON button or by tapping your subject in the monitor Sound is recorded via the built in microphone for movie recording Do not cover the microphone during recording Exposure can be altered by up to 3 EV using exposure compensation 2 1 1 Recording indicator 2 Time remaining ...

Page 118: ...display These phenomena will also be visible in any footage recorded with the camera Flicker or banding in scenes lit by such sources as fluorescent mercury vapor or sodium lamps Distortion associated with motion individual subjects such as trains or cars moving at high speed through the frame may be distorted or the entire frame may appear distorted when the camera is panned horizontally ...

Page 119: ...iew through the lens 0 69 during filming Movie recording will end automatically if The maximum length is reached The live view selector is rotated to another setting The lens is removed When recording movies avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera s internal circuitry Sounds made by the camera may be...

Page 120: ...ts internal circuits from high temperatures and the like A count down will be displayed in red starting 30 s before the camera shuts down to protect its internal circuits Depending on shooting conditions the timer may appear immediately when live view is selected Note that regardless of the time available displayed in the top right corner of the monitor live view and movie recording will end autom...

Page 121: ...us can also be adjusted by pressing the shutter release button halfway A Live View Zoom Preview Press the X button to zoom in on the view in the monitor 0 61 For a 100 zoom ratio during recording press the X button Press W M to restore the previous zoom ratio ...

Page 122: ...orded at the dimensions currently selected for movie frame size Photos are recorded in JPEG finec format regardless of the option selected for image quality Photos are recorded to the card in the slot selected for Destination in the movie shooting menu The frame advance rate for continuous release modes varies with the option selected for Frame size frame rate While recording is in progress only o...

Page 123: ...ed in the monitor The memory card containing the picture currently displayed is shown by an icon 2 Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures Additional pictures can also be viewed by flicking a finger left or right over the display 0 21 To end playback and return to shooting mode press the shutter release button halfway Playback ...

Page 124: ...72 Playback A Image Review When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting without the user pressing the K button ...

Page 125: ...y a 1 icon Tap the a icon in the display or press the center of the multi selector to start playback a progress bar shows your approximate position in the movie 1 1 icon 2 Length 3 a icon 4 Current position total length 5 Progress bar 6 Volume 7 Guide ...

Page 126: ...or last frame The first frame is indicated by a h in the top right corner of the display the last frame by a i Start slow motion playback Press 3 while the movie is paused to start slow motion playback Jog rewind advance Press 4 or 2 while the movie is paused to rewind or advance one frame at a time Keep 4 or 2 pressed for continuous rewind or advance Skip 10 s Rotate the main command dial one sto...

Page 127: ...dices rotating the sub command dial takes you to the next or previous index Indices can be added or removed from the EDIT MOVIE menu which can be displayed by pausing playback and pressing the i button Adjust volume Press X to increase volume W M to decrease Trim movie To display the EDIT MOVIE menu pause playback and press the i button Exit Press 1 or K to exit to full frame playback Exit to shoo...

Page 128: ...utton to start playback and press 4 or 2 until the desired picture is displayed The location of the current image is shown by an icon at the bottom left corner of the display 2 Delete the picture Press the O Q button a confirmation dialog will be displayed Press the O Q button again to delete the image and return to playback To exit without deleting the picture press K ...

Page 129: ...rs and TVs 0 445 Built in Wireless 0 457 and Ethernet WT 6 0 514 Uploading Pictures to Smart Devices Use the SnapBridge app to upload pictures using the camera s built in Wi Fi or Bluetooth Uploading Pictures to a Computer or FTP Server Several options are available for uploading pictures to computers Built in Wi Fi Use the camera s built in Wi Fi to upload pictures to a computer via a wireless co...

Page 130: ...ftp servers The WT 6 offers more reliable wireless connections than the camera s built in Wi Fi Ethernet Connect to networks using an Ethernet cable attached to the camera s Ethernet connector and upload pictures to computers or ftp servers USB Connect the camera to a computer using a USB cable and transfer pictures using the ViewNX i computer application Type C ...

Page 131: ...era s built in Wi Fi the WT 6 or an Ethernet connection D The SnapBridge App and Computer Applications The SnapBridge app is available from the Apple App Store and on Google Play Nikon computer software is available from the Nikon Download Center Check the version and system requirements and be sure to download the latest version https downloadcenter nikonimglib com ...

Page 132: ...ou can choose the menu displayed The default is MY MENU The G Button 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 D PLAYBACK MENU 2 C PHOTO SHOOTING MENU 3 1 MOVIE SHOOTING MENU 4 A CUSTOM SETTING MENU 5 B SETUP MENU 6 N RETOUCH MENU 7 O MY MENU m RECENT SETTINGS 8 d Help icon 9 Current settings ...

Page 133: ...on for the current menu Press 4 to highlight the icon for the current menu 1 Move cursor up 2 Center of multi selector select highlighted item 3 Display sub menu select highlighted item or move cursor right 4 Move cursor down 5 Cancel and return to previous menu or move cursor left 6 J button select highlighted item ...

Page 134: ...82 The G Button 2 Select a menu Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu 3 Position the cursor in the selected menu Press 2 to position the cursor in the selected menu ...

Page 135: ...83 The G Button 4 Highlight a menu item Press 1 or 3 to highlight a menu item 5 Display options Press 2 to display options for the selected menu item ...

Page 136: ...t an option Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option 7 Select the highlighted option Press J To exit without making a selection press the G button To exit the menus and return to shooting mode press the shutter release button halfway ...

Page 137: ...there are some items for which selection can only be made by pressing J D Grayed Out Items Some items and menu options may be unavailable depending on camera status Unavailable items are displayed in gray In some cases pressing J when a grayed out item is highlighted will display a message explaining why the item is unavailable ...

Page 138: ...te the main command dial To cycle through the upper and lower case and symbol keyboards highlight the keyboard selection icon and press the center of the multi selector The keyboard selection icon may not be available in some cases If a character is entered when the text display area is full the rightmost character will be deleted To delete the character under the cursor press the O Q button To co...

Page 139: ...re available a description of the currently selected item can be viewed by pressing the g h Q button Press 1 or 3 to scroll Press g h Q again to return to the menus A Touch Controls You can also navigate the menus using touch controls 0 25 ...

Page 140: ... using the multi selector and press the center of the multi selector to view options Highlight the desired option and press the center of the multi selector to select and return to the i menu To cancel and return to the previous display press the i button Different menus are displayed during viewfinder photography live view and movie recording The i Button the i Menu ...

Page 141: ...he Command Dials The main command dial can be used to choose the setting for the item currently highlighted in the i menu Options for the selected setting if any can be selected by rotating the sub command dial Some items can be adjusted by rotating either dial Press J to save changes You can also save changes by pressing the shutter release button halfway or highlighting another item ...

Page 142: ...only 2 Displayed during live view photography only Viewfinder photography Live view photography 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 Set Picture Control 2 Photo shooting menu bank 1 3 Flash mode 4 Wired LAN WT 5 Autofocus mode 6 Focus tracking with lock on 1 7 Color space 8 Select custom settings bank 1 9 Metering 10 Active D Lighting 11 AF area mode 12 Custom controls 13 Peaking highlights 2 14 ...

Page 143: ...e i Menu A Customizing the i Menu Choose the items displayed in the i menus Use Custom Settings f1 Customize i menu and f2 Customize i menu Lv to choose the items displayed in viewfinder and live photography respectively ...

Page 144: ... to view options A Customize the i Menu Use Custom Setting g1 Customize i menu to choose the items displayed in the movie i menu 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 7 9 10 11 12 1 Set Picture Control 2 Frame size and rate image quality 3 Wind noise reduction 4 Wired LAN WT 5 Autofocus mode 6 Destination 7 White balance 8 Microphone sensitivity 9 Metering 10 Electronic VR 11 AF area mode 12 Custom controls ...

Page 145: ...The i Button the i Menu The Playback i Menu Pressing the i button during playback displays a context sensitive i menu of frequently used playback options Photo playback Movie playback Movie playback paused ...

Page 146: ...oose the indicators displayed Viewfinder Photography During viewfinder photography you can press the R button to view an information display in the monitor The display lists such data as shutter speed aperture number of exposures remaining and AF area mode The R Button ...

Page 147: ... Live View Photography Use the R button to cycle through the following displays Live View Selector Rotated to C Displayed during exposure preview only 1 Indicators on 2 Simplified display 3 Histogram 4 Virtual horizon ...

Page 148: ...96 The R Button Live View Selector Rotated to 1 1 Indicators on 2 Simplified display 3 Histogram 4 Virtual horizon ...

Page 149: ...97 The Focus Mode Selector Choose AF for autofocus M for manual focus The Focus Mode Selector ...

Page 150: ... determines how the camera focuses in autofocus mode the AF area mode how the camera selects the focus point for autofocus Choosing an AF Mode Hold the AF mode button and rotate the main command dial The options available vary with camera settings The AF Mode Button ...

Page 151: ...panel and viewfinder Option Description AF S Single AF Use with stationary subjects Focus locks while the shutter release button is pressed halfway AF C Continuous AF For moving subjects The camera adjusts focus continuously in response to changes in the distance to the subject while the shutter release button is pressed halfway ...

Page 152: ...iption AF S Single AF Use with stationary subjects Focus locks while the shutter release button is pressed halfway AF F Full time AF For moving subjects The camera adjusts focus continuously in response to changes in the distance to the subject until the shutter release button is pressed halfway Focus locks while the shutter release button is pressed halfway ...

Page 153: ...101 The AF Mode Button Choosing an AF Area Mode Hold the AF mode button and rotate the sub command dial The options available vary with the AF mode ...

Page 154: ...subject briefly leaves the selected point the camera will focus based on information from surrounding focus points Dynamic area AF is available when AF C is selected for autofocus mode Choose for subjects that move unpredictably The greater the number of focus points the wider the area used for focus 3D tracking The user selects the focus point while the shutter release button is pressed halfway t...

Page 155: ...oup area AF C1 and Group area AF C2 to create custom groups in which the number of focus points in each dimension can be chosen using the multi selector This can be used for example if the size and shape of the area used for focus can be determined in advance with a fair degree of accuracy Auto area AF The camera automatically detects the subject and selects the focus point If a face is detected t...

Page 156: ...ton and pressing 4 or 2 Press 1 or 3 to choose the height The height and width are shown in the top control panel If you keep your eye to the viewfinder while choosing the number of focus points you can preview the shape of the selected custom focus group The number of focus points can also be selected using Custom Setting a10 Custom groupings C1 C2 1 Width number of focus points 2 Height number o...

Page 157: ... a maximum of 16 are detected you can choose a subject using the multi selector Use for portraits 5 Wide area AF As for Normal area AF except that the camera focuses on a wider area 6 Normal area AF The camera focuses on a point selected by the user n Subject tracking AF Position the focus point over your subject and press the center of the multi selector the focus point will track the selected su...

Page 158: ...ted for AF area mode you can select the focus point manually Press the multi selector up down left or right 1342 or diagonally to select the focus point A Locking Focus Point Selection Focus point selection can be locked by rotating the focus selector lock to the L position Focus point selection can be re enabled by rotating the lock to I ...

Page 159: ...f3 Custom controls and g2 Custom controls in the Custom Settings menu to choose the roles played by the button during photography and movie recording respectively A The AF ON Button for Vertical Shooting The AF ON button performs the same function but can only be used when the vertical shooting shutter release button lock is unlocked The AF ON Button ...

Page 160: ...mera sets shutter speed and aperture for optimal exposure S Shutter priority auto You choose the shutter speed the camera selects the aperture for best results A Aperture priority auto You choose the aperture the camera selects the shutter speed for best results M Manual You control both shutter speed and aperture Set shutter speed to bulb or time for long time exposures ...

Page 161: ...d S Button Mode Description S Single frame The camera takes one photograph each time the shutter release button is pressed CL Continuous low speed The camera takes photos at a selected rate while the shutter release button is pressed The frame rate can be selected from values between 1 and 10 fps CH Continuous high speed The camera takes photos at a selected rate while the shutter release button i...

Page 162: ...ooting at rates of 1 to 5 fps is also supported E Self timer Take pictures with the self timer MUP Mirror up The mirror is raised before shooting to minimize blur caused by camera shake S Quick release mode selection The release mode can be selected by holding the S button and rotating the main command dial Mode Description ...

Page 163: ...n and rotate the main command dial The Y Button Option Description L Matrix metering Matrix metering is adapted to a wide range of subjects It produces natural looking results M Center weighted metering The camera assigns the greatest weight to the center of the frame It can be used with subjects that dominate the composition for example ...

Page 164: ...mple to meter a specific area of the frame when your subject is backlit or features sharply contrasting areas t Highlight weighted metering The camera assigns the greatest weight to highlights Use this option to reduce loss of detail in highlights for example when photographing spotlit performers on stage Option Description ...

Page 165: ...rement and number of shots in the bracketing program Bracketing is used to vary exposure flash level white balance or Active D Lighting ADL over a series of shots The role performed by the BKT button can be chosen using Custom Setting f3 Custom controls The BKT Button ...

Page 166: ...s You also have the option of enabling auto ISO sensitivity control which automatically adjusts sensitivity if optimal exposure cannot be achieved at the setting selected by the user Adjusting ISO Sensitivity Hold the S Q button and rotate the main command dial Choose from values of from ISO 100 to 102400 Settings of from about 0 3 to 1 EV below ISO 100 and 0 3 to 5 EV above ISO 102400 are also av...

Page 167: ... needed to make an exposure allowing pictures to be taken when lighting is poor and helping prevent blur when the subject is in motion Note however that the higher the sensitivity the more likely the image is to be affected by noise in the form of randomly spaced bright pixels fog or lines ...

Page 168: ...ewfinder When these indicators are lit not flashing pictures will be taken at the sensitivity selected for ISO sensitivity When sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the user the ISO AUTO indicators will flash and the altered value will be shown in the displays A Maximum Sensitivity You can select an upper limit for auto ISO sensitivity control to prevent ISO sensitivity being raised t...

Page 169: ... pictures brighter or darker Adjusting Exposure Compensation Hold the E button and rotate the main command dial Higher values make the subject brighter lower values darker Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to 0 0 Exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off The E Button 1 EV No exposure compensation 1 EV ...

Page 170: ...cription NEF RAW JPEG finec Record two copies of each photo an NEF RAW image and a JPEG copy For the JPEG copy you can choose from options prioritizing image quality or file size Options with a star c prioritize image quality those without a star c file size NEF RAW JPEG fine NEF RAW JPEG normalc NEF RAW JPEG normal NEF RAW JPEG basicc NEF RAW JPEG basic NEF RAW Record photos in NEF RAW format ...

Page 171: ...n Slot 2 If a JPEG option is selected for image quality and JPEG Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 is selected for Role played by card in Slot 2 the camera will record two copies of each picture one to each memory card and each at different sizes JPEG finec Record photos in JPEG format Image quality increases as quality progress from basic through normal to fine Options with a star c prioritize image quality tho...

Page 172: ...ixels varies with image area The size of NEF RAW images can be selected using the Image size NEF RAW item in the photo shooting menu Image area Image size Large Medium Small FX 36 24 5568 3712 4176 2784 2784 1856 1 2 30 20 4640 3088 3472 2312 2320 1544 DX 24 16 3648 2432 2736 1824 1824 1216 5 4 30 24 4640 3712 3472 2784 2320 1856 1 1 24 24 3712 3712 2784 2784 1856 1856 16 9 36 20 5568 3128 4176 23...

Page 173: ...e balance delivers natural colors with light sources of different hues Adjusting White Balance Hold the U button and rotate the main command dial Options for the selected setting if any can be selected by holding the U button and rotating the sub command dial The U Button ...

Page 174: ... warm color cast produced by incandescent lighting v2 Keep warm lighting colors Preserve the warm color cast produced by incandescent lighting D Natural light auto When used under natural light in place of Auto this option produces colors closer to those seen by the naked eye H Direct sunlight Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight G Cloudy Use in daylight under overcast skies M Shade Use in day...

Page 175: ...scent White fluorescent Cool white fluorescent Day white fluorescent Daylight fluorescent High temp mercury vapor N Flash Use for flash photography K Choose color temperature Choose the color temperature directly L Preset manual Measure white balance for the subject or light source or copy white balance from an existing photograph Option Description ...

Page 176: ...e white balance on the amber blue axis by pressing 4 or 2 and on the green magenta axis by pressing 1 or 3 When Choose color temperature is selected you can press 4 or 2 to highlight a digit Press 1 or 3 to change Release the U button to return to shooting mode At settings other than 0 an asterisk U appears in the rear control panel To view the current value press the U button while shooting infor...

Page 177: ...o select The g h Q Button Option Description n Auto The camera automatically adjusts hues and tones based on the Standard Picture Control Q Standard Standard processing for balanced results Recommended for most situations R Neutral Minimal processing for natural results Choose for photographs that will later be processed or retouched S Vivid Pictures are enhanced for a vivid photoprint effect Choo...

Page 178: ...over a wide tone range from highlights to shadows Choose for photographs that will later be extensively processed or retouched l01 l20 Creative Picture Control Creative Picture Controls offer unique combinations of hue tone saturation and other settings tuned for particular effects Choose from a total of 20 options including Dream and Morning Option Description ...

Page 179: ...Press 4 or 2 to choose a value in increments of 1 or rotate the sub command dial to choose a value in increments of 0 25 The options available vary with the Picture Control selected Default settings can be restored by pressing the O Q button Press J to save changes Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings are indicated by an asterisk U ...

Page 180: ...harpening and Clarity Clarity Adjust overall sharpness and the sharpness of thicker outlines without affecting brightness or dynamic range Contrast Adjust contrast Brightness Raise or lower brightness without loss of detail in highlights or shadows Saturation Control the vividness of colors Hue Adjust hue Filter effects Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome pictures Toning Choose the ...

Page 181: ...he position of the subject in the frame D Filter Effects Choose from the following Filter effects The term in parentheses is the name of the corresponding third party color filter for black and white photography Option Description Y yellow These options enhance contrast and can be used to tone down the brightness of the sky in landscape photographs Orange O produces more contrast than yellow Y red...

Page 182: ...d in the range A 2 to A 2 A Protecting Pictures from Deletion During playback the g h Q button can be used to protect pictures Protecting pictures helps prevent accidental deletion A Viewing Help Press the g h Q button to view help for the current item where available 0 87 ...

Page 183: ...level Choosing a Flash Mode Hold the W N button and rotate the main command dial The W N Button Option Description Fill flash front curtain sync This mode is recommended for most situations Red eye reduction red eye reduction The flash fires before the photograph is taken reducing red eye Slow sync slow sync As for fill flash except that slow shutter speeds are used to capture background lighting ...

Page 184: ...sync As for red eye reduction except that slow shutter speeds are used to capture background lighting at night or under low light Rear curtain sync rear curtain sync The flash fires just before the shutter closes s Flash off The flash does not fire Option Description ...

Page 185: ...rotate the sub command dial Choose positive values for brighter lighting negative values to ensure that the subject is not too brightly lit Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash compensation to 0 0 Flash compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off ...

Page 186: ...its compatible with the Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS will emit a modeling flash The modeling flash can be disabled by selecting Off for Custom Setting e6 Modeling flash You can choose the role assigned to the Pv button Use Custom Settings f3 Custom controls and g2 Custom controls in the Custom Settings menu to choose the roles played by the button during photography and filming respectively ...

Page 187: ...olding the corresponding button and rotating the command dials In some cases adjustments can be made using both the main and sub command dials Use Custom Settings f3 Custom controls and g2 Custom controls in the Custom Settings menu to choose the roles played by these buttons during photography and movie recording respectively The Fn1 Fn2 Fn3 C and Fn Vertical Buttons ...

Page 188: ...ptions Image Area Quality and Size Shooting Settings Adjusting Image Area Settings Image area settings can be displayed by selecting Image area in the photo shooting menu Image Recording Options Image Area Quality and Size ...

Page 189: ...KKOR lenses for 35 mm format cameras Z 1 2 30 20 Reduces the angle of view of the lens mounted on the camera to that of a lens with a focal length approximately 1 2 times longer a DX 24 16 Pictures are recorded in DX format To calculate the approximate focal length of the lens in 35 mm format multiply by 1 5 b 5 4 30 24 Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 5 4 m 1 1 24 24 Pictures are rec...

Page 190: ...138 Image Recording Options Image Area Quality and Size 1 FX 36 24 2 1 2 30 20 3 DX 24 16 4 5 4 30 24 5 1 1 24 24 6 16 9 36 20 7 DX format image circle 8 35 mm format image circle ...

Page 191: ...lected for Auto DX crop and an option other than DX 24 16 DX format is selected for Choose image area when a DX lens is attached the edges of the image may be eclipsed This is referred to as cropping Cropping may not be apparent in the viewfinder but when the images are played back you may notice a drop in resolution or that the edges of the picture are blacked out Option Description On The camera...

Page 192: ...ge Area Quality and Size A The Viewfinder Display The viewfinder displays for image area options other than FX 36 24 are shown below The area outside the current crop is shown in gray 1 2 30 20 DX 24 16 5 4 30 24 1 1 24 24 16 9 36 20 ...

Page 193: ...ed crop is displayed in the viewfinder The option currently selected for image area can be displayed in the top control panel and viewfinder by pressing the button to which Choose image area is assigned Camera controls assigned Choose image area cannot be used for image area selection when a DX lens is attached and On is selected for Auto DX crop A Image Size Image size varies with the option sele...

Page 194: ...s without a star c to ensure that the JPEG copies all have more or less the same file size Only the JPEG copy is displayed during playback If only one memory card was inserted in the camera when the photos were recorded the NEF RAW copies can only be viewed using a computer If the photo was recorded with only one memory card inserted or with Overflow or Backup selected for Role played by card in S...

Page 195: ...of charge from the Nikon Download Center The process of converting NEF RAW images to other formats such as JPEG is referred to as NEF RAW processing You can save NEF RAW images in other formats using the ViewNX i and Capture NX D computer applications or the NEF RAW processing option in the camera retouch menu NEF RAW Record photos in NEF RAW format JPEG finec Record photos in JPEG format Fine pro...

Page 196: ...the photo shooting menu to adjust image quality during live view A NEF RAW JPEG The camera displays only the JPEG copies of photos recorded at image quality settings of NEF RAW JPEG If only one memory card was inserted in the camera when the photos were recorded the NEF RAW copies can only be viewed using a computer In the case of photos recorded with only one memory card inserted deleting the JPE...

Page 197: ...rge Medium and Small The number of pixels in the image varies with the option selected for image area 0 136 Image area Image size FX 36 24 Large 5568 3712 pixels Medium 4176 2784 pixels Small 2784 1856 pixels 1 2 30 20 Large 4640 3088 pixels Medium 3472 2312 pixels Small 2320 1544 pixels DX 24 16 Large 3648 2432 pixels Medium 2736 1824 pixels Small 1824 1216 pixels ...

Page 198: ...ded by printer resolution in dots per inch dpi 1 inch 2 54 cm 5 4 30 24 Large 4640 3712 pixels Medium 3472 2784 pixels Small 2320 1856 pixels 1 1 24 24 Large 3712 3712 pixels Medium 2784 2784 pixels Small 1856 1856 pixels 16 9 36 20 Large 5568 3128 pixels Medium 4176 2344 pixels Small 2784 1560 pixels Image area Image size ...

Page 199: ...o choose a size for NEF RAW images use the Image size NEF RAW option in the photo shooting menu A The Photo Shooting Menu Image Size Option Image size can also be adjusted using the Image size JPEG and NEF RAW options in the photo shooting menu Selecting a size of Medium or Small for NEF RAW pictures fixes the NEF RAW recording NEF RAW compression and NEF RAW bit depth options in the photo shootin...

Page 200: ...cuses Focus Choosing a Focus Mode Rotate the focus mode selector to AF to select autofocus or to M to select manual focus During viewfinder photography the camera focuses using 105 focus points Choosing How the Camera Focuses Focus ...

Page 201: ... released only when the camera is in focus focus priority AF C Continuous AF Use for shots of athletes and other moving subjects If the subject moves while the shutter release button is pressed halfway the camera will engage predictive focus tracking to predict final distance to subject and adjust focus as necessary Focus does not lock when the in focus indicator I is displayed instead the camera ...

Page 202: ...mera will initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject moves toward or away from the camera while the shutter release button is pressed halfway or the AF ON button is pressed This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released ...

Page 203: ... with stationary subjects Focus locks while the shutter release button is pressed halfway AF F Full time AF Use with moving subjects The camera adjusts focus continuously in response to subject motion until the shutter release button is pressed halfway Focus locks when the shutter release button is pressed halfway ...

Page 204: ...e the autofocus mode hold the AF mode button and rotate the main command dial During viewfinder photography the selected option is displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel During live view or while movies are being filmed the selected option is displayed in the monitor ...

Page 205: ...l focus based on information from surrounding focus points Dynamic area AF is available when AF C is selected for autofocus mode Choose for subjects that move unpredictably The greater the number of focus points the wider the area used for focus Dynamic area AF 9 points Dynamic area AF 25 points Choose when there is time to compose the photograph or when photographing subjects that are moving pred...

Page 206: ...track the subject as it moves through the frame and select new focus points as required 3D tracking is available when AF C is selected for autofocus mode Use to quickly compose pictures with subjects that are moving erratically from side to side e g tennis players If the subject leaves viewfinder remove your finger from the shutter release button and recompose the photograph with the subject in th...

Page 207: ...kground Choose for snapshots subjects that are in motion and other subjects that are difficult to photograph using Single point AF Use Group area AF C1 and Group area AF C2 to create custom groups in which the number of focus points in each dimension can be chosen using the multi selector 0 167 This can be used for example if the size and shape of the area used for focus can be determined in advan...

Page 208: ...riority to the portrait subject Use on occasions when you don t have time to select the focus point yourself for portraits or for snapshots and other spur of the moment photos When AF S is selected for autofocus mode the active focus points are briefly highlighted after the camera focuses When AF C is selected the camera displays the active focus points Option Description ...

Page 209: ... is shown in the viewfinder and top control panel AF area mode Top control panel Viewfinder Viewfinder focus point display during selection Single point AF Dynamic area AF 9 points Dynamic area AF 25 points Dynamic area AF 49 points Dynamic area AF 105 points 3D tracking ...

Page 210: ...us point is displayed in the viewfinder Remaining focus points provide information to assist focus operation Group area AF Group area AF C1 Group area AF C2 Auto area AF AF area mode Top control panel Viewfinder Viewfinder focus point display during selection ...

Page 211: ...reduces the number of focus points available via the multi selector speeding focus point selection A Auto Area AF Starting Point Selecting Enable for Custom Setting a12 Auto area AF starting point lets you choose the starting focus point when AF C is selected for AF mode After you focus on the subject in the selected point the camera will resume normal auto area AF This feature is recommended when...

Page 212: ...nger detect the subject for example because they have looked away it will cease to display the yellow border 5 Wide area AF As for Normal area AF except that the camera focuses on a wider area 6 Normal area AF The camera focuses on a point selected by the user Use of a tripod is recommended n Subject tracking AF Position the focus point over your subject and press the center of the multi selector ...

Page 213: ...cking AF The camera may be unable to track subjects that are similar in color to the background change visibly in size color or brightness are too large or too small are too bright or too dark move quickly or are obscured by other objects or leave the frame ...

Page 214: ...ing appears under fluorescent mercury vapor sodium vapor or similar lighting A cross star filter or other special filter is used The subject appears smaller than the focus point The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns e g blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper The subject is moving The monitor may brighten or darken while the camera focuses The focus point may sometimes be displ...

Page 215: ...se the AF area mode hold the AF mode button and rotate the sub command dial During viewfinder photography the selected option is displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel During live view or while movies are being filmed the selected option is displayed in the monitor ...

Page 216: ... can be selected manually allowing photographs to be composed with the subject positioned almost anywhere in the frame 1 Undo the focus selector lock Rotate the focus selector lock to I 2 Use the multi selector to select the focus point while the standby timer is on During viewfinder photography you can choose from 105 focus points in the AF area brackets ...

Page 217: ...uring live view the focus point can be positioned anywhere in the frame The center focus point can be selected by pressing the center of the multi selector Focus point selection can be locked by rotating the focus selector lock to the L position ...

Page 218: ...ur eye while using the sub selector A Portrait Orientation You may find it convenient to use the vertical multi selector when taking photographs in portrait orientation See Custom Setting f3 Custom controls Multi selector for vertical shooting A Using the Sub Selector and Vertical Multi Selector You can press the centers of the sub selector and vertical multi selector or tilt them as shown The con...

Page 219: ...for AF area mode Custom focus groups can be used if the size and shape of the area used for focus can be determined in advance with a fair degree of accuracy 1 Choose Group area AF C1 or Group area AF C2 for AF area mode 2 Choose the dimensions of the custom focus group Hold the AF mode button and use the multi selector to choose the dimensions of the selected custom group ...

Page 220: ...ose the width The shape of the current AF area group is indicated by a number in the top control panel The shapes of the different AF area groups are shown below The changes are saved when you release the AF mode button 1 7 1 5 3 7 3 5 3 3 5 3 5 1 7 1 11 1 15 1 7 3 11 3 15 3 5 7 5 5 7 7 7 5 ...

Page 221: ...oups The dimensions of the custom focus groups for Group area AF C1 and Group area AF C2 can also be selected using Custom Setting a10 Custom groupings C1 C2 Select the desired custom group AF area mode and size the group using the multi selector Press J to save changes ...

Page 222: ...l composition or to focus in cases in which the camera is unable to focus using autofocus 0 173 Before using focus lock choose an option other than Auto area AF for AF area mode 1 Position the subject in the selected focus point and press the shutter release button halfway The in focus indicator I will be displayed when the camera focuses ...

Page 223: ...nd exposure will remain locked while the center of the sub selector is pressed even if you remove your finger from the shutter release button An AE L icon will be displayed in the viewfinder while the center of the sub selector is pressed AF S selected for autofocus mode Focus locks while the shutter release button is pressed halfway You can also lock focus by pressing the center of the sub select...

Page 224: ...nce to the subject changes release the lock and focus again at the new distance A Taking Multiple Shots at the Same Focus Distance If you locked focus by pressing the shutter release button halfway focus will remain locked if you keep the shutter release button pressed halfway between shots If you locked focus by pressing the center of the sub selector focus will remain locked between shots if you...

Page 225: ... focus indicator I or in live view displaying the focus point in green when the subject is not in focus Focus manually or use focus lock to focus on another subject at the same distance There is little contrast between the subject and the background as may be the case if the subject is photographed against a featureless wall or the background is the same color as the subject The focus point contai...

Page 226: ...o M If the lens is equipped with a focus mode switch set it to M as well If you are using an AF S lens or an AF P lens with a focus mode switch set the focus mode switch to M In this case there is no need to choose manual focus on the camera Manual focus lenses Manual focus is available at all times To focus manually rotate the lens focus ring until the image in the viewfinder is in focus ...

Page 227: ...ith AF Lenses AF S and AF P Lenses Excluded Be sure to rotate the camera focus mode selector to M when using manual focus with AF lenses AF S and AF P lenses excepted Attempting to focus manually with the focus mode selector set to AF could damage the camera or lens ...

Page 228: ... in focus Note that with the subjects listed in Getting Good Results with Autofocus 0 173 the in focus indicator I may sometimes be displayed when the subject is not in focus Confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting A tripod is recommended if you experience trouble focusing Focus indicator Status steady The subject is in focus steady The focus point is in front of the subject steady The foc...

Page 229: ...de the camera q Use this mark when measuring the distance to your subject for manual focus or macro photography The distance between the focal plane and the lens mounting flange is known as the flange back distance w On this camera the flange back distance is 46 5 mm 1 83 in A Focus Peaking If an option other than Off is selected for Custom Setting d10 Peaking highlights Peaking level objects that...

Page 230: ...composition and distance for results close to those seen by the naked eye M Center weighted metering The camera meters the entire frame but assigns the greatest weight to an area in the center Choose for shots in which for example the main subject occupies a large area at the center of the frame Center weighted metering is also recommended when using filters with an exposure factor filter factor o...

Page 231: ...tered area is centered on the current focus point Note however that the camera will instead meter the center focus point if Auto area AF Group area AF C1 or Group area AF C2 is selected for AF area mode or a non CPU lens or an AF S Fisheye NIKKOR 8 15mm f 3 5 4 5E ED lens is attached t Highlight weighted metering The camera assigns the greatest weight to highlights Use this option to reduce loss o...

Page 232: ...osure Related Settings Metering and Exposure Compensation Choosing a Metering Option Hold the Y button and rotate the main command dial The selected option is displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel ...

Page 233: ...ering III Available with CPU lenses of types other than D E and G Distance information is not included Non CPU lenses Color matrix metering is available if lens data are provided using the Non CPU lens data option in the setup menu Center weighted metering will be used if lens data are not provided A Highlight Weighted Metering and Lens Type Center weighted metering will be used if Highlight weigh...

Page 234: ...ittle time to adjust camera settings The camera chooses both shutter speed and aperture automatically S Shutter priority auto 0 185 Use to freeze or blur motion You choose the shutter speed the camera adjusts aperture automatically A Aperture priority auto 0 186 Use to blur backgrounds or bring both foreground and background into focus You choose the aperture the camera adjusts shutter speed autom...

Page 235: ...ng and Exposure Compensation D Lens Types When using a CPU lens of a type other than G or E lock the aperture ring at the minimum aperture highest f number Mode A will be selected automatically if a non CPU lens is attached in mode P or S ...

Page 236: ...ible program in which although the camera chooses the initial shutter speed and aperture the main command dial can while the standby timer is on be rotated to select different combinations without altering exposure from the value chosen by the camera While flexible program is in effect a flexible program indicator U appears in the viewfinder and top control panel To restore default shutter speed a...

Page 237: ...cally adjusts aperture for optimal exposure Choose fast shutter speeds to freeze motion slow shutter speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving objects To choose a shutter speed rotate the main command dial while the exposure meters are on Shutter speed can be set to p or to values between 1 8000 s o and 30 s q Shutter speed can be locked at the selected value 0 194 ...

Page 238: ...riority auto you choose the aperture while the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed for optimal exposure To adjust aperture rotate the sub command dial while the exposure meters are on The minimum and maximum values for aperture vary with the lens Aperture can be locked at the selected value 0 194 ...

Page 239: ...es can be selected the value shown in the displays will be rounded to the nearest full aperture stop If you do not supply the maximum aperture the aperture displays in the viewfinder and top control panel will show only the number of stops F with maximum aperture displayed as F0 and the f number must be read from the lens aperture ring A Depth of Field Preview Aperture can be stopped down by press...

Page 240: ...e adjusted with reference to the exposure indicators by rotating the command dials as follows while the standby timer is on Rotate the main command dial to choose the shutter speed Shutter speed can be set to values between 1 8000 s o and 30 s q to A Bulb or Time or to p Aperture can be adjusted by rotating the sub command dial The minimum and maximum values for aperture vary with the lens Shutter...

Page 241: ...s slow as 900 s 15 minutes select On for Custom Setting d7 Extended shutter speeds M A AF Micro NIKKOR Lenses Users of external exposure meters need not take the exposure ratio into account when adjusting aperture via the sub command dial Users will however need to consider the exposure ratio when using the lens aperture ring ...

Page 242: ...ries with the option selected for Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl The orientation of the exposure indicators can be reversed using Custom Setting f9 Reverse indicators A Exposure Warning The displays will flash if the selected settings exceed the limits of the exposure metering system or the exposure limits for live view Display 1 3 step selected for EV steps for exposure cntrl Optim...

Page 243: ...g lights To prevent blur use a tripod or a device such as an optional wireless remote controller or remote cord that can be used to operate the shutter remotely A 35 second exposure shot at a shutter speed of Bulb and an aperture of f 25 Shutter speed Description Bulb The shutter remains open while the shutter release button is held down Time The exposure starts when the shutter release button is ...

Page 244: ... the camera steady for example by using a tripod 2 Hold the I button and rotate the main command dial to select mode M 3 Rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed of A Bulb or Time Note that the exposure indicators are not displayed at a shutter speed of A or ...

Page 245: ...n a second time A Long Time Exposures To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or interfering with exposure raise the viewfinder eyepiece shutter lever to close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter before pressing the shutter release button to start the exposure 0 13 Note that noise bright spots randomly spaced bright pixels or fog may be present in long exposures B...

Page 246: ...rol using Custom Setting f3 Custom controls 2 Lock shutter speed and or aperture Shutter speed After confirming that camera is in mode S or M press the control to which Shutter spd aperture lock has been assigned and rotate the main command dial until P shutter speed lock icons appear in the viewfinder and top control panel To unlock shutter speed press the control to which Shutter spd aperture lo...

Page 247: ... control to which Shutter spd aperture lock has been assigned and rotate the sub command dial until P aperture lock icons appear in the viewfinder and top control panel To unlock aperture press the control to which Shutter spd aperture lock has been assigned and rotate the sub command dial until the P icons are no longer displayed ...

Page 248: ...brighter or darker than its surroundings 1 Select Center weighted metering or Spot metering 0 178 2 With the subject positioned in the selected focus point and the shutter release button pressed halfway press the center of the sub selector to lock exposure While the center of the sub selector is pressed exposure will lock at the value metered in an area of the subject determined by the selected me...

Page 249: ...the in focus indicator I is displayed 3 Keeping the center of the sub selector pressed recompose the photograph and shoot A Locking Exposure with the Shutter Release Button If On half press is selected for Custom Setting c1 Shutter release button AE L exposure will lock while the shutter release button is pressed halfway ...

Page 250: ...ed at the value metered in a 12 mm circle in the center of the viewfinder A Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture The following settings can be adjusted while the center of the sub selector is pressed The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and top control panel The option selected for metering cannot be changed while exposure lock is in effect Mode Setting P Shutter speed and aperture fl...

Page 251: ...re Compensation Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value suggested by the camera It can be used to make pictures brighter or darker It is most effective when used with Spot metering or Center weighted metering 0 178 1 EV No exposure compensation 1 EV ...

Page 252: ... value is displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel Choose from values between 5 EV underexposure and 5 EV overexposure By default changes are made in increments of 1 3 EV The size of the increments can be changed using Custom Setting b3 Exp flash comp step value In general positive values make the subject brighter while negative values make it darker ...

Page 253: ...d exposure indicators appear in the viewfinder and top control panel In modes other than M the zero 0 at the center of the exposure indicator flashes Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to 0 0 Exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off Display No exposure compensation E button pressed 0 3 EV 2 EV Top control panel Viewfinder ...

Page 254: ... indicator shutter speed and aperture do not change A Using a Flash When an optional flash is used exposure compensation affects both flash level and exposure altering the brightness of both the main subject and the background if desired the effect can be restricted to the background using Custom Setting e3 Exposure comp for flash ...

Page 255: ... rotate the release mode dial Stop when the pointer aligns with the desired setting Choosing the Operation Performed When the Shutter Is Released Release Mode Mode Description S Single frame The camera takes one photograph each time the shutter release button is pressed CL Continuous low speed The camera takes photographs at a selected rate while the shutter release button is pressed Choose from r...

Page 256: ...ming of the click made when the mirror is lowered but the click itself is quieter than in single frame mode No beep will sound regardless of the option chosen for Beep options Beep on off in the setup menu Burst shooting can be enabled by holding the S button and rotating a command dial b is displayed in the rear control panel when burst shooting is enabled Choose from rates of from 1 to 5 fps E S...

Page 257: ...other settings at default values Frame advance rates may slow at slow shutter speeds when On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings Auto ISO sensitivity control in the photo shooting menu and ISO sensitivity is altered automatically by the camera if flicker is detected with Enable selected for Flicker reduction Flicker reduction setting in the photo shooting menu at extremely small apertures hig...

Page 258: ...ute Do not remove the memory card while the memory card access lamp is lit Not only could any unrecorded images be lost but the camera or memory card could be damaged If the camera is switched off while the memory card access lamp is lit it will not power off until all images in the buffer have been recorded If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer the shutter release will be ...

Page 259: ...an be stored in the memory buffer When the buffer is full the display will show t00 and the frame rate will drop The number shown is approximate The actual number of photos that can be stored in the memory buffer varies with camera settings and shooting conditions Memory buffer capacity may drop briefly immediately after the camera is turned on Memory buffer capacity can be viewed in the monitor d...

Page 260: ...Selection With the release mode dial rotated to S you can choose a release mode by holding the S button and rotating the main command dial Settings for the selected mode can be adjusted by holding the S button and rotating the sub command dial The selected options are shown in the rear control panel ...

Page 261: ...e release mode dial to E self timer mode Hold the release mode dial lock release and rotate the release mode dial to E 2 Frame the photograph and focus The timer will not start if the shutter cannot be released as may be the case for example if the camera is unable to focus when AF S is selected for autofocus mode ...

Page 262: ...ely 8 seconds and then light for roughly 2 seconds To turn the self timer off before a photograph is taken turn the release mode dial to another setting The timer duration the number of shots taken and the interval between shots can be selected using Custom Setting c3 Self timer A Setting the Timer To choose the timer duration press and hold the S button and rotate a command dial to choose from va...

Page 263: ... is raised Hold the release mode dial lock release and rotate the release mode dial to MUP mirror up After pressing the shutter release button halfway to set focus and exposure press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to raise the mirror Z will be displayed in the control panels Press the shutter release button all the way down a second time to take the picture ...

Page 264: ...vailable A Taking Pictures Use of a tripod is recommended Press the shutter release button smoothly to prevent blur The mirror lowers when shooting ends A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for about 30 s after the mirror is raised In live view the picture is taken the first time the shutter release button is pressed all the way down ...

Page 265: ...s of from ISO 100 to 102400 Extended settings of from about 0 3 to 1 EV below ISO 100 and 0 3 to 5 EV above ISO 102400 are also available Adjusting ISO Sensitivity Hold the S Q button and rotate the main command dial The selected option is displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel By default changes are made in increments of 1 3 EV The size of the increments can be changed using Custom Set...

Page 266: ...itivity the less light needed to make an exposure allowing pictures to be taken when lighting is poor and helping prevent blur when the subject is in motion Note however that the higher the sensitivity the more likely the image is to be affected by noise in the form of randomly spaced bright pixels fog or lines Noise can be reduced by enabling high ISO noise reduction High ISO noise reduction can ...

Page 267: ...000 Note that pictures taken at these settings are particularly prone to noise in the form of randomly spaced bright pixels fog or lines A Lo 0 3 Lo 1 Lo 0 3 corresponds to an ISO sensitivity about 0 3 EV below ISO 100 equivalent to ISO 80 Lo 1 0 is roughly 1 EV below ISO 100 ISO 50 Use for larger apertures or slower shutter speeds when lighting is bright Highlights may be overexposed In most case...

Page 268: ... value selected by the user Enabling Auto ISO Sensitivity Control 1 Select ISO sensitivity settings in the photo shooting menu highlight Auto ISO sensitivity control and press 2 2 Select On Highlight On and press J to enable auto ISO sensitivity control If a flash is used ISO sensitivity will be adjusted appropriately If Off is selected ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value selected by th...

Page 269: ...n upper limit for ISO sensitivity control choose from values of from ISO 200 to Hi 5 The minimum value that will be selected using auto ISO sensitivity control is ISO 100 Maximum sensitivity with N Choose the maximum ISO sensitivity for flash photography options range from ISO 200 to Hi 5 Selecting Same as without flash sets the maximum ISO sensitivity for flash photography to the value currently ...

Page 270: ...ocal length CPU lenses only For example the camera will automatically choose faster minimum shutter speeds to prevent blur caused by camera shake when a long lens is attached To view auto shutter speed selection options highlight Auto and press 2 Auto shutter speed selection can be fine tuned by choosing faster or slower minimums Faster settings can be used to reduce blur when photographing fast m...

Page 271: ...indicators will appear in the viewfinder and top control panel When these indicators are lit not flashing pictures will be taken at the sensitivity selected for ISO sensitivity When sensitivity is altered from the value selected by the user the ISO AUTO indicators will flash and the altered value will be shown in the displays ...

Page 272: ...value selected for Minimum shutter speed is not in this range the value selected for Custom Setting e2 Flash shutter speed becomes the effective minimum shutter speed If a non CPU lens is used without lens data the minimum shutter speed will be fixed at 1 30 s If an optional flash unit is attached ISO sensitivity may be raised automatically when auto ISO sensitivity control is used in combination ...

Page 273: ...e with most light sources but if it fails to produce the desired results other settings can be selected according to the weather or light source AchievingNaturalColorswith Different Light Sources White Balance Option Color temperature Description v Auto The camera adjusts white balance for optimal results with most light sources If an optional flash unit is used white balance will be adjusted in a...

Page 274: ... 3500 8000 K Preserve the warm color cast produced by incandescent lighting D Natural light auto Approx 4500 8000 K White balance is adjusted for non artificial light sources producing more life like colors than does Auto when used under natural light H Direct sunlight Approx 5200 K Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight G Cloudy Approx 6000 K Use in daylight under overcast skies M Shade Approx ...

Page 275: ... K White fluorescent Approx 3700 K Cool white fluorescent Approx 4200 K Day white fluorescent Approx 5000 K Daylight fluorescent Approx 6500 K High temp mercury vapor Approx 7200 K N Flash Approx 5400 K Use for flash photography K Choose color temperature Approx 2500 10 000 K Direct color temperature selection To choose a color temperature hold the U button and rotate the sub command dial Option C...

Page 276: ...reference when choosing a value for Choose color temperature To view the Basic shooting data page during playback go to Playback display options in the playback menu and place checks M next to Shooting data and Basic shooting data L Preset manual Measure white balance directly from a subject or light source or copy white balance from an existing photograph To choose a white balance preset hold the...

Page 277: ...ommand dial The selected option is displayed in the rear control panel Options for the selected setting if any can be selected by holding the U button and rotating the sub command dial D Studio Flash Lighting Auto may not produce the desired results with large studio flash units Use preset white balance or set white balance to Flash and use fine tuning to adjust white balance ...

Page 278: ...ceived color of a light source varies with the viewer some may have a red cast while others appear blue Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source expressed in Kelvins K The lower the color temperature the redder the cast q the higher the temperature the bluer the cast w A Choosing a Color Temperature In general choose lower values if your pictures have a red cast or ...

Page 279: ...ne Tuning White Balance 1 Select White balance in the photo shooting menu highlight the desired option and press 2 as often as necessary to display fine tuning options For information on fine tuning Preset manual white balance see Fine Tuning Preset Manual White Balance 0 248 ...

Page 280: ...to the right of the grid The A amber B blue axis corresponds to color temperature and is ruled in increments of 0 5 A change of 1 is equivalent to approximately 5 mired The G green M magenta axis has effects similar to color compensation filters and is ruled in increments of 0 25 A change of 1 is equivalent to approximately 0 05 diffuse density units 3 Save changes Press J to save changes and exit...

Page 281: ...elected you can rotate the sub command dial to choose the color temperature When Preset manual is selected you can rotate the sub command dial to choose a white balance preset In modes other than Choose color temperature and Preset manual you can use the multi selector to fine tune white balance on the A amber B blue and G green M magenta axes A Adjusting White Balance in Live View White balance s...

Page 282: ...ke them blue A Mired Values in mired are calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10 6 Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures For example a change of 1000 K produces a much greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K Mired is a measure of color temperature that t...

Page 283: ...s for the A amber B blue and G green M magenta axes 1 Select White balance in the photo shooting menu then highlight Choose color temperature and press 2 2 Choose a color temperature Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits on the amber A blue B axis and press 1 or 3 to change Press 4 or 2 to highlight the value for the green G magenta M axis and press 1 or 3 to change ...

Page 284: ...ors with Different Light Sources White Balance 3 Save changes Press J to save changes and exit to the menus If a value other than 0 is selected for the green G magenta M axis an asterisk U will appear in the rear control panel ...

Page 285: ...temperature in mireds To highlight a digit hold the U button and press 4 or 2 Press 1 or 3 to edit the highlighted digit Changes apply only to the A amber B blue axis The selected setting takes effect when the U button is released D Color Temperature Selection Do not use color temperature selection with flash lighting or fluorescent light sources instead use the Fluorescent or Flash option respect...

Page 286: ...in presets d 1 through d 6 Two methods are available for setting preset white balance A White Balance Presets Changes to white balance presets d 1 through d 6 apply to all photo shooting menu banks A D For example changes to presets made when photo shooting menu bank A is selected also apply to photo shooting menu banks B through D Method Description Direct measurement Measure white balance from a...

Page 287: ...at will be used in the final photograph In studio settings a standard 18 gray panel can be used as a reference object Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when white balance is measured using a neutral gray or white reference object In mode M adjust exposure so that the exposure indicator shows 0 0 190 1 Hold the U button and rotate the main command dial to select L ...

Page 288: ...on and rotate the sub command dial until the desired white balance preset d 1 to d 6 is displayed 3 Select direct measurement mode Release the U button briefly and then press the U button until the D indicators in the viewfinder and top control panel and the L icon in the rear control panel start to flash ...

Page 289: ...fore the D indicators stop flashing photograph the reference object Position the reference object in the white balance target and press the shutter release button all the way down to measure a value for white balance and store it in the preset selected in Step 2 Even if the camera is not in focus the shutter will be released and white balance will be measured normally No photograph will be recorde...

Page 290: ...ontrol panels while the viewfinder will show a flashing a Press the shutter release button halfway to exit to shooting mode If lighting is too dark or too bright the camera may be unable to measure white balance A flashing b a will appear in the viewfinder and in the top and rear control panels Press the shutter release button halfway to return to Step 4 and measure white balance again ...

Page 291: ...uring viewfinder photography while the displays are flashing direct measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2 Standby timer A Measuring White Balance Viewfinder Photography Preset manual white balance cannot be measured during multiple exposures interval timer photography time lapse movie recording or focus shift ...

Page 292: ...or a protected preset will be accompanied by a flashing 3 in the viewfinder and top control panel and a flashing g in the rear control panel A Presets At shipment presets d 1 through d 6 are set to 5200 K equivalent to the direct sunlight white balance option White balance presets can be viewed by selecting White balance Preset manual in the photo shooting menu To recall a stored value highlight a...

Page 293: ...than would be possible in viewfinder photography spot white balance As long as the subject contain a white or gray area you will not have to prepare a reference object or change lenses during telephoto photography When measuring preset manual white balance for flash photography use the viewfinder as described in Viewfinder Photography 0 235 1 Hold the U button and rotate the main command dial to s...

Page 294: ...ce 2 Select a preset Hold the U button and rotate the sub command dial until the desired white balance preset d 1 to d 6 is displayed 3 Select direct measurement mode Release the U button briefly and then press the U button until the L icon in the monitor starts to flash ...

Page 295: ... a white or gray area of the subject To zoom in on the area around the target r for more precise positioning press the X button 5 Measure a value for preset white balance either by pressing the center of the multi selector or by pressing the shutter release button all the way down If the camera is able to measure white balance the new value will be reflected in the display ...

Page 296: ...rn to Step 4 Try measuring white balance again for example with the target r positioned over a different area of the subject 6 Press the U button to exit direct measurement mode White balance presets can be viewed by selecting White balance Preset manual in the photo or movie shooting menu White frames show the positions of the targets used to measure preset white balance ...

Page 297: ...r Custom Setting c4 Monitor off delay Live view D Measuring White Balance Live View Preset manual white balance cannot be measured when Multiple exposure is active or an option other than None is selected for Photo live view display WB 0 848 A Touch Controls In direct measurement mode you can position the target U and measure white balance by tapping the desired area in the display ...

Page 298: ...y a value for white balance from an existing photograph to a selected preset 1 Select White balance in the photo shooting menu then highlight Preset manual and press 2 2 Select a destination Using the multi selector highlight the destination preset d 1 to d 6 Press the center of the multi selector to view the preset manual white balance menu ...

Page 299: ...d 4 Highlight the source image Highlight the desired image using the multi selector To view the highlighted image full frame press and hold the X button 5 Copy white balance Press J to copy the white balance value for the highlighted photograph to the selected preset If the highlighted photograph has a comment the comment will be copied to the comment for the selected preset ...

Page 300: ...a descriptive comment of up to 36 characters for the current white balance preset select Edit comment in the preset manual white balance menu Enter a comment as described in Text Entry 0 86 A Protect To protect the current white balance preset select Protect in the preset manual white balance menu Highlight On and press J the current white balance preset is now protected The preset cannot be modif...

Page 301: ...L or white balance slightly with each shot bracketing the current value Choose in situations in which getting the right settings is difficult and there is not time to check results and adjust settings with each shot or to experiment with different settings for the same subject Varying Exposure or White Balance over a Series of Photographs Bracketing ...

Page 302: ...Description AE flash bracketing The camera varies exposure and flash level over a series of photographs AE bracketing The camera varies exposure over a series of photographs Flash bracketing The camera varies flash level over a series of photographs WB bracketing The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph each with a different white balance ADL bracketing The camera varies Active D Ligh...

Page 303: ... White Balance overa Series of Photographs Bracketing Exposure and Flash Bracketing Vary exposure and or flash level over a series of photographs To perform exposure and or flash bracketing No exposure compensation 1 EV 1 EV ...

Page 304: ...ing 1 Choose the number of shots Hold the BKT button and rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence At settings other than r a M icon and an exposure and flash bracketing indicator will appear in the viewfinder and top control panel ...

Page 305: ... choose the exposure increment When 1 3 step is selected for Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl the size of the increment can be chosen from 0 3 1 3 0 7 2 3 1 0 2 0 and 3 0 EV Bracketing programs with an increment of 2 0 or 3 0 EV offer a maximum of 5 shots If a value of 7 or 9 was selected in Step 1 the number of shots will automatically be set to 5 ...

Page 306: ...ting programs with an increment of 0 3 EV are listed below Top control panel Exposure and flash bracketing indicator No of shots Bracketing order EVs 0 0 3 0 0 3 0 7 3 0 0 7 0 3 2 0 0 3 2 0 0 3 3 0 0 3 0 3 5 0 0 7 0 3 0 3 0 7 7 0 1 0 0 7 0 3 0 3 0 7 1 0 9 0 1 3 1 0 0 7 0 3 0 3 0 7 1 0 1 3 ...

Page 307: ...for shutter speed and aperture are shown in the display Bracketing progress indicators are displayed in the viewfinder and top control panel A segment indicating the photograph taken will disappear from the indicator after each shot Exposure changes due to bracketing are added to those made with exposure compensation No shots 3 Increment 0 7 Display after first shot ...

Page 308: ...control modes only 0 643 1051 A Exposure and Flash Bracketing Number of shots and Increment can also be selected via the Auto bracketing item in the photo shooting menu In CL and CH modes and during burst photography in mode Q shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken Shooting will resume the next time the shutter release button is pressed If...

Page 309: ... exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded 2 If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings Auto ISO sensitivity control in the photo shooting menu the camera will first use auto ISO sensitivity control to bring exposure as close as possible to the optimum and then bracket this exposure by varying shutter speed 3 Use Custom Setting e7 Auto bracketing mode M to choose whet...

Page 310: ... command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero r and M is no longer displayed The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two button reset 0 312 although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated ...

Page 311: ...ach with a different white balance To use white balance bracketing 1 Choose the number of shots Hold the BKT button and rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence At settings other than r a W icon and a white balance bracketing indicator will appear in the top control panel and M will be displayed in the viewfinder ...

Page 312: ...Hold the BKT button and rotate the sub command dial to choose the white balance increment The size of the increment can be chosen from 1 1 step 2 2 steps or 3 3 steps Each step is equivalent to 5 mired Higher A values correspond to increased amounts of amber Higher B values correspond to increased amounts of blue ...

Page 313: ...ms with an increment of 1 are listed below Top control panel White balance bracketing indicator No of shots White balance increment Bracketing order 0 1 0 3 1B 0 B1 B2 3 1A 0 A2 A1 2 1B 0 B1 2 1A 0 A1 3 1A 1B 0 A1 B1 5 1A 1B 0 A2 A1 B1 B2 7 1A 1B 0 A3 A2 A1 B1 B2 B3 9 1A 1B 0 A4 A3 A2 A1 B1 B2 B3 B4 ...

Page 314: ...ance Modifications to white balance are added to the white balance adjustment made with white balance fine tuning If the number of shots in the bracketing program is greater than the number of exposures remaining n and the icon for the affected memory card will flash in the top control panel a flashing j icon will appear in the viewfinder and the shutter release will be disabled Shooting can begin...

Page 315: ... White balance bracketing affects only color temperature the amber blue axis in the white balance fine tuning display No adjustments are made on the green magenta axis If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit the camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have been recorded In self timer mode the number of copies specified in the white balance brac...

Page 316: ... command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero r and W is no longer displayed The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two button reset 0 312 although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated ...

Page 317: ...over a series of exposures To use ADL bracketing 1 Choose the number of shots Hold the BKT button and rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence At settings other than r an d icon and an ADL bracketing indicator will appear in the top control panel and M will be displayed in the viewfinder ...

Page 318: ...eting sequences of Off to Extra high 1 and Low to Extra high 2 by holding the BKT button and rotating the sub command dial If you chose more than two shots proceed to Step 3 Number of shots Bracketing sequence 2 Off V Value selected in Step 2 3 Off V Low V Normal 4 Off V Low V Normal V High 5 Off V Low V Normal V High V Extra high 1 Low V Normal V High V Extra high 1 V Extra high 2 ...

Page 319: ...ra Series of Photographs Bracketing 2 Choose the Active D Lighting amount Hold the BKT button and rotate the sub command dial to choose the Active D Lighting setting for the second shot when the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is 2 ...

Page 320: ...lance over a Series of Photographs Bracketing The selected option is shown in the Active D Lighting display in the top control panel Active D Lighting amount Top control panel Y Auto 3 Extra high 2 Z Extra high 1 P High Q Normal R Low ...

Page 321: ...umber of shots and Amount can also be selected via the Auto bracketing item in the photo shooting menu In CL and CH modes and during burst photography in mode Q shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken Shooting will resume the next time the shutter release button is pressed If the camera is turned off before all shots in the sequence have be...

Page 322: ... command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero r and d is no longer displayed The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is activated Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a two button reset 0 312 although in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing is activated ...

Page 323: ... Standard Picture Control The complexions of portrait subjects will appear softer than in pictures taken with the Standard Picture Control In outdoor shots elements such as the foliage and sky will appear more vivid than in pictures taken with the Standard Picture Control Q Standard Standard processing for balanced results Recommended for most situations R Neutral Minimal processing for natural re...

Page 324: ...aits p Landscape Shoot vibrant landscapes and cityscapes q Flat Details are preserved over a wide tone range from highlights to shadows Choose for photographs that will later be extensively processed or retouched l01 l20 Creative Picture Control Creative Picture Controls offer unique combinations of hue tone saturation and other settings tuned for particular effects Choose from a total of 20 optio...

Page 325: ...ption using 4 or 2 and press J to select The Picture Control used for movies can be selected by pressing the g h Q button during filming A Set Picture Control The Set Picture Control item in the movie shooting menu also offers a Same as photo settings option that sets the Picture Control for movies to the same as that used for photographs ...

Page 326: ...an be adapted to suit the scene or the photographer s creative intent Picture Controls can also be edited using the g h Q button For more information see The g h Q Button 0 125 in Camera Controls 1 Select a Picture Control Highlight the desired Picture Control in the Picture Control list and press 2 ...

Page 327: ...ements of 0 25 The options available vary with the Picture Control selected To quickly adjust levels for balanced Sharpening Mid range sharpening and Clarity highlight Quick sharp and press 4 or 2 Default settings can be restored by pressing the O Q button 3 Save changes and exit Press J to save changes Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings are indicated by an asterisk U ...

Page 328: ...age Picture Control in the photo or movie shooting menu and press 2 Option Description Save edit Create a new custom Picture Control based on an existing preset or custom Picture Control or edit existing custom Picture Controls Rename Rename custom Picture Controls Delete Delete custom Picture Controls Load save Copy custom Picture Controls to and from the memory card ...

Page 329: ...ng Picture Control and press 2 To save a copy of the highlighted Picture Control without further modification press J Save as options will be displayed proceed to Step 5 4 Adjust settings The options and procedure are the same as for Set Picture Control Press J to display Save as options when settings are complete Default settings can be restored by pressing the O Q button ...

Page 330: ...n is highlighted in the previous step displays the Rename text entry dialog The default name created by adding a two digit number to the name of the existing Picture Control appears in the text display area The two digit number is generated automatically by the camera Custom Picture Control names can be up to nineteen characters long For information on text entry see Text Entry 0 86 ...

Page 331: ... will end The new Picture Control will be added to the Picture Control list A The Original Picture Control Icon The original preset Picture Control on which the custom Picture Control is based is indicated by an icon in the top right corner of the edit display ...

Page 332: ...py them from a memory card to the camera The memory card must be inserted in Slot 1 Memory cards inserted in Slot 2 will not be detected Copy to camera Copy import custom Picture Controls from the memory card to the camera When importing custom Picture Controls you can choose the destination C 1 through C 9 and name it as desired Delete from card Delete selected custom Picture Controls from the me...

Page 333: ...ve details in highlights and shadows creating pictures with natural contrast Use for high contrast scenes for example when photographing brightly lit outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded subjects on a sunny day Active D Lighting is most effective when Matrix metering is selected for metering Preserving Detail in Highlights and Shadows Active D Lighting and HDR Off ...

Page 334: ...Lighting does not apply at high ISO sensitivities Hi 0 3 Hi 5 including high sensitivities selected via auto ISO sensitivity control The Active D Lighting option in the movie shooting menu offers a choice of Extra high High Normal Low and Off Option Description Y Auto The camera automatically adjusts Active D Lighting in response to shooting conditions 3 Extra high 2 Choose the amount of Active D ...

Page 335: ...DR high dynamic range item in the photo shooting menu can be used with high contrast subjects to preserve details in highlights and shadows by combining two shots taken at different exposures Use with high contrast scenes and other subjects to preserve a wide range of details from highlights to shadows ...

Page 336: ...n exposure between the two shots The higher the value the greater the dynamic range If Auto is selected the camera will automatically adjust the exposure differential to suit the scene Smoothing Choose how much the boundaries between the two images are smoothed Save individual images NEF Choose On to save each of the individual shots used to create the HDR image the shots are saved in NEF RAW form...

Page 337: ...Photographs We recommend that you use the Matrix metering metering option when shooting with HDR 1 Highlight HDR high dynamic range in the photo shooting menu and press 2 2 Select an HDR mode Highlight HDR mode and press 2 Highlight one of the following options using 1 or 3 and press J ...

Page 338: ... be displayed in the top control panel while HDR mode is in effect Option Description 0 On series Take a series of HDR photographs HDR shooting will continue until you select Off for HDR mode On single photo Normal shooting will resume after you have taken a single HDR photograph Off Proceed without taking additional HDR photographs ...

Page 339: ...nd press 2 Highlight an option using 1 or 3 and press J Choose higher values for high contrast subjects Note however that choosing a higher value than required may not produce the desired results Match your choice to the level of contrast in the scene If Auto is selected the camera will automatically adjust the exposure differential to suit the scene ...

Page 340: ... are smoothed Higher values produce a smoother composite image 5 Choose a setting for Save individual images NEF Highlight Save individual images NEF and press 2 Highlight an option using 1 or 3 and press J Choose On to save each of the individual shots used to create the HDR image the shots are saved in NEF RAW format The shots are saved at an image size of Large regardless of the option selected...

Page 341: ...ed all the way down Flashing 1 and k indicators appear respectively in the top control panel and viewfinder while the images are combined No additional pictures can be taken until recording is complete If On series is selected for HDR mode you can continue to take HDR photographs until Off is selected If On single photo is selected HDR will turn off automatically after a single shot ...

Page 342: ...ecommended Depending on the scene you may notice shadows around bright objects or halos around dark objects This can be mitigated using Smoothing Uneven shading may be visible with some subjects With non CPU lenses and when Spot metering or Center weighted metering is selected an Exposure differential of Auto is equivalent to 2 EV Optional flash units will not fire In CL and CH modes and during bu...

Page 343: ...usting HDR Settings When HDR high dynamic range is selected for Custom Setting f3 Custom controls BKT button HDR mode Step 2 and Exposure differential Step 3 can be selected using the BKT button and command dials Hold the BKT button and rotate the main command dial to choose from the following HDR modes a Off 1 On single photo and b On series You can choose the exposure differential by holding the...

Page 344: ...720 you can choose an image area using the Image area Choose image area option in the movie shooting menu Select FX to shoot movies in what is referred to as FX based movie format DX to shoot in DX based movie format The differences between the two are illustrated below Image Area Choosing a Movie Crop ...

Page 345: ...ecorded in DX based movie format Image area selection is not available at frame sizes of 3840 2160 and 1920 1080 crop Image area does not change when a DX lens is attached Enabling electronic vibration reduction by selecting On for Electronic VR in the movie shooting menu reduces the size of the crop slightly increasing the apparent focal length Format Area recorded FX based movie format Approx 35...

Page 346: ...e options determine the maximum bit rate and recording time as shown in the following table Frame Size Frame Rate and Movie Quality Frame size frame rate 1 Max bit rate Max recording time High quality Normal r 3840 2160 30p 2 144 Mbps 3 29 min 59 s 4 s 3840 2160 25p 2 t 3840 2160 24p 2 y y 1920 1080 60p 56 Mbps 28 Mbps 29 min 59 s 4 z z 1920 1080 50p 1 1 1920 1080 30p 28 Mbps 14 Mbps 2 2 1920 1080...

Page 347: ...umber of files and the length of each file vary with the options selected for Movie quality in the movie shooting menu Movies recorded to memory cards formatted in the camera will however be recorded as a single file regardless of size if the card has a capacity over 32 GB 5 i is displayed in the monitor u 6 1920 1080 60p crop 5 56 Mbps 28 Mbps 29 min 59 s 4 v 7 1920 1080 50p crop 5 8 8 1920 1080 ...

Page 348: ...p varies with frame size Going from a frame size of 1920 1080 or 1280 720 to 3840 2160 increases the apparent focal length by approximately 1 5 Going from 1920 1080 or 1280 720 to 1920 1080 crop increases the apparent focal length by approximately 3 1 3840 2160 2 1920 1080 and 1280 720 3 1920 1080 crop ...

Page 349: ... may end before the maximum length 0 294 is reached Note that the number of subjects that can be detected in Face priority AF drops during movie recording A 0 icon 0 17 indicates that movies cannot be recorded Spot metering is not available during movie recording Flash lighting 0 641 cannot be used Points to Note When Recording Movies ...

Page 350: ...imited to 102400 3 The upper limit for ISO sensitivity can be selected using the ISO sensitivity settings Maximum sensitivity item in the movie shooting menu 4 If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings Auto ISO control mode M in the movie shooting menu the upper limit for ISO sensitivity can be selected using Maximum sensitivity A Adjusting White Balance During Movie Recording White balance c...

Page 351: ...rollers and Remote Cords If Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g2 Custom controls Shutter release button the shutter release buttons on optional wireless remote controllers and remote cords can be pressed halfway to start live view or pressed all the way down to start and end movie recording A Using an External Microphone Optional ME 1 stereo microphones or ME W1 wireless microphones can...

Page 352: ... start end point Create a copy from which unwanted footage has been removed 4 Save current frame Save a selected frame as a JPEG still r Add index Add indices to movies during playback Indices can be used to quickly locate frames during playback and editing 0 307 o Delete index Delete indices from movies 0 307 ...

Page 353: ...center of the multi selector to start playback Press 3 to pause Your approximate position in the movie can be ascertained from the movie progress bar Press 4 or 2 or rotate the main command dial to locate the desired frame 3 Select Choose start end point Press the i button highlight Choose start end point and press 2 ...

Page 354: ... current frame highlight Start point and press J 5 Confirm the new start point If the desired frame is not currently displayed press 4 or 2 to advance or rewind To skip to 10 s ahead or back rotate the main command dial To skip to the first or last frame rotate the sub command dial ...

Page 355: ...d then select the closing frame x as described in Step 5 7 Press 1 to create the copy 8 Preview the copy To preview the copy highlight Preview and press J to interrupt the preview and return to the save options menu press 1 To abandon the current copy and return to Step 5 highlight Cancel and press J ...

Page 356: ...th the edited copy choose Overwrite existing file 10Save the copy Press J to save the copy D Trimming Movies The copy will not be saved if there is insufficient space available on the memory card Movies less than two seconds long cannot be edited using Choose start end point Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original ...

Page 357: ...nd point in Step 4 select the closing frame and proceed to Step 7 without pressing the g h Q button in Step 6 To remove only the opening footage proceed to Step 7 without pressing the g h Q button in Step 6 A The Retouch Menu Trim Movie Option Movies can also be edited using the Trim movie item in the retouch menu ...

Page 358: ...se Save current frame Press the i button then highlight Save current frame and press J to create a JPEG copy of the current frame A Save Current Frame Stills are saved at the dimensions selected for Frame size frame rate in the movie shooting menu when the movie was recorded They cannot be retouched Some categories of photo information are not displayed during playback ...

Page 359: ... the i button highlight Add index and press J to add an index Up to 20 indices can be added to each movie A Deleting Indices After rotating the sub command dial to skip to the desired index either while playback is in progress or while playback is paused press the i button to display a menu The selected index can then be deleted by highlighting Delete index and pressing J ...

Page 360: ...rd in Slot 2 is used only when the card in Slot 1 is full Q Backup Each picture is recorded twice once to the card in Slot 1 and again to the card in Slot 2 R RAW Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 NEF RAW copies of photos taken at settings of NEF RAW JPEG are recorded only to the card in Slot 1 JPEG copies only to the card in Slot 2 Pictures taken at other image quality settings are recorded twice at the same se...

Page 361: ... option selected for image quality O JPEG Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 Two JPEG copies are recorded one to each memory card The copy saved to the card in Slot 1 is recorded at the image quality and size selected via the T button or photo shooting menu The copy saved to the card in Slot 2 is recorded at an image quality of JPEG basic and a size of either Medium or Small The size can be selected by pressing 2...

Page 362: ... either card is full A Viewing Dual Format Photos Use the Dual format recording PB slot item in the playback menu to choose the slot from which dual format photos are played back When viewing dual format photos you can view the other copy using Jump to copy on other card in the i menu A Recording Movies When two memory cards are inserted in the camera the slot used to record movies can be selected...

Page 363: ...hted during playback displays a confirmation message To delete only the copy on the card in the current slot highlight Selected image and press O Q again To delete both copies highlight Same images on w and x and press O Q If a voice memo is appended to the picture a confirmation dialog will be displayed To delete only the voice memo highlight Voice memo only and press O Q A Delete Options Use the...

Page 364: ...s listed below can be restored to default values by pressing the two buttons marked with green dots S and U at the same time and holding them for over two seconds the control panels turn off briefly while settings are reset Two Button Reset Restoring Default Settings ...

Page 365: ...ettings in the current photo shooting menu bank are affected Option Default Extended photo menu banks Off Image quality JPEG normal Image size JPEG Large NEF RAW Large ISO sensitivity settings ISO sensitivity 100 Auto ISO sensitivity control Off White balance AUTO0 Keep white reduce warm colors Fine tune A B 0 G M 0 Set Picture Control Auto Active D Lighting Off ...

Page 366: ...created from exposures recorded to that point If On series or On single photo is selected the multiple exposure mode will be reset to Off Number of shots Overlay mode Save individual images NEF and Overlay shooting are not reset 3 On series and On single photo are reset to Off Exposure differential Smoothing and Save individual images NEF are not reset Flicker reduction Flicker reduction setting D...

Page 367: ...enu Option Default ISO sensitivity settings Maximum sensitivity 102400 Auto ISO control mode M Off ISO sensitivity mode M 100 White balance Same as photo settings Set Picture Control Same as photo settings Active D Lighting Off Electronic VR Off Headphone volume 15 ...

Page 368: ...t Focus point Center Preset focus point Center Exposure mode Programmed auto Flexible program Off Exposure compensation Off 0 0 AE lock Hold Off Aperture lock Off Shutter speed lock Off Exposure preview Off Autofocus mode AF S AF area mode viewfinder photography Single point AF ...

Page 369: ...affected AF area mode live view filming Normal area AF Photo live view display WB None Metering Matrix metering Flash mode Fill flash Flash compensation Off 0 0 FV lock Off Multi selector power aperture Disable Multi selector exposure comp Disable Exposure delay mode Off Highlight display Off Option Default ...

Page 370: ...mbining Multiple Exposures in a Single Photo Multiple Exposure Option Description Multiple exposure mode On series Take a series of multiple exposures To end multiple exposure photography select Multiple exposure mode again and choose Off On single photo Create one multiple exposure Off End multiple exposure photography Number of shots Choose the number of exposures that will be combined to form a...

Page 371: ... each exposure is equal to 1 divided by the total number of exposures taken For example in a photo made by combining two exposures the gain for each exposure will be set to 1 2 while in a photo combining three exposures gain will be set to 1 3 Lighten The camera compares the pixels in each exposure and uses only the brightest Darken The camera compares the pixels in each exposure and uses only the...

Page 372: ...rd the individual shots and save only the multiple exposure Overlay shooting On Earlier exposures are superimposed on the view through the lens during live view photography The earlier exposures aid composition of the next shot Off Earlier exposures are not displayed while shooting is in progress Select first exposure NEF Choose the first exposure from the NEF RAW images on the memory card Option ...

Page 373: ...light Multiple exposure in the photo shooting menu and press 2 2 Choose an option for Multiple exposure mode Highlight Multiple exposure mode and press 2 Highlight a multiple exposure mode using 1 or 3 and press J A n icon is displayed in the top control panel when On series or On single photo is selected ...

Page 374: ...e 3 Choose a value for Number of shots number of exposures Highlight Number of shots and press 2 Choose the number of exposures using 1 or 3 and press J 4 Choose an option for Overlay mode Highlight Overlay mode and press 2 Highlight an option using 1 or 3 and press J ...

Page 375: ... or 3 and press J To save both the multiple exposure and the shots that make it up select On the individual shots are saved in NEF RAW format To save only the multiple exposure select Off 6 Choose an option for Overlay shooting Highlight Overlay shooting and press 2 Highlight an option using 1 or 3 and press J Select On to superimpose earlier exposures on the view through the lens in live view ...

Page 376: ...ew the highlighted picture full frame press and hold the X button To view pictures in other locations press W M and choose the desired card and folder in the Choose slot and folder dialog After highlighting the desired picture press J If an NEF RAW image taken at an ISO sensitivity of Hi 0 3 to Hi 5 is selected as the first exposure the electronic shutter will not be used to record the remaining s...

Page 377: ... first exposure in Step 7 shooting will start from the second exposure The number of exposures remaining in the current multiple exposure can be displayed by pressing the shutter release button halfway between shots Once you have taken the selected number of shots the pictures will be overlaid to create a multiple exposure Multiple exposures are recorded in JPEG format regardless of the option sel...

Page 378: ...take additional multiple exposures until Off is selected D Multiple Exposure Voice memos can be recorded once shooting is complete You cannot record voice memos while shooting is in progress If you use the monitor for menu navigation or playback while shooting a multiple exposure remember that shooting will end and the multiple exposure will be recorded if no operations are performed for about 30 ...

Page 379: ... On series is selected the camera will continue to record multiple exposures while the shutter release button is pressed In self timer mode 0 209 the interval between each shot in the exposure is selected using Custom Setting c3 Self timer Interval between shots Regardless of the value selected for the c3 Number of shots option shooting will however end after the number of shots selected for the m...

Page 380: ...the BKT button and rotate the main command dial to choose from the following multiple exposure modes a Off 1 On single photo and b On series You can choose the number of shots by holding the BKT button and rotating the sub command dial until the desired value is displayed in the top control panel A Multiple Exposure Restrictions Multiple exposure cannot be combined with some camera features includ...

Page 381: ...osure i menu Highlight items and press J to select You can also have the option of using touch controls after pressing the i button Option Description View progress View a preview created from the exposures recorded to the current point Retake last exposure Retake the most recent exposure Save and exit Create a multiple exposure from the exposures taken to current point Discard and exit Exit witho...

Page 382: ...iple exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to that point if Average is selected for Overlay mode gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures actually recorded The multiple exposure will also end if a two button reset is performed the camera is turned off the battery is exhausted or you press the K button followed by the i button and select either Save and...

Page 383: ...ooting Option Description Start Start interval timer shooting Shooting will begin either after 3 s Now selected for Choose start day time or at a selected date and time Choose day time Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been taken Choose start day time Choose a start option Select Now to start shooting immediately Choose day time to start shooting at a chosen date...

Page 384: ...shooting may result in apparent variations in exposure This can be addressed by shortening the interval between shots Exposure smoothing will not take effect in mode M if Off is selected for ISO sensitivity settings Auto ISO sensitivity control in the photo shooting menu Silent photography Select On to silence the shutter and eliminate the vibrations it produces during shooting Option Description ...

Page 385: ...utofocus mode select Release for Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection If AF C is selected select Release for Custom Setting a1 AF C priority selection If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings Auto ISO sensitivity control and the time chosen for Minimum shutter speed is longer than the interval the time selected for the interval will take priority over the selected shutter speed Off Disa...

Page 386: ... time lapse movie with an aspect ratio of 16 9 The camera saves both the photos and the time lapse movie Selecting 1 2 30 20 5 4 30 24 or 1 1 24 24 for Image area Choose image area in the photo shooting menu disables the shutter release Movies created using Time lapse movie are recorded in the sRGB color space regardless of the option selected for Color space in the photo shooting menu Off Do not ...

Page 387: ...ly To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with photographs or exposure when your eye is from the viewfinder and Off is selected for Silent photography raise the viewfinder eyepiece shutter lever to close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter Starting storage folder Highlight either of the following options and press 2 to select selected items are marked with a check M To deselect remov...

Page 388: ... in the photo shooting menu and press 2 2 Adjust interval timer settings Choose the start day and time To start shooting immediately select Now To start shooting at a chosen date and time select Choose day time Choose the date and time and press J Highlight Choose start day time and press 2 Highlight an option and press J ...

Page 389: ...te selected for Custom Setting d1 Continuous shooting speed Continuous high speed When Off is selected for Silent photography the maximum number of intervals will vary with the number of shots per interval Highlight Interval and press 2 Choose an interval in hours minutes and seconds and press J Highlight Intervals shots interval and press 2 Choose the number of intervals and the number of shots p...

Page 390: ...ilent photography If On is selected the only time the sound of the shutter or mirror will be heard is when the mirror is raised or lowered at the start and end of shooting Highlight Exposure smoothing and press 2 Highlight an option and press J Highlight Silent photography and press 2 Highlight an option and press J ...

Page 391: ...Timer Shooting Choose an interval priority option Choose whether the camera focuses between shots Highlight Interval priority and press 2 Highlight an option and press J Highlight Focus before each shot and press 2 Highlight an option and press J ...

Page 392: ... Number of shots and Increment if you selected Time lapse movie choose settings for Frame size frame rate and Destination Choose starting folder options Highlight Options and press 2 Highlight AE bracketing or Time lapse movie and press 2 Highlight Starting storage folder and press 2 Select the desired options and press J to proceed ...

Page 393: ...dicted shutter speed Note that during actual interval timer photography the camera must not only take shots at the selected interval but must also have sufficient time to complete the exposures and perform such tasks as processing the photographs If the interval is too short to take the selected number of photos the camera may skip to the next interval without shooting If the interval is too short...

Page 394: ...ve but no pictures will be taken Insert another memory card and resume shooting 0 346 Interval timer shooting will pause if The camera is turned off and then on again when the camera is off batteries and memory cards can be replaced without ending interval timer photography E or MUP is selected for release mode Changing camera settings while the interval timer is active may cause shooting to end D...

Page 395: ...f timer Bracketing Multiple exposure HDR high dynamic range Focus shift D When On Is Selected for Silent Photography Selecting On for Silent photography disables some camera features including ISO sensitivities of Hi 0 3 through Hi 5 Flash photography Long exposure noise reduction Exposure delay mode Flicker reduction D Interval Timer Settings Turning the camera off or selecting a new release mode...

Page 396: ...nterval can be viewed by pressing the shutter release button halfway If Time lapse movie is selected for Options the memory card access lamp will remain lit during interval timer photography A Photo Shooting Menu Banks Changes to interval timer settings apply to all photo shooting menu banks A through D Interval timer shooting will consequently continue even if you switch menu banks using the Phot...

Page 397: ...ervals by pressing J or by selecting Interval timer shooting in the photo shooting menu highlighting Pause and pressing J Note that the menus may not be displayed when the G button is pressed if the time selected for Interval is very short If Time lapse movie is selected for Options pressing J between intervals will end interval timer photography ...

Page 398: ...e Interval timer shooting item in the photo shooting menu The procedure is as follows To resume shooting immediately To resume shooting at a specified time Highlight Restart and press J Select Choose start day time highlight Choose day time and press 2 Choose a starting date and time and press J Highlight Restart and press J ...

Page 399: ...re taken select Interval timer shooting highlight Off and press J Note that the menus may not be displayed when the G button is pressed if the time selected for Interval is very short In this case you will need to press J to pause interval timer photography and then select Interval timer shooting in the photo shooting menu highlight Off and press J ...

Page 400: ...for Interval for the time selected for Shooting time Interval Choose the interval between shots in minutes and seconds Shooting time Choose how long the camera will continue to take pictures in hours and minutes Exposure smoothing Selecting On smooths abrupt changes in exposure Large changes in subject brightness during shooting may result in apparent variations in exposure This can be addressed b...

Page 401: ...A are taken at the chosen interval If AF S is selected for autofocus mode select Release for Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection If AF C is selected select Release for Custom Setting a1 AF C priority selection If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings Auto ISO sensitivity control and the time chosen for Minimum shutter speed is longer than the interval the time selected for the interval...

Page 402: ... the correct time and date We recommend using a tripod and disabling lens vibration reduction VR To ensure that shooting is not interrupted use a fully charged battery or an AC adapter and power connector available separately To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with photographs or exposure when your eye is from the viewfinder and Off is selected for Silent photography raise th...

Page 403: ...se an interval longer than the slowest anticipated shutter speed Choose the total shooting time The maximum shooting time is 7 hours and 59 minutes Highlight Interval and press 2 Choose an interval in minutes and seconds and press J Highlight Shooting time and press 2 Choose a shooting time in hours and minutes and press J ...

Page 404: ...Enable or disable silent photography If On is selected the only time the sound of the shutter or mirror will be heard is when the mirror is raised or lowered at the start and end of shooting Highlight Exposure smoothing and press 2 Highlight an option and press J Highlight Silent photography and press 2 Highlight an option and press J ...

Page 405: ... option FX or DX in the case of Choose image area On or Off in the case of Auto DX crop and press J Choose the frame size and rate Highlight Image area and press 2 Highlight Choose image area or Auto DX crop and press 2 Highlight Frame size frame rate and press 2 Highlight an option and press J ...

Page 406: ...cuses between shots If On is selected for Focus before each shot the camera will focus before each shot according to the option currently selected for autofocus mode Highlight Interval priority and press 2 Highlight an option and press J Highlight Focus before each shot and press 2 Highlight an option and press J ...

Page 407: ...press J Shooting starts after about 3 s The camera takes pictures at interval selected for Interval for the time selected for Shooting time in Step 2 Highlight Destination and press 2 Highlight the slot that will be used to record time lapse movies when two memory cards are inserted and press J ...

Page 408: ...tography will resume D Calculating the Length of the Final Movie The total number of frames in the final movie can be calculated by dividing the shooting time selected in Step 2 by the interval rounding up and adding 1 The length of the final movie can then be calculated by dividing the number of shots by the frame rate selected for Frame size frame rate for example a 48 frame movie recorded with ...

Page 409: ... a result the interval between a shot being recorded and the start of the next shot may vary Shooting will not begin if a time lapse movie cannot be recorded at current settings for example if The value selected for Interval is longer than that selected for Shooting time 00 00 00 is selected for Interval or Shooting time On is selected for both Silent photography and Interval priority and 00 00 0 ...

Page 410: ...cting the memory card D During Shooting During shooting Q and the time lapse recording indicator will be displayed in the top control panel The time remaining in hours and minutes appears in the shutter speed display immediately before each frame is recorded At other times the time remaining can be viewed by pressing the shutter release button halfway D Adjusting Settings Between Shots Shooting an...

Page 411: ...ecording Long time exposures Bulb or Time The self timer Bracketing Multiple exposure HDR high dynamic range Interval timer photography Focus shift D When On Is Selected for Silent Photography Selecting On for Silent photography disables some camera features including ISO sensitivities of Hi 0 3 through Hi 5 Flash photography Exposure delay mode Long exposure noise reduction Flicker reduction ...

Page 412: ...uter and combined using third party software Focus Shift Shooting Options Varying Focus over a Series of Photos Focus Shift Shooting Option Description Start Start shooting The camera will take the selected number of shots changing the focus distance by the selected amount with each shot No of shots Choose the number of shots maximum 300 Focus step width Focus shift varies the focus distance over ...

Page 413: ... The camera locks exposure for all shots at the setting for the first frame Off The camera adjusts exposure before each shot Silent photography Select On to silence the shutter and eliminate the vibrations it produces during shooting Starting storage folder Highlight either of the following options and press 2 to select M or deselect U New folder A new folder is created for each new sequence Reset...

Page 414: ... that you take all shots at the same ISO sensitivity Take a test shot at current settings We recommend using a tripod and disabling lens vibration reduction VR To ensure that shooting is not interrupted use a fully charged battery or an AC adapter and power connector available separately To prevent light entering via the viewfinder interfering with photographs or exposure when your eye is from the...

Page 415: ...ith manual focus lenses 2 Focus During focus shift the camera takes a series of shots starting from a selected focus position and continuing toward infinity The starting focus position should be slightly in front of the closest point on the subject Do not move the camera after focusing 3 Highlight Focus shift shooting in the photo shooting menu and press 2 ...

Page 416: ...end taking more shots than you think you ll need You can winnow them down during focus stacking More than 100 shots may be required for photographs of insects or other small objects On the other hand only a few may be needed to photograph a landscape from front to back with a wide angle lens Highlight No of shots and press 2 Choose the number of shots and press J ...

Page 417: ...ess 4 to reduce the focus step width 2 to increase Note that high settings increase the risk that some areas will be out of focus when the shots are stacked A value of 5 or less is recommended Try experimenting with different settings before shooting Highlight Focus step width and press 2 Choose a focus step width and press J ...

Page 418: ... in seconds Select 00 to take photos at up to approximately 3 fps To ensure correct exposure when using a flash choose an interval long enough for the flash to charge A setting of 00 is recommended when shooting without a flash Highlight Interval until next shot and press 2 Choose the interval between shots in seconds and press J ...

Page 419: ...en photographing landscapes and the like under variable lighting Selecting On locks exposure at the value for the first shot ensuring that all photos have the same exposure Large changes in subject brightness during shooting may however result in apparent variations in exposure This can be addressed by selecting Off Highlight First frame exposure lock and press 2 Highlight an option and press J ...

Page 420: ... Enable or disable silent photography If On is selected the only time the sound of the shutter or mirror will be heard is when the mirror is raised or lowered at the start and end of shooting Highlight Silent photography and press 2 Highlight an option and press J ...

Page 421: ...k M To deselect remove the check from U a selected option highlight it and press 2 again Place a check M next to New folder to create a new folder for each new sequence Place a check M next to Reset file numbering to reset file numbering to 0001 whenever a new folder is created Highlight Starting storage folder and press 2 Select the desired options and press J to proceed ...

Page 422: ...d at the start of shooting and progressing out toward infinity by the selected focus step distance with each shot Shooting ends when the selected number of shots has been taken or focus reaches infinity To end shooting before all shots have been taken either select Focus shift shooting in the photo shooting menu highlight Off and press J or press the shutter release button halfway or press the J b...

Page 423: ...ss If you are using a flash choose an interval longer than the time needed for the flash to charge If the interval is too short the flash may fire at less than the power needed for full exposure If shooting cannot proceed at current settings for example because shutter speed is set to A Bulb or Time a warning will be displayed Changing camera settings while focus shift photography is in progress m...

Page 424: ...mmend choosing smaller focus steps and increasing the number of shots when photographing subjects close to the camera A During Shooting During focus shift photography the Q icon will flash in the top control panel Immediately before each shot the AF indicator will flash and the shutter speed display will show the number of shots remaining ...

Page 425: ...aphy cannot be combined with some camera features including Live view Movie recording Long time exposures Bulb or Time The self timer Bracketing Multiple exposure HDR high dynamic range Interval timer photography Time lapse movies A When On Is Selected for Silent Photography Selecting On for Silent photography disables some camera features including ISO sensitivities of Hi 0 3 through Hi 5 Flash p...

Page 426: ...nating the vibrations it produces select On for Silent live view photography in the photo shooting menu Use for landscapes still lifes and other static subjects Use of a tripod is recommended Enabling silent live view photography changes the frame advance rates for continuous release modes 0 205 The Electronic Shutter Silent Live View Photography ...

Page 427: ...ces as fluorescent mercury vapor or sodium lamps Distortion associated with motion individual subjects such as trains or cars moving at high speed through the frame may be distorted or the entire frame may appear distorted when the camera is panned horizontally Jagged edges color fringing moiré and bright spots Bright regions or bands in scenes lit by flashing signs and other intermittent light so...

Page 428: ...nt Live View Photography A Silent Photography Some camera features including the following cannot be combined with silent live view photography ISO sensitivities of Hi 0 3 through Hi 5 Flash photography Long exposure noise reduction ...

Page 429: ... Setting f2 Customize i menu Lv to choose the items displayed during live view photography and Custom Setting g1 Customize i menu to choose the items displayed during movie recording The procedure for customizing the i menus is described below 1 Highlight the position you want to change and press J A list of the items available for the selected position will be displayed CustomizingtheiMenus Custo...

Page 430: ...ght the desired item and press J The item will be assigned to the selected position and the options shown in Step 1 will be displayed Repeat Steps 1 and 2 as desired 3 Press the G button Changes will be saved and the Custom Settings menu will be displayed ...

Page 431: ...he focal length allows use of power zoom with optional flash units and allows lens focal length to be listed with an asterisk in the playback photo info display Entering the maximum aperture allows the aperture value to be displayed in the top control panel and viewfinder allows flash level to be adjusted for changes in aperture in auto aperture qA mode and allows aperture to be listed with an ast...

Page 432: ...eighted metering or Spot metering can be used instead Entering both the focal length and the maximum aperture improves the precision of Center weighted metering Spot metering and i TTL flash control D Teleconverters and Zoom Lenses If the correct focal length is not available for example because you are using a teleconverter or zoom lens choose the next largest value The maximum aperture for telec...

Page 433: ...on CPU Lens Data Entering Lens Data 1 Highlight Non CPU lens data in the setup menu and press 2 2 Highlight Lens number Press 4 or 2 to choose a lens number 3 Highlight Focal length mm Press 4 or 2 to enter the lens focal length ...

Page 434: ...ing Non CPU Lenses Non CPU Lens Data 4 Highlight Maximum aperture Press 4 or 2 to enter the maximum aperture 5 Press J to save changes Lens information will be saved and the camera will exit to the setup menu ...

Page 435: ...ontrol to which Choose non CPU lens number has been assigned and rotate a command dial The selected lens number is displayed in the top control panel Rotate the dial until the desired lens number is displayed A Zoom Lenses Lens data are not adjusted when non CPU lenses are zoomed in or out Edit lens data after adjusting zoom 1 Focal length 2 Maximum aperture 3 Lens number ...

Page 436: ...on or adjust location data settings highlight Location data built in in the setup menu and press 2 Location Data Option Description Record location data Select On to enable the location data function Standby timer If Enable is selected when Record location data is set to On the standby timer will expire if no operations are performed for the period chosen using Custom Setting c2 Standby timer Choo...

Page 437: ... location Log length Choose how long logging will continue Log list List track logs by date Where multiple logs were recorded on the same day an identifier appears after the date The camera can store up to 100 track logs To delete a log highlight it and press O Q Position View the latitude longitude altitude and Coordinated Universal Time UTC currently reported by the built in location data unit U...

Page 438: ...ermine its location from the satellite signal location data are not recorded Wait for the o icon to stop flashing o not displayed The o icon clears from the display if no signal is received for two seconds Location data will not be recorded with pictures taken when the icon is not displayed Note however that location data previously acquired may be recorded with pictures taken after the icon has c...

Page 439: ... location data in some locations or at certain hours of the day Satellite signals may be blocked or reflected in the locations listed below rendering the data acquired less accurate or preventing its acquisition altogether In buildings or under ground Between tall buildings Under bridges In tunnels Near power lines or similar structures In dense forest In metal briefcases or other containers The p...

Page 440: ...cation data function The location data function can be disabled by selecting Off for Location data built in Record location data in the setup menu A Track Logs Track logs will not be recorded if the camera clock is not set or if no memory card is inserted To prevent logs being interrupted be sure the camera battery is fully charged Tracking ends if the camera battery runs low the battery is remove...

Page 441: ...g order by the camera and log the extension thus the first log recorded on October 15 2019 will be named N1910150 log Logs are in NMEA format There is however no guarantee that they will display correctly in all software or on all devices A SnapBridge Using the SnapBridge app location data can be downloaded to the camera from a smartphone or tablet smart device via a wireless link even when locati...

Page 442: ... to view the most recent picture full frame Additional pictures can be viewed using the multi selector press 2 to view pictures in the order recorded 4 to view pictures in reverse order To view more information on the current picture press 1 or 3 0 405 Viewing Pictures ...

Page 443: ...tiple pictures press the W M button when a picture is displayed full frame The number of pictures displayed increases from 4 to 9 to 72 each time the W M button is pressed and decreases with each press of the X button Highlight pictures using 1 3 4 or 2 ...

Page 444: ...ng Pictures Playback Controls 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 O Q Delete the current picture 0 429 2 G View the menus 0 80 3 g h Q Protect the current picture 0 421 4 X Zoom in 0 419 5 W M View multiple pictures 0 391 6 J button ...

Page 445: ...selected slot You can then highlight a folder and press J to view the pictures it contains J If the current picture is a photograph retouch options will be displayed J View the IPTC presets created using the IPTC option in the setup menu To embed an IPTC preset in the current photo highlight the preset and press J any preset already embedded in the current photo will be replaced J Upload the curre...

Page 446: ...ng the W M button when 72 thumbnails are displayed A Image Review When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting there is no need for you to press the K button In CH and CL modes and during burst photography in mode Q display begins when shooting ends with the first photograph in the current series displayed Because t...

Page 447: ... used for the operations below Viewing Other Pictures Flick left or right to view other pictures Scrolling Rapidly to Other Pictures Touching the bottom of the screen in full frame view displays a frame advance bar Slide your finger left or right along the bar to scroll rapidly to other pictures ...

Page 448: ... frame playback 0 418 Stretch again to zoom in further Pinch to zoom out Glide to scroll Double tap to cancel zoom Viewing Thumbnails Use a pinch gesture to zoom out from full frame playback to a thumbnail view 0 391 Use pinch and stretch to choose the number of images displayed from 4 9 and 72 frames ...

Page 449: ...creen guide to start movie playback movies are indicated by a 1 icon Tap the display to pause Tap again to resume To exit to full frame playback tap Z Note that some of the icons in the movie playback display do not respond to touch screen operations ...

Page 450: ...reviously selected rating Select to send wired LAN WT Select the current picture for upload to a computer or ftp server via Ethernet or wireless transmitter Protect Protect the current picture Voice memo Record a voice memo or play the voice memo for the current picture None Flicking in the selected direction has no effect In the case of Rating Select to send wired LAN WT and Protect the operation...

Page 451: ...s The i Button Pressing the i button during playback zoom or full frame or thumbnail playback displays the i menu for playback mode Highlight items and press J or 2 to select Press the i button again to return to playback ...

Page 452: ...ice Select the current picture for upload The option displayed varies with the type of device connected Select to send to computer Select to send wired LAN WT Filtered playback View only pictures that match selected criteria 0 427 Filtered playback criteria Choose filter criteria Record voice memo Add a voice memo to the current picture 0 440 Play voice memo Play the voice memo for the current pic...

Page 453: ...selected for Role played by card in Slot 2 choosing this option displays the copy on the card in the other slot Choose slot and folder Choose a slot and folder for playback Highlight a slot and press 2 to display a list of the folders on the memory card in the selected slot You can then highlight a folder and press J to view the pictures it contains Select R G B 2 Press 4 or 2 to choose a color ch...

Page 454: ... from multiple source images press 1 or 3 to view the other images If the source has been copied multiple times press 1 or 3 to view the other copies To view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the X button Press J to return to playback with the highlighted image displayed full screen The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a photograph that is now protec...

Page 455: ...ures that match selected criteria 0 427 Filtered playback criteria Choose filter criteria Volume control Adjust playback volume Trim movie Trim footage from the current movie and save the edited copy in a new file 0 300 Choose slot and folder Choose a slot and folder for playback Highlight a slot and press 2 to display a list of the folders on the memory card in the selected slot You can then high...

Page 456: ...ge from the current movie and save the edited copy in a new file 0 300 4 Save current frame Save a selected frame as a JPEG still 0 306 r Add index Add indices to movies during playback Indices can be used to quickly locate frames during playback and editing 0 307 o Delete index Delete indices 0 307 ...

Page 457: ... Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo information as shown below Displayed only if the corresponding option is selected for Playback display options in the playback menu Photo Information 1 File information 2 Exposure data 3 Highlights 4 RGB histogram 5 Shooting data 6 Overview data 7 None image only ...

Page 458: ...otography 123 5 4 6 8 7 16 15 14 13 12 11 17 10 9 1 Voice memo indicator 0 436 2 Protect status 0 421 3 Retouch indicator 0 958 4 Upload marking 0 425 5 IPTC preset indicator 0 400 914 6 Focus point 1 0 164 7 AF area brackets 2 0 164 8 Frame number total number of frames 9 File name 0 760 10 Image quality 0 118 144 11 Image size 0 120 145 12 Image area 0 136 13 Time of recording 0 43 14 Date of re...

Page 459: ...s To choose a color channel for the highlight display choose Select R G B in the i menu and press 4 or 2 4 3 2 5 6 1 1 Folder number frame number 0 755 2 Exposure mode 0 108 182 3 Shutter speed 0 185 188 4 Aperture 0 186 188 5 Exposure compensation 0 117 199 6 ISO sensitivity 0 114 213 1 1 Highlights areas that may be overexposed ...

Page 460: ...togram display press X The histogram will be updated to show only the data for the portion of the image visible in the display Use the multi selector to scroll Press W M to zoom out 2 3 4 5 1 1 White balance 0 121 221 Color temperature 0 231 Preset manual 0 234 White balance fine tuning 0 227 2 Histogram RGB channel 3 Histogram red channel 4 Histogram green channel 5 Histogram blue channel ...

Page 461: ... left If the image is bright the distribution will be shifted to the right Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the right while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to the left Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see pictures in the monitor D The Histogram Display RGB histogra...

Page 462: ...g data in the playback menu Basic Shooting Data 1 Metering 0 111 178 Shutter speed 0 185 188 Aperture 0 186 188 2 Exposure mode 0 108 182 ISO sensitivity 1 0 114 213 11 6 7 8 10 9 5 4 3 2 1 3 Exposure compensation 0 117 199 Optimal exposure tuning 2 0 821 4 Focal length 3 5 Lens data 6 Autofocus mode 0 98 149 AF area mode 0 101 153 7 Lens vibration reduction VR on off 4 8 White balance 5 0 121 221...

Page 463: ...yed if Custom Setting b7 Fine tune optimal exposure has been set to a value other than zero for any metering method 3 Also includes the magnification for pictures taken with a teleconverter 4 Displayed only if the picture was shot with a VR lens 5 Also includes the color temperature for pictures taken using Auto or Natural light auto ...

Page 464: ... flash level selected by the flash unit is displayed using the equivalent manual flash output value Picture Control Data The items displayed vary with the Picture Control in effect when the picture was taken 4 3 2 1 1 Flash type 2 Remote flash control 3 Flash mode 0 131 648 4 Flash control mode 0 645 Flash compensation 0 133 653 Flash level 1 1 Picture Control 0 125 271 ...

Page 465: ...menu at the time the picture was taken 5 4 3 6 2 1 1 High ISO noise reduction 0 768 Long exposure noise reduction 0 767 2 Active D Lighting 0 281 3 HDR exposure differential 0 283 HDR smoothing 0 283 4 Vignette control 0 769 5 Retouch history 0 958 Changes are listed in the order applied 6 Image comment 0 911 2 1 1 Photographer 0 912 2 Copyright holder 0 912 ...

Page 466: ...414 Photo Information Location Data Location data are displayed only if embedded in the picture at the time it was taken 4 3 2 1 1 Latitude 2 Longitude 3 Altitude 4 Universal Coordinated Time UTC ...

Page 467: ... IPTC Data 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 1 Caption 2 Event ID 3 Headline 4 Object Name 5 City 6 State 7 Country 8 Category 9 Supp Cat Supplemental Categories 10 Byline 11 Byline Title 12 Writer Editor 13 Credit 14 Source ...

Page 468: ...ct status 0 421 5 Retouch indicator 0 958 6 Camera name 7 Location data indicator 0 384 8 Image comment indicator 0 911 9 IPTC preset indicator 0 400 914 10 Histogram 0 409 11 Image quality 0 118 144 12 Image size 0 120 145 13 Image area 0 136 14 File name 0 760 15 Time of recording 0 43 16 Folder name 0 755 17 Date of recording 0 43 18 Current card slot 0 38 19 Rating 0 423 ...

Page 469: ... 0 111 178 2 Exposure mode 0 108 182 3 Shutter speed 0 185 188 4 Aperture 0 186 188 5 ISO sensitivity 1 0 114 213 6 Focal length 7 Picture Control 0 125 271 8 Active D Lighting 0 281 9 Color space 0 765 10 Flash mode 2 0 131 648 11 Flash compensation 2 0 133 653 Commander mode 2 12 White balance 0 121 221 Color temperature 0 231 Preset manual 0 234 White balance fine tuning 0 227 13 Exposure compe...

Page 470: ...r the center of the sub selector or give the display two quick taps FX 36 24 format photos can be zoomed in to maximum of approximately 21 Large pictures 16 Medium or 10 Small Faces detected during zoom are indicated by white borders rotate the sub command dial to view other faces Playback Zoom ...

Page 471: ...zoom ratio is altered with the area currently visible indicated by a yellow border A bar below the navigation window shows the zoom ratio turning green at 1 1 The navigation window clears from the display after a few seconds View other areas of image Use the multi selector or glide gestures to view areas of image not visible in the monitor Keep the multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other...

Page 472: ...screen guide to view other faces View other pictures Rotate the main command dial to view the same location in other photos without changing the zoom ratio selecting a movie cancels zoom You can also view other photos by tapping the e or f icon at the bottom of the display Protect pictures Press the g h Q button to toggle protection for the current picture on or off 0 421 Resume shooting Press the...

Page 473: ...rotected pictures will however be deleted when the memory card is formatted 0 887 1 Select a picture Display the picture in full frame playback or playback zoom Alternatively you can highlight the picture in the thumbnail list using the multi selector 2 Press the g h Q button Protecting Pictures from Deletion ...

Page 474: ...g h Q again A Voice Memos Protecting photos also protects any voice memos recorded with the pictures Voice memos cannot be protected separately A Removing Protection from All Images To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected for Playback folder in the playback menu press the g h Q and O Q buttons for about two seconds during playback ...

Page 475: ...and press the i button 2 Highlight Rating and press 2 3 Choose a rating Rotate the main command dial to choose the desired rating and then press J Choose from ratings of from zero to five stars or select d to mark the picture as a candidate for later deletion Rating Pictures ...

Page 476: ...e NX D Protected pictures cannot be rated A Rating Pictures Using Camera Controls If Rating is assigned to Fn button for vertical shooting or Fn3 button using Custom Setting f3 Custom controls pictures can be rated by holding the selected control and rotating the main command dial ...

Page 477: ...n the setup menu 0 929 Select to send to computer Displayed when the camera is connected to a computer via built in Wi Fi using Connect to PC built in Wi Fi in the setup menu 0 932 Select to send wired LAN WT Displayed when the camera is connected to a computer or ftp server via Ethernet or an optional WT 6 wireless transmitter using Wired LAN WT in the setup menu 0 937 Movies cannot be selected f...

Page 478: ...elect to send to smart device Select to send to computer or Select to send wired LAN WT and press J Pictures destined for a smart device are marked with a W icon while those destined for a computer or ftp server are marked with u D Removing Upload Marking To remove upload marking repeat Steps 1 and 2 ...

Page 479: ... the criteria chosen for Filtered playback criteria in the playback menu or playback i menu Filtered Playback Criteria Highlight options and press 2 to select M or deselect U During filtered playback only pictures that meet all criteria marked with a check M will be displayed Filtered Playback ...

Page 480: ...nclude protected pictures Rating M Include pictures with selected ratings Select to send wired LAN WT Select M Sent images to include pictures previously uploaded to a computer or ftp server via Ethernet or an optional WT 6 wireless transmitter Select M Unsent images to include pictures that have yet to be uploaded Select both options to include both sent and unsent pictures ...

Page 481: ...otected or hidden however cannot be deleted Using the Delete Button Press the O Q button to delete the current picture 1 Select the desired picture with the multi selector and press the O Q button A confirmation dialog will be displayed To exit without deleting the picture press K 2 Press the O Q button again The picture will be deleted Deleting Pictures ...

Page 482: ... the O Q button is pressed was recorded with two memory cards inserted and an option other than Overflow selected for Role played by card in Slot 2 in the photo shooting menu you will be given the option of deleting both copies or only the copy on the card in the current slot 0 311 ...

Page 483: ...or deletion Option Description Q Selected images Delete selected pictures d Candidates for deletion Delete pictures rated d candidate for deletion i Images shot on selected dates Delete all pictures taken on selected dates 0 434 R All images Delete all pictures from a selected memory card Only pictures in the folder currently selected for Playback folder in the playback menu are affected ...

Page 484: ...are marked with O icons Selected pictures can be deselected by pressing the center of the multi selector again Repeat until all the desired pictures are selected To view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the X button 2 Delete the pictures Press J a confirmation dialog will be displayed Highlight Yes and press J to delete the selected pictures ...

Page 485: ... Pictures you do not currently wish to delete can be deselected by highlighting them and pressing the center of the multi selector To view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the X button 2 Delete the pictures Press J a confirmation dialog will be displayed Highlight Yes and press J to delete the selected pictures ...

Page 486: ...press 2 to select selected dates are marked with M icons Selected dates can be deselected by pressing 2 again Repeat until you have selected all the desired dates 2 Delete the pictures Press J a confirmation dialog will be displayed Highlight Yes and press J to delete all the pictures taken on the selected dates ...

Page 487: ...ontaining the memory card from which the pictures will be deleted and press J 2 Delete the pictures Highlight Yes and press J to delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for Playback folder in the playback menu Note that depending on the number of images some time may be required for deletion ...

Page 488: ...ack To add voice memos to selected pictures during playback 1 Select the photograph Only one voice memo can be recorded per picture additional voice memos cannot be recorded for pictures already marked with a h icon The existing voice memo must be deleted before another can be recorded 0 444 Recording Voice Memos ...

Page 489: ... 3 Release the Fn3 C button Recording will end A During Recording During recording a flashing C icon and a countdown timer showing the recording time remaining will be displayed in the rear control panel A The i Menu Recording can also be initiated by highlighting Record voice memo in the playback i menu and pressing J To end recording press the center of the multi selector ...

Page 490: ...ording can be initiated automatically or manually Automatic Recording If On Auto and manual is selected for Voice memo options Voice memo in the setup menu recording will begin automatically when you lift your finger from the shutter release button after shooting The recording time can be selected using On Auto and manual ...

Page 491: ...ge Review Automatic recording is not available when On is selected for Image review in the playback menu D Automatic Recording Voice memos will not be recorded automatically during live view focus shift or time lapse movie recording ...

Page 492: ... select Manual only for Voice memo options Voice memo in the setup menu To record a voice memo hold the Fn3 C button recording will continue while the button is pressed A Voice Memo An icon is displayed in the rear control panel when On Auto and manual or Manual only is selected for Voice memo On Auto and manual Manual only ...

Page 493: ... controls may end recording During interval timer photography recording ends about two seconds before the next shot is taken recording also ends when the camera is turned off A Storage Location Voice memos for pictures taken with two memory cards inserted and Backup RAW Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 or JPEG Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 selected for Role played by card in Slot 2 in the photo shooting menu are recorded ...

Page 494: ...r the image DSC_0002 JPG would have the file name DSC_0002 WAV Voice memo file names can be viewed on a computer Voice memos for photos recorded with Adobe RGB selected for Color space in the photo shooting menu have names of the form _DSCnnnn WAV Voice memos for photos recorded with a prefix other than DSC selected for File naming in the photo shooting menu will be recorded with the selected pref...

Page 495: ...enu Voice memos can also be played by highlighting Play voice memo in the playback i menu and pressing J A Interrupting Playback Pressing the shutter release button or operating other camera controls may end playback Playback ends automatically when another image is selected or the camera is turned off Playing Voice Memos ...

Page 496: ... Voice memo only and press O Q To exit without deleting either the photo or the voice memo press K If the photo was shot with two memory cards inserted and Backup RAW Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 or JPEG Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 selected for Role played by card in Slot 2 highlight either Selected image or Same images on w and x and press O Q to display a confirmation dialog To delete only the voice memo from the ...

Page 497: ...mputer to upload pictures from the camera The camera can be connected via Wi Fi or using a USB cable Connecting via USB Connect the camera using the supplied USB cable You can then use Nikon ViewNX i software to copy pictures to the computer for viewing and editing Connecting to Computers ...

Page 498: ...ite below and follow the on screen instructions to complete installation https downloadcenter nikonimglib com Note that you may be unable to download pictures from the camera using earlier versions of ViewNX i D Capture NX D Use Nikon s Capture NX D software to fine tune photos or to change settings for NEF RAW pictures and save them in other formats Capture NX D is available for download from htt...

Page 499: ...r turning the camera off and ensuring that a memory card is inserted connect the supplied USB cable as shown 2 Turn the camera on The Nikon Transfer 2 component of ViewNX i will start If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a program select Nikon Transfer 2 If Nikon Transfer 2 does not start automatically launch ViewNX i and click the Import icon ...

Page 500: ...448 Connecting to Computers 3 Click Start Transfer Pictures on the memory card will be copied to the computer 4 Turn the camera off Disconnect the USB cable when transfer is complete ...

Page 501: ...nsfer 2 does not start automatically confirm that the camera is connected and then launch Image Capture an application that comes with macOS and select Nikon Transfer 2 as the application that opens when the camera is detected D Transferring Movies Do not attempt to transfer movies from the memory card while it is inserted in a camera of a different make or model Doing so could result in the movie...

Page 502: ...ert the connectors at an angle Be sure also to keep the connectors straight when disconnecting the cable Turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting interface cables To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted be sure the camera battery is fully charged D USB Hubs Connect the camera directly to the computer do not connect the cable via a USB hub or keyboard ...

Page 503: ...e information see Built in Wireless 0 457 and Ethernet WT 6 0 514 Built in Wi Fi Connect using the Connect to PC built in Wi Fi item in the camera setup menu You can connect either directly or via a wireless router Connection via a wireless router Direct wireless connection ...

Page 504: ...amera Control Pro 2 available separately to control the camera and save pictures to the computer The connection is more reliable than that offered by the camera s built in Wi Fi Ethernet Connections With a third party Ethernet cable the camera can connect to computers or ftp servers using Wired LAN WT Use Camera Control Pro 2 available separately to control the camera and save pictures to the comp...

Page 505: ...0 or a third party type C HDMI cable These items must be purchased separately Always turn the camera off before connecting or disconnecting an HDMI cable Choose a cable with a connector that matches the connector on the HDMI device Connecting to HDMI Devices 1 2 1 HDMI connector for connection to camera 2 HDMI connector for connection to external device ...

Page 506: ...pBridge app the device can be used to control playback remotely while the camera is connected to a TV See the SnapBridge app online help for details Recorders The camera can record video directly to connected HDMI recorders Use the HDMI item in the setup menu to adjust settings for HDMI output Some recorders will start and stop recording in response to camera controls Output Resolution Choose the ...

Page 507: ...6 to 235 Choose this option if you notice a loss of detail in shadows Full range For devices with an RGB video signal input range of 0 to 255 Choose this option if you notice that shadows are washed out or too bright Live view on screen display Choose whether the HDMI device displays shooting information during live view photography Note that shooting information will not be displayed at a frame s...

Page 508: ... provided with the recorder The camera display will turn off automatically when the time selected for Custom Setting c2 Standby timer expires ending HDMI output When recording movies to an external device select Custom Setting c2 Standby timer and choose No limit or a time longer than the anticipated recording time An icon will be displayed in the camera monitor when On is selected A is displayed ...

Page 509: ...onnect to a wireless local area network LAN using the camera s built in Wi Fi or Bluetooth and how to use network features once connected For information on connecting to Ethernet networks or connecting using an optional WT 6 wireless transmitter see Ethernet WT 6 0 514 Camera and Network System Chart FTP FTP ...

Page 510: ...SnapBridge app for wireless connections between the camera and your smartphone or tablet smart device The SnapBridge app is available from the Apple App Store and on Google Play Visit the Nikon website for the latest SnapBridge news Connecting to Smart Devices ...

Page 511: ...or details see the SnapBridge app online help https nikonimglib com snbr onlinehelp en index html Downloading Pictures from the Camera Download existing pictures to your smart device You also have the option of downloading pictures automatically as they are taken Remote Photography Control the camera and take pictures from the smart device ...

Page 512: ... your smart device You can connect via either Wi Fi 0 461 or Bluetooth 0 469 Connecting using the SnapBridge app allows you to set the camera clock and update location data using information provided by the smart device Connecting using Bluetooth allows pictures to be uploaded automatically as they are taken Wi Fi Bluetooth ...

Page 513: ...the device Ensure that the batteries in the camera and smart device are fully charged to prevent the devices turning off unexpectedly Check that there is space available on the camera memory card 1 Smart device Launch the SnapBridge app If this is the first time you have launched the app tap Skip If you have launched the app before you can instead proceed to Step 2 ...

Page 514: ...462 Connecting to Smart Devices 2 Open the tab and tap Wi Fi mode 3 Smart device Tap Wi Fi connection when prompted ...

Page 515: ... when prompted to do so by the smart device Do not tap Next until you have completed the next step 5 Camera Select Connect to smart device Wi Fi connection in the setup menu then highlight Establish Wi Fi connection and press J The camera SSID and password will be displayed ...

Page 516: ...464 Connecting to Smart Devices 6 Smart device Return to the smart device and tap Next ...

Page 517: ...uctions displayed by the smart device tap Open the device settings app Android devices Wi Fi settings will be displayed iOS devices The Settings app will launch Tap Settings to open Settings then scroll up and tap Wi Fi which you ll find near the top of the settings list ...

Page 518: ...466 Connecting to Smart Devices 8 Smart device Enter the SSID and password displayed by the camera in Step 5 The prompt displayed by the device varies with model and operating system Android device ...

Page 519: ...467 Connecting to Smart Devices iOS device You will not be required to enter the password when next you connect to the camera ...

Page 520: ...SnapBridge app Once a Wi Fi connection is established Wi Fi mode options will be displayed See online help for information on using the SnapBridge app D Terminating Wi Fi Mode To end the Wi Fi connection tap When the icon changes to tap and select Exit Wi Fi mode ...

Page 521: ...below The procedure for iOS differs slightly from that for Android devices D Before Pairing Enable Bluetooth on the smart device For details see the documentation provided with the device Ensure that the batteries in the camera and smart device are fully charged to prevent the devices turning off unexpectedly Check that there is space available on the camera memory card ...

Page 522: ... Pairing For information on connecting to iOS devices see Connecting to an iOS Device for the First Time Pairing 0 476 1 Camera Select Connect to smart device Pairing Bluetooth in the setup menu then highlight Start pairing and press J The camera name will be displayed in the monitor ...

Page 523: ...ing to Smart Devices 2 Android device Launch the SnapBridge app If this is the first time you have launched the app tap Connect to camera If you have launched the app before open the tab and tap Connect to camera ...

Page 524: ...o Smart Devices 3 Android device Tap the camera name 4 Camera Android device Confirm that the camera and Android device display the same authentication code The authentication code is shown circled in the illustrations ...

Page 525: ... button in the illustration is labeled PAIR but the label may differ depending on the type of device and version of Android you are using D Pairing Error If you wait too long between pressing the button on the camera and tapping the button on the Android device the device will display an error message and pairing will fail Tap OK and return to Step 2 ...

Page 526: ... 6 Camera Android device Follow the on screen instructions to complete pairing Camera The camera will display the message shown in the illustration when pairing is complete Android device Pairing is complete Tap OK to exit to the tab ...

Page 527: ...ompted to select auto link auto upload and auto clock and location synchronization options This prompt will not be displayed a second time Auto link settings can however be accessed at any time using Auto link in the tab D Disabling Bluetooth To disable Bluetooth select Disable for Connect to smart device Pairing Bluetooth Bluetooth connection in the camera setup menu ...

Page 528: ...ng For information on connecting to Android devices see Connecting to an Android Device for the First Time Pairing 0 470 1 Camera Select Connect to smart device Pairing Bluetooth in the setup menu then highlight Start pairing and press J The camera name will be displayed in the monitor ...

Page 529: ...cting to Smart Devices 2 iOS device Launch the SnapBridge app If this is the first time you have launched the app tap Connect to camera If you have launched the app before open the tab and tap Connect to camera ...

Page 530: ...478 Connecting to Smart Devices 3 iOS device Tap the camera name 4 iOS device Read the pairing instructions Pairing instructions will be displayed Read the instructions carefully and tap Understood ...

Page 531: ...479 Connecting to Smart Devices 5 iOS device Tap the camera name again The iOS device prompt you to select an accessory Tap the camera name again ...

Page 532: ...ces 6 Camera iOS device Initiate pairing Camera Press J iOS device Tap the button indicated in the illustration The button in the illustration is labeled Pair but the label may differ depending on the version of iOS you are using ...

Page 533: ...tapping the button on the iOS device the device will display an error message and pairing will fail Dismiss the SnapBridge app and check that it is not running in the background then open the iOS Settings app and request iOS to forget the camera before returning to Step 1 Forget the camera using the iOS Settings app ...

Page 534: ...ices 7 Camera iOS device Follow the on screen instructions to complete pairing Camera The camera will display the message shown in the illustration when pairing is complete iOS device Pairing is complete Tap OK to exit to the tab ...

Page 535: ...pted to select auto link auto upload and auto clock and location synchronization options This prompt will not be displayed a second time Auto link settings can however be accessed at any time using Auto link in the tab D Disabling Bluetooth To disable Bluetooth select Disable for Connect to smart device Pairing Bluetooth Bluetooth connection in the camera setup menu ...

Page 536: ... that has already been paired with the camera is quick and easy 1 Camera In the setup menu select Connect to smart device Pairing Bluetooth Bluetooth connection then highlight Enable and press J 2 Smart device Launch the SnapBridge app A Bluetooth connection will be established automatically ...

Page 537: ...ll need to pair the camera with the computer using Nikon s Wireless Transmitter Utility software Once the devices are paired you will be able to connect to the computer from the camera The Wireless Transmitter Utility is available for download from the Nikon Download Center Be sure to download the latest version after reading the release notes and system requirements https downloadcenter nikonimgl...

Page 538: ...r Direct Wireless Connection Access Point Mode The camera and computer connect via direct wireless link The camera acts as a wireless LAN access point eliminating the need for wireless LAN infrastructure with its complicated settings The computer cannot connect to the Internet while connected to the camera To create a new host profile select Direct connection to PC in the connection wizard ...

Page 539: ...er can still connect to the Internet while connected to the camera To create a new network profile select Search for Wi Fi network in the connection wizard D Infrastructure Mode This guide assumes you are connecting via an existing wireless network Connection to computers beyond the local area network is not supported You can connect only to computers on the same network ...

Page 540: ...s Point Mode 1 Select Connect to PC built in Wi Fi in the camera setup menu then highlight Network settings and press 2 2 Highlight Create profile and press J 3 Highlight Direct connection to PC and press J The camera SSID and encryption key will be displayed ...

Page 541: ...r the network security key enter the encryption key displayed by the camera in Step 3 The computer will initiate a connection to the camera macOS Click the wireless LAN icon in the menu bar Select the SSID displayed by the camera in Step 3 When prompted to enter the network security key enter the encryption key displayed by the camera in Step 3 The computer will initiate a connection to the camera...

Page 542: ...puters via Wi Fi 5 Start pairing When prompted launch the Wireless Transmitter Utility on the computer 6 Select the camera in the Wireless Transmitter Utility Select the name displayed by the camera in Step 5 and click Next ...

Page 543: ...In the Wireless Transmitter Utility enter the authentication code displayed by the camera The camera will display an authentication code Enter the authentication code in the dialog displayed by the Wireless Transmitter Utility and click Next ...

Page 544: ...ting that pairing is complete press J In the Wireless Transmitter Utility click Next you will be prompted to choose a destination folder For more information see online help for the Wireless Transmitter Utility A wireless connection will be established between the camera and computer when pairing is complete ...

Page 545: ...he camera Connect to PC built in Wi Fi menu If the camera SSID is not displayed in green connect to the camera via the wireless network list on your computer A wireless connection has now been established between the camera and the computer Pictures taken with the camera can be uploaded to the computer as described in Uploading Pictures 0 503 ...

Page 546: ... Connect to PC built in Wi Fi in the camera setup menu then highlight Network settings and press 2 2 Highlight Create profile and press J 3 Highlight Search for Wi Fi network and press J The camera will search for networks currently active in the vicinity and list them by name SSID ...

Page 547: ... options After connecting proceed to Step 6 Option Description Push button WPS For routers that support push button WPS Press the WPS button on the router and then press the camera J button to connect PIN entry WPS The camera will display a PIN To connect use a computer to enter the PIN on the router For more information see the documentation provided with the router ...

Page 548: ...pted proceed to Step 6 If the desired network is not displayed press X to search again D Hidden SSIDs Networks with hidden SSIDs are indicated by blank entries in the network list To connect to a network with a hidden SSID highlight a blank entry and press J Next press the center of the multi selector you will then be prompted to provide an SSID Enter the network name and press J Press J again the...

Page 549: ...e multi selector and enter the encryption key for the wireless router For more information see the documentation for the wireless router Press J when entry is complete Press J again to initiate the connection A message will be displayed for a few seconds when the connection is established ...

Page 550: ... once an IP address has been assigned Enter manually Enter the IP address and sub net mask manually Press the center of the multi selector to display a dialog where you can manually enter an IP address Rotate the main command dial to highlight segments Press 4 or 2 to change the highlighted segment and press the center of the multi selector when entry is complete Next press J a configuration compl...

Page 551: ...puters via Wi Fi 7 Start pairing When prompted launch the Wireless Transmitter Utility on the computer 8 Select the camera in the Wireless Transmitter Utility Select the name displayed by the camera in Step 7 and click Next ...

Page 552: ...In the Wireless Transmitter Utility enter the authentication code displayed by the camera The camera will display an authentication code Enter the authentication code in the dialog displayed by the Wireless Transmitter Utility and click Next ...

Page 553: ...ting that pairing is complete press J In the Wireless Transmitter Utility click Next you will be prompted to choose a destination folder For more information see online help for the Wireless Transmitter Utility A wireless connection will be established between the camera and computer when pairing is complete ...

Page 554: ...he camera Connect to PC built in Wi Fi menu If the camera SSID is not displayed in green connect to the camera via the wireless network list on your computer A wireless connection has now been established between the camera and the computer Pictures taken with the camera can be uploaded to the computer as described in Uploading Pictures 0 503 ...

Page 555: ... user name Pictures Wireless Transmitter Utility macOS Users user name Pictures Wireless Transmitter Utility The destination folder can be selected using the Wireless Transmitter Utility For more information see the utility s online help D Access Point Mode Computers cannot access the Internet while connected to the camera in access point mode To access the Internet terminate the connection to the...

Page 556: ...ack 2 Select a picture and press the i button 3 Highlight Select to send to computer and press J A white send priority upload icon will appear on the picture If the camera is currently connected to a network upload will begin immediately Otherwise upload will begin when a connection is established Repeat Steps 2 3 to upload additional pictures ...

Page 557: ...uters via Wi Fi D Deselecting Pictures Repeat Steps 2 3 to remove transfer marking from selected images To remove transfer marking from all pictures select Connect to PC built in Wi Fi Options Deselect all in the setup menu ...

Page 558: ... to PC built in Wi Fi Options Auto send in the setup menu Upload begins only after the photo has been recorded to the memory card Be sure a memory card is inserted in the camera Movies and photographs taken during filming are not uploaded automatically when recording is complete They must instead be uploaded from the playback display ...

Page 559: ...hite Send priority upload The picture has been manually selected for upload Pictures marked with this icon will be uploaded before pictures marked W send W white Send The picture has been selected for automatic upload but upload has not yet begun X green Sending Upload in progress Y blue Sent Upload complete ...

Page 560: ...he host The host SSID is displayed in green when a connection is established While files are being transferred the status display shows Now sending preceded by the name of the file being sent Errors are also displayed here 2 Pictures time remaining The number of pictures remaining and the time needed to send them The time remaining is an estimate only 3 Signal strength Wireless signal strength ...

Page 561: ...s via Wi Fi D Loss of Signal Wireless transmission may be interrupted if the signal is lost Upload of pictures with send marking can be resumed by turning the camera off and then on again once the signal has been re established ...

Page 562: ...by turning the camera off selecting Disable for Connect to PC built in Wi Fi Wi Fi connection in the setup menu or connecting to a smart device via Wi Fi or Bluetooth D Access Point Mode An error will occur if the computer s wireless connection is disabled before the camera s Disable camera Wi Fi first ...

Page 563: ... Fi Wi Fi connection in the setup menu D Access Point Mode Enable camera Wi Fi before connecting D Multiple Network Profiles If the camera has profiles for more than one network it will reconnect to the last network used Other networks can be selected using the Connect to PC built in Wi Fi Network settings option in the setup menu ...

Page 564: ...tility s online help Troubleshooting Built in Wi Fi Problem Solution The camera displays a TCP IP error Connection settings require adjustment Check settings for the host computer or wireless router and adjust camera settings appropriately 0 933 The camera displays a no memory card error The memory card is inserted incorrectly or not at all Confirm that the memory card is correctly inserted 0 38 U...

Page 565: ...amera is connected to a computer in infrastructure mode check that the router is set to a channel between 1 and 8 0 933 Connect to smart device and Connect to PC built in Wi Fi are grayed out and cannot be selected These options are not available when the camera is connected via Ethernet or using a WT 6 Select Disable for Wired LAN WT Wired LAN WT functions in the setup menu 0 937 Problem Solution...

Page 566: ... networks via a third party Ethernet cable inserted in the camera s Ethernet connector or an optional WT 6 wireless transmitter attached via the peripheral connector The connection is more reliable than that offered by the camera s built in Wi Fi Ethernet Connections and the WT 6 FTP FTP ...

Page 567: ...mputer using Nikon s Wireless Transmitter Utility software Once the devices are paired you will be able to connect to the computer from the camera The Wireless Transmitter Utility is available for download from the Nikon Download Center Be sure to download the latest version after reading the release notes and system requirements https downloadcenter nikonimglib com ...

Page 568: ...nd the WT 6 can be used for the following tasks Upload to FTP Servers or Computers Not only can you copy pictures to computers you can also upload them to ftp servers 0 585 Pictures can be uploaded as they are taken What Ethernet and the WT 6 Can Do for You ...

Page 569: ...le separately on a network computer gives you complete control over camera settings and lets you take pictures remotely and save them directly to the computer hard disk 0 595 Browser Based Remote Photography HTTP Server Mode Use a web browser to control the camera from network computers and smart devices 0 601 No dedicated app is required ...

Page 570: ...phy Synchronized Release A master camera can be used to control the shutters on one or more remote cameras 0 628 The cameras must have WT 6 wireless transmitters attached Clock Synchronization Synchronize Date and Time Synchronize the clocks on two cameras via a network 0 633 ...

Page 571: ... servers running third party software are not supported A HTTP Sever Mode Internet connections are not supported in http server mode A Routers Connection to computers on other networks via a router is not supported You can connect only to computers on the same network Connection to ftp servers via a router is however supported A Firewall Settings TCP ports 21 and 32768 through 61000 are used for F...

Page 572: ...t the Ethernet cable into the camera s Ethernet connector Do not use force or insert the connectors at an angle Connect the other end of the cable to the computer or router Select Wired LAN for Wired LAN WT Choose hardware in the setup menu Connecting an Ethernet Cable or WT 6 ...

Page 573: ...nnectors on the WT 6 into the camera s peripheral connector w Rotate the locking wheel to lock the WT 6 in place e Select Wireless LAN for Wired LAN WT Choose hardware in the setup menu D Choosing a Power Source To prevent the camera powering off unexpectedly during setup or data transfer use a fully charged battery or an optional AC adapter ...

Page 574: ...o create a network profile Before creating a network profile select Enable for Wired LAN WT Wired LAN WT functions in the setup menu Select Wired LAN for Wired LAN WT Choose hardware in the setup menu For information on creating network profiles for use when connecting to wireless LANs using the WT 6 see Creating Network Profiles WT 6 0 544 Creating a Network Profile Ethernet ...

Page 575: ...light Network settings and press 2 The camera will display a list of network profiles 2 Highlight Create profile and press 2 You will be prompted to choose between the connection wizard and manual setup Note that Create profile will not be available if the profile list already contains nine profiles Before creating a new profile you must first delete an existing profile using the O Q button ...

Page 576: ...anual Configuration Choose Configure manually to configure FTP upload and HTTP server settings manually Choose Connection wizard to create network profiles for use with Image transfer and Camera control 4 Choose a connection type Highlight Image transfer or Camera control and press J to display the default profile name ...

Page 577: ...he new network profile To proceed to IP address selection without renaming the profile press J The profile name will appear in the Wired LAN WT Network settings list in the camera setup menu To rename the profile press the center of the multi selector ...

Page 578: ...layed once an IP address has been assigned Enter manually Enter the IP address and sub net mask manually Press the center of the multi selector to display a dialog where you can manually enter an IP address Rotate the main command dial to highlight segments Press 4 or 2 to change the highlighted segment and press the center of the multi selector to save changes Next press J a configuration complet...

Page 579: ... Profile Ethernet 7 Start pairing When prompted launch the Wireless Transmitter Utility on the computer 8 Select the camera in the Wireless Transmitter Utility Select the name displayed by the camera in Step 7 and click Next ...

Page 580: ... In the Wireless Transmitter Utility enter the authentication code displayed by the camera The camera will display an authentication code Enter the authentication code in the dialog displayed by the Wireless Transmitter Utility and click Next ...

Page 581: ...ing process When the camera displays a message stating that pairing is complete press J In the Wireless Transmitter Utility click Next you will be prompted to choose a destination folder For more information see online help for the Wireless Transmitter Utility ...

Page 582: ...ictures taken with the camera can be uploaded to the computer as described in Upload to Computers and FTP Servers 0 585 For information on controlling the camera from a computer using Camera Control Pro 2 see Camera Control 0 595 Option Description Connect and exit wizard Save the new network profile and connect to the server Exit wizard Save the new network profile and exit ...

Page 583: ...k settings and press 2 The camera will display a list of network profiles 2 Highlight Create profile and press 2 You will be prompted to choose between the connection wizard and manual setup Note that Create profile will not be available if the profile list already contains nine profiles Before creating a new profile you must first delete an existing profile using the O Q button ...

Page 584: ...532 Creating a Network Profile Ethernet 3 Highlight Connection wizard and press 2 The connection wizard will start D Manual Configuration Choose Configure manually to adjust settings manually ...

Page 585: ... J to display the default profile name 5 Rename the new network profile To proceed to IP address selection without renaming the profile press J The profile name will appear in the Wired LAN WT Network settings list in the camera setup menu To rename the profile press the center of the multi selector ...

Page 586: ...layed once an IP address has been assigned Enter manually Enter the IP address and sub net mask manually Press the center of the multi selector to display a dialog where you can manually enter an IP address Rotate the main command dial to highlight segments Press 4 or 2 to change the highlighted segment and press the center of the multi selector to save changes Next press J a configuration complet...

Page 587: ...ction settings for the camera and computer are now complete You can now access and control the camera from a computer or smart device as described in HTTP Server 0 601 Option Description Connect and exit wizard Save the new network profile and connect to the server Exit wizard Save the new network profile and exit ...

Page 588: ...k settings and press 2 The camera will display a list of network profiles 2 Highlight Create profile and press 2 You will be prompted to choose between the connection wizard and manual setup Note that Create profile will not be available if the profile list already contains nine profiles Before creating a new profile you must first delete an existing profile using the O Q button ...

Page 589: ...537 Creating a Network Profile Ethernet 3 Highlight Connection wizard and press 2 The connection wizard will start D Manual Configuration Choose Configure manually to adjust settings manually ...

Page 590: ...be displayed when you press J 5 Rename the new network profile To proceed to IP address selection without renaming the profile press J The profile name will appear in the Wired LAN WT Network settings list in the camera setup menu To rename the profile press the center of the multi selector ...

Page 591: ...layed once an IP address has been assigned Enter manually Enter the IP address and sub net mask manually Press the center of the multi selector to display a dialog where you can manually enter an IP address Rotate the main command dial to highlight segments Press 4 or 2 to change the highlighted segment and press the center of the multi selector to save changes Next press J a configuration complet...

Page 592: ... Highlight FTP or SFTP secure ftp and press J 8 Enter the IP address Press the center of the multi selector and enter the server URL or IP address Press J when entry is complete Press J again to connect to the ftp server You will be prompted to choose a login method ...

Page 593: ...l is not configured to allow access to these ports Option Description Anonymous login Select this option if the server does not require a user ID or password This option can only be used with servers that are configured for anonymous login If login is successful the camera will prompt you to choose a destination Enter user ID Enter a user ID and password Press J to log in when entry is complete If...

Page 594: ...tion to select the server s home folder as the destination for pictures uploaded from the camera A setup complete dialog will be displayed if the operation is successful Enter folder name Enter the destination folder name manually The folder must already exist on the server Enter the folder name and path when prompted and press J to display the setup complete dialog ...

Page 595: ...ss J Connection settings for the camera and ftp server are now complete You can now upload pictures as described in Upload to Computers and FTP Servers 0 585 Option Description Connect and exit wizard Save the new network profile and connect to the server Exit wizard Save the new network profile and exit ...

Page 596: ...need to create a network profile Before creating a network profile select Enable for Wired LAN WT Wired LAN WT functions in the setup menu Select Wireless LAN for Wired LAN WT Choose hardware in the setup menu For information on creating network profiles for use when connecting via Ethernet see Creating Network Profiles Ethernet 0 522 Creating Network Profiles WT 6 ...

Page 597: ... camera Push button WPS If the wireless router is equipped with a WPS button you can connect the camera to the router just by pressing the button PIN entry WPS Connect by using the computer to enter a PIN displayed on the camera into a wireless router Direct access point Connect the camera to the computer or ftp server via a direct wireless link The camera acts as a wireless LAN access point letti...

Page 598: ...ht Network settings and press 2 The camera will display a list of network profiles 2 Highlight Create profile and press 2 You will be prompted to choose between the connection wizard and manual setup Note that Create profile will not be available if the profile list already contains nine profiles Before creating a new profile you must first delete an existing profile using the O Q button ...

Page 599: ...al Configuration Choose Configure manually to configure FTP upload and HTTP server settings manually Choose Connection wizard to create network profiles for use with Image transfer and Camera control 4 Choose a connection type Highlight Image transfer or Camera control and press J to display the default profile name ...

Page 600: ...ppear in the Wired LAN WT Network settings list in the camera setup menu To rename the profile press the center of the multi selector 6 Choose a connection option Highlight one of the following options and press J Search for wireless network Proceed to Step 7 Push button WPS Proceed to Step 9 PIN entry WPS Proceed to Step 10 Direct access point Proceed to Step 11 ...

Page 601: ... be prompted to enter the encryption key If the network is not encrypted proceed to Step 12 If the desired network is not displayed press X to search again D Hidden SSIDs Networks with hidden SSIDs are indicated by blank entries in the network list To connect to a network with a hidden SSID highlight a blank entry and press J Next press the center of the multi selector the camera will prompt you t...

Page 602: ...ption key for the wireless router For more information see the documentation for the wireless router Press J when entry is complete Press J again to initiate the connection A message will be displayed for a few seconds when the connection is established You will next be prompted to supply an IP address Proceed to Step 12 ...

Page 603: ...h button WPS displays a WPS dialog Press the WPS button on the router and then press the camera J button to connect For more information see the documentation provided with the router A confirmation dialog will be displayed when a connection is established Press J and proceed to Step 12 ...

Page 604: ... router Selecting PIN entry WPS displays a PIN Using a computer enter the PIN on the router For more information see the documentation provided with the router A confirmation dialog will be displayed when a connection is established Press J and proceed to Step 12 ...

Page 605: ... the camera will display an SSID and encryption key Windows Click the wireless LAN icon in the taskbar Select the camera SSID Enter the camera encryption key when prompted The computer will initiate a connection to the camera A pairing dialog will be displayed when a connection is established Proceed to Step 13 ...

Page 606: ... the wireless LAN icon in the menu bar Select the camera SSID Enter the camera encryption key when prompted The computer will initiate a connection to the camera A pairing dialog will be displayed when a connection is established Proceed to Step 13 ...

Page 607: ...once an IP address has been assigned Enter manually Enter the IP address and sub net mask manually Press the center of the multi selector to display a dialog where you can manually enter an IP address Rotate the main command dial to highlight segments Press 4 or 2 to change the highlighted segment and press the center of the multi selector when entry is complete Next press J a configuration comple...

Page 608: ... Profiles WT 6 13Start pairing When prompted launch the Wireless Transmitter Utility on the computer 14Select the camera in the Wireless Transmitter Utility Select the name displayed by the camera in Step 13 and click Next ...

Page 609: ...n the Wireless Transmitter Utility enter the authentication code displayed by the camera The camera will display an authentication code Enter the authentication code in the dialog displayed by the Wireless Transmitter Utility and click Next ...

Page 610: ...g process When the camera displays a message stating that pairing is complete press J In the Wireless Transmitter Utility click Next you will be prompted to choose a destination folder For more information see online help for the Wireless Transmitter Utility ...

Page 611: ...mputer Pictures taken with the camera can be uploaded to the computer as described in Upload to Computers and FTP Servers 0 585 For information on controlling the camera from a computer using Camera Control Pro 2 see Camera Control 0 595 Option Description Connect and exit wizard Save the new network profile and connect to the host Exit wizard Save the new network profile and exit ...

Page 612: ...settings and press 2 The camera will display a list of network profiles 2 Highlight Create profile and press 2 You will be prompted to choose between the connection wizard and manual setup Note that Create profile will not be available if the profile list already contains nine profiles Before creating a new profile you must first delete an existing profile using the O Q button ...

Page 613: ...light Connection wizard and press 2 The connection wizard will start D Manual Configuration Choose Configure manually to adjust settings manually 4 Choose a connection type Highlight HTTP server and press J to display the default profile name ...

Page 614: ...ppear in the Wired LAN WT Network settings list in the camera setup menu To rename the profile press the center of the multi selector 6 Choose a connection option Highlight one of the following options and press J Search for wireless network Proceed to Step 7 Push button WPS Proceed to Step 9 PIN entry WPS Proceed to Step 10 Direct access point Proceed to Step 11 ...

Page 615: ... be prompted to enter the encryption key If the network is not encrypted proceed to Step 12 If the desired network is not displayed press X to search again D Hidden SSIDs Networks with hidden SSIDs are indicated by blank entries in the network list To connect to a network with a hidden SSID highlight a blank entry and press J Next press the center of the multi selector the camera will prompt you t...

Page 616: ...ption key for the wireless router For more information see the documentation for the wireless router Press J when entry is complete Press J again to initiate the connection A message will be displayed for a few seconds when the connection is established You will next be prompted to supply an IP address Proceed to Step 12 ...

Page 617: ...h button WPS displays a WPS dialog Press the WPS button on the router and then press the camera J button to connect For more information see the documentation provided with the router A confirmation dialog will be displayed when a connection is established Press J and proceed to Step 12 ...

Page 618: ... router Selecting PIN entry WPS displays a PIN Using a computer enter the PIN on the router For more information see the documentation provided with the router A confirmation dialog will be displayed when a connection is established Press J and proceed to Step 12 ...

Page 619: ... the camera will display an SSID and encryption key Windows Click the wireless LAN icon in the taskbar Select the camera SSID Enter the camera encryption key when prompted The computer will initiate a connection to the camera A pairing dialog will be displayed when a connection is established Proceed to Step 13 ...

Page 620: ... the wireless LAN icon in the menu bar Select the camera SSID Enter the camera encryption key when prompted The computer will initiate a connection to the camera A pairing dialog will be displayed when a connection is established Proceed to Step 13 ...

Page 621: ...once an IP address has been assigned Enter manually Enter the IP address and sub net mask manually Press the center of the multi selector to display a dialog where you can manually enter an IP address Rotate the main command dial to highlight segments Press 4 or 2 to change the highlighted segment and press the center of the multi selector when entry is complete Next press J a configuration comple...

Page 622: ... profiles have now been created on both the camera and the computer You can now access and control the camera from a computer or smart device as described in HTTP Server 0 601 Option Description Connect and exit wizard Save the new network profile and connect to the host Exit wizard Save the new network profile and exit ...

Page 623: ...ettings and press 2 The camera will display a list of network profiles 2 Highlight Create profile and press 2 You will be prompted to choose between the connection wizard and manual setup Note that Create profile will not be available if the profile list already contains nine profiles Before creating a new profile you must first delete an existing profile using the O Q button ...

Page 624: ... 6 3 Highlight Connection wizard and press 2 The connection wizard will start D Manual Configuration Choose Configure manually to adjust settings manually 4 Select FTP upload The default profile name will be displayed when you press J ...

Page 625: ...ppear in the Wired LAN WT Network settings list in the camera setup menu To rename the profile press the center of the multi selector 6 Choose a connection option Highlight one of the following options and press J Search for wireless network Proceed to Step 7 Push button WPS Proceed to Step 9 PIN entry WPS Proceed to Step 10 Direct access point Proceed to Step 11 ...

Page 626: ... be prompted to enter the encryption key If the network is not encrypted proceed to Step 12 If the desired network is not displayed press X to search again D Hidden SSIDs Networks with hidden SSIDs are indicated by blank entries in the network list To connect to a network with a hidden SSID highlight a blank entry and press J Next press the center of the multi selector the camera will prompt you t...

Page 627: ...ption key for the wireless router For more information see the documentation for the wireless router Press J when entry is complete Press J again to initiate the connection A message will be displayed for a few seconds when the connection is established You will next be prompted to supply an IP address Proceed to Step 12 ...

Page 628: ...h button WPS displays a WPS dialog Press the WPS button on the router and then press the camera J button to connect For more information see the documentation provided with the router A confirmation dialog will be displayed when a connection is established Press J and proceed to Step 12 ...

Page 629: ... router Selecting PIN entry WPS displays a PIN Using a computer enter the PIN on the router For more information see the documentation provided with the router A confirmation dialog will be displayed when a connection is established Press J and proceed to Step 12 ...

Page 630: ... the camera will display an SSID and encryption key Windows Click the wireless LAN icon in the taskbar Select the camera SSID Enter the camera encryption key when prompted The computer will initiate a connection to the camera A pairing dialog will be displayed when a connection is established Proceed to Step 13 ...

Page 631: ... the wireless LAN icon in the menu bar Select the camera SSID Enter the camera encryption key when prompted The computer will initiate a connection to the camera A pairing dialog will be displayed when a connection is established Proceed to Step 13 ...

Page 632: ...once an IP address has been assigned Enter manually Enter the IP address and sub net mask manually Press the center of the multi selector to display a dialog where you can manually enter an IP address Rotate the main command dial to highlight segments Press 4 or 2 to change the highlighted segment and press the center of the multi selector when entry is complete Next press J a configuration comple...

Page 633: ...rver type Highlight FTP or SFTP secure ftp and press J If you selected Direct access point in Step 6 proceed to Step 15 14Enter the IP address Press the center of the multi selector and enter the server URL or IP address Press J when entry is complete ...

Page 634: ...n Anonymous login Select this option if the server does not require a user ID or password This option can only be used with servers that are configured for anonymous login If login is successful the camera will prompt you to choose a destination Enter user ID Enter a user ID and password Press J to log in when entry is complete If login is successful the camera will prompt you to choose a destinat...

Page 635: ...tion folder Highlight one of the following options and press J Option Description Home folder Select this option to select the server s home folder as the destination for pictures uploaded from the camera A setup complete dialog will be displayed if the operation is successful Enter folder name Enter the destination folder name manually The folder must already exist on the server Enter the folder ...

Page 636: ...network profiles have now been created on both the camera and the ftp server You can now upload pictures as described in Upload to Computers and FTP Servers 0 585 Option Description Connect and exit wizard Save the new network profile and connect to the ftp server Exit wizard Save the new network profile and exit ...

Page 637: ...thernet or using a wireless transmitter 1 Select Enable for Wired LAN WT functions When you press J the camera will connect using the most recently used network profile To connect using a different profile proceed to Step 2 When a connection is established the network name will be shown in green in the Wired LAN WT display If the network name is not displayed in green connect using the computer s ...

Page 638: ...reen in the Wired LAN WT display once a connection is established If the network name is not displayed in green connect using the computer s wireless network settings D Destination Folders The default folders for pictures uploaded in image transfer mode are as follows Windows Users user name Pictures Wireless Transmitter Utility macOS Users user name Pictures Wireless Transmitter Utility The desti...

Page 639: ...lay or highlight a picture you want to upload 3 Hold the J button and press the center of the multi selector A white send priority upload icon will appear on the picture If the camera is currently connected to a network upload will begin immediately Otherwise upload will begin when a connection is established Repeat Steps 2 3 to upload additional pictures ...

Page 640: ...elector again Transfer marking can also be removed using Select to send wired LAN WT in the playback i menu To remove transfer marking from all pictures use Wired LAN WT Options Deselect all in the setup menu A Using the i Menu You can also mark the current picture for upload by choosing Select to send wired LAN WT in the playback i menu ...

Page 641: ...r Wired LAN WT Options Auto send in the setup menu Upload begins only after the photo has been recorded to the memory card Be sure a memory card is inserted in the camera Movies and photographs taken during filming are not uploaded automatically when recording is complete They must instead be uploaded from the playback display ...

Page 642: ...white Send priority upload The picture has been manually selected for upload Pictures marked with this icon will be uploaded before pictures marked W send W white Send The picture has been selected for automatic upload but upload has not yet begun X green Sending Upload in progress Y blue Sent Upload complete ...

Page 643: ...iles are being transferred the status display shows Now sending preceded by the name of the file being sent Errors and error codes are also displayed here 0 636 2 Pictures time remaining The number of pictures remaining and the time needed to send them The time remaining is an estimate only 3 Signal strength Ethernet connections are shown by T When the camera is connected to a wireless network the...

Page 644: ... interrupted if the signal is lost Upload of pictures with send marking can be resumed by turning the camera off and then on again once the signal has been re established D During Upload Do not remove the memory card or disconnect the Ethernet cable or wireless transmitter during upload ...

Page 645: ... in the camera viewfinder T is displayed when the camera is connected via Ethernet U when it is connected to a wireless network The icon will flash if an error occurs Network indicator Status I off Disable selected for Wired LAN WT Wired LAN WT functions in the setup menu Ethernet cable not connected K green Waiting to connect H flashes green Connected H flashes amber Error ...

Page 646: ...ice Memos Voice memos will be included when the associated pictures are transmitted They cannot however be uploaded separately A Interval Timer Photography Choose a long standby time before starting the interval timer as upload will be interrupted if the standby timer expires while interval timer photography is in progress A Turning the Camera Off The camera saves transfer marking when turned off ...

Page 647: ...re saved directly to the computer instead of to the memory card and can consequently be taken even when no memory card inserted in the camera You will still need to insert a memory card when filming movies Note that the camera standby timer will not expire when the camera is in camera control mode Camera Control ...

Page 648: ...ct using the most recently used network profile To connect using a different profile proceed to Step 2 Otherwise proceed to Step 3 When a connection is established the network name will be shown in green in the Wired LAN WT display If the network name is not displayed in green connect using the computer s wireless network settings ...

Page 649: ...e network name will be shown in green in the Wired LAN WT display once a connection is established If the network name is not displayed in green connect using the computer s wireless network settings 3 Launch the copy of Camera Control Pro 2 installed on the host computer 4 Control the camera using Camera Control Pro 2 For information on taking pictures using Camera Control Pro 2 see the Camera Co...

Page 650: ...hen Enable for Wired LAN WT functions When the signal is re established the camera will reconnect to Camera Control Pro 2 and resume upload of any images that have yet to be transferred Note that upload cannot be resumed if you turn the camera off before transfer is complete 1 2 1 Status The status of the connection to the host The profile name is displayed in green Errors and error codes are also...

Page 651: ...ireless Networks Response may slow on wireless networks A Connection Status Connection status is shown by the camera network indicator Network indicator Status I off Disable selected for Wired LAN WT Wired LAN WT functions in the setup menu Ethernet cable not connected K green Waiting to connect H flashes green Connected H flashes amber Error ...

Page 652: ...when the camera is connected via Ethernet U when it is connected to a wireless network The icon will flash if an error occurs A Firewall Settings TCP port 15740 and UDP port 5353 are used for connections to computers File transfer may be blocked if the server firewall is not configured to allow access to these ports ...

Page 653: ...can access the camera at one time Only one however can take photographs or edit text Note that the standby timer will not expire automatically when the camera is in http server mode 1 Select Enable for Wired LAN WT Wired LAN WT functions in the setup menu When you press J the camera will connect using the most recently used network profile To connect using a different profile proceed to Step 2 Oth...

Page 654: ... LAN WT display 2 Choose an http server profile in the Network settings display HTTP server profiles are indicated by an M icon When you press J the camera will exit to the Wired LAN WT display and initiate the connection The network name will be shown in green in the Wired LAN WT display once a connection is established ...

Page 655: ... web browser on the computer or smart device 4 Enter the camera URL http followed by the camera IP address in the browser window address field Enter the URL shown in the camera Wired LAN WT display A login dialog will be displayed ...

Page 656: ...n dialog The default user name is nikon and the default password is blank The server home page will be displayed A User Name and Password The user name and password used for login from web browsers can be selected using Wired LAN WT Options HTTP user settings in the setup menu ...

Page 657: ...605 HTTP Server 6 Click Language and choose the desired option Choose the desired language ...

Page 658: ...er View the pictures on the camera memory card from a web browser on a computer or smart device 0 614 625 Up to five users can connect at a time Note however that only four users will be able to connect at a time if another user is currently connected using Shooting Viewer or Edit text Edit text Use a web browser on a computer or smart device to edit image comments and copyright and IPTC informati...

Page 659: ...he status of the connection to the host The camera URL is displayed when a connection is established Errors and error codes are also displayed here 0 636 2 Signal strength Ethernet connections are shown by When the camera is connected to a wireless network the icon instead shows the wireless signal strength ...

Page 660: ...Windows 10 Microsoft Edge Windows 8 1 Internet Explorer 11 macOS OS macOS version 10 14 10 13 or 10 12 Browser macOS version 10 14 Safari 12 macOS version 10 13 Safari 11 macOS version 10 12 Safari 10 Android OS OS Android version 9 0 or 8 1 Browser Chrome iOS OS iOS version 12 or 11 Browser The version of Safari included with the operating system ...

Page 661: ...ra viewfinder T is displayed when the camera is connected via Ethernet U when it is connected to a wireless network The icon will flash if an error occurs Network indicator Status I off Disable selected for Wired LAN WT Wired LAN WT functions in the setup menu Ethernet cable not connected K green Waiting to connect H flashes green Connected H flashes amber Error ...

Page 662: ...610 HTTP Server Computer Android and iPad Web Browsers Click or tap to adjust camera settings For information on the displays for iPhones see iPhone Web Browsers 0 622 ...

Page 663: ...h the camera lens in the viewfinder area tap or click the live view button 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 9 11 12 13 14 1 Home button 2 View button 3 Shoot button 4 Viewfinder 5 Logout button 6 Display panel 7 Exposure mode 8 Camera settings 9 Test button 10 Shutter release button 11 Live view button 12 Still photography movie button 13 Focus buttons 14 Zoom buttons ...

Page 664: ...ings Adjust settings for photography or movie recording Adjustments are made by clicking or tapping the icons Shutter release button Photography Release the shutter Filming Start recording Click or tap again to end recording Test button Take a test photo and display it in the viewfinder The picture is not recorded to the camera memory card ...

Page 665: ... release mode selection enables the browser window release mode button which can be used to choose from single frame high speed continuous and low speed continuous release modes In high and low speed continuous release modes the camera takes photographs while the browser shutter release button is pressed A Focus Buttons The size of the focus adjustment increases with the distance of the button fro...

Page 666: ... tapping the view button in the shooting window The viewer window offers a choice of thumbnail film strip and full frame views Thumbnail View View multiple small thumbnail images per page 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 View most recent picture in folder 2 Folder selection 3 Thumbnails per page 4 Thumbnail view 5 Film strip view 6 Full frame view ...

Page 667: ...615 HTTP Server Film Strip View Choose the picture displayed from the thumbnails at the bottom of the window Full Frame View Click or tap thumbnails to display pictures full frame ...

Page 668: ...ver A The Download Button Click or tap the Download button to save the current picture to the computer or smart device A Voice Memos Voice memos are listed as separate files A Movies Movies are indicated by 1 icons ...

Page 669: ...ge displays the text edit window The text edit window is used to edit the image comments and the copyright and IPTC information stored on the camera 1 2 3 7 6 5 4 1 Home button 2 Save button 3 Image comment 4 Logout button 5 Clear button 6 Copyright information 7 IPTC information ...

Page 670: ...are not saved automatically Click or tap the save button to save changes D The Clear Button Clicking or tapping the clear button immediately deletes the displayed text The text will be deleted even if you exit without clicking the save button ...

Page 671: ...ription Attach comment Select M this option to enable comments The current comment will be added to all pictures taken after you click the save button Input comment Input a comment up to 36 characters long Option Description Attach copyright information Select M this option to enable copyright information The current copyright information will be added to all pictures taken after you click the sav...

Page 672: ...e use of the Copyright information option A Image Comments Image comments can be viewed on the Other shooting data page of the camera photo information display To display the Other shooting data page select M both Shooting data and Other shooting data for Playback display options in the playback menu A Copyright Information Copyright information can be viewed on the Copyright info page of the came...

Page 673: ...ll frame playback Option Description Auto embed during shooting Selecting Auto embed during shooting displays a list of IPTC presets Highlight a preset and click or tap the save button to embed the selected preset in all subsequent photos Select Off to take photos with no IPTC presets Select IPTC preset Choosing Select IPTC preset displays a list of IPTC presets Choose a preset to copy to the came...

Page 674: ...622 HTTP Server iPhone Web Browsers Tap to adjust camera settings For information on computer Android or iPad displays see Computer Android and iPad Web Browsers 0 610 ...

Page 675: ...nitiate live view photography C or ready the camera for filming 1 To exit live view use the live view button to turn live view off 1 5 6 12 11 2 3 4 10 9 8 7 1 Home button 2 View button 3 Shoot button 4 Logout button 5 Viewfinder 6 Display panel 7 Camera settings 8 Shutter release button 9 Live view button 10 Camera settings 11 Exposure mode 12 Zoom buttons ...

Page 676: ...ew on the camera A The Release Mode Button Rotating the camera release mode dial to S quick release mode selection enables the browser window release mode button which can be used to choose from single frame high speed continuous and low speed continuous release modes In high and low speed continuous release modes the camera takes photographs while the browser shutter release button is pressed A F...

Page 677: ...r by tapping the view button in the shooting window The iPhone viewer window offers a choice of thumbnail and full frame views Thumbnail View View multiple small thumbnail images per page Tap thumbnails to view pictures full frame 2 3 1 1 View most recent picture in folder 2 Folder selection 3 Thumbnails per page ...

Page 678: ... A Voice Memos Voice memos are listed as separate files A Movies Movies are indicated by 1 icons Full Frame View Tap thumbnails to display pictures full frame 1 2 1 Thumbnail view 2 View most recent picture in folder ...

Page 679: ...is used to edit the image comments and the copyright and IPTC information stored on the camera D Saving Changes Changes are not saved automatically Tap the save button to save changes 1 2 3 4 6 5 7 1 Home button 2 Save button 3 Logout button 4 Image comment 0 617 5 Copyright information 0 617 6 IPTC information 0 617 7 Clear button ...

Page 680: ... and D5 digital cameras synchronized release groups a master camera with up to ten remote cameras equipped with WT 6 wireless transmitters available separately and synchronizes the shutters on the remote cameras with the release on the master camera Synchronized Release ...

Page 681: ...up menu select Wired LAN WT Wired LAN WT functions and choose Enable 2 Select Choose hardware Wireless LAN The camera will return to the Wired LAN WT display when you press J 3 Select Network settings highlight Synchronized release and press W M The camera will display synchronized release settings ...

Page 682: ...e synchronized cameras Group names can be up to 16 characters long The master and remote cameras must all be in the same group Master remote Choose a role for each camera from master and remote Master camera Pressing the shutter release button on the master camera releases the shutters on the remote cameras Each group can have only one master Remote camera The shutters on the remote cameras are sy...

Page 683: ... option is available only if Master camera is selected for Master remote on the current camera The camera network indicator will flash amber to warn if the number of cameras returning ready is less than that selected for Number of remote cameras Number of remote cameras Enter the number 1 10 of remote cameras in the group This option is available only if On is selected for Remote camera check Opti...

Page 684: ...camera releases the shutters on the remote cameras Note that the standby timers will not expire automatically when the cameras are in synchronized release mode A Remote Camera Check If On is selected for Remote camera check warnings will be displayed if any of the remote cameras are not ready ...

Page 685: ... on the other the master camera The changes apply to all options in the setup menu Time zone and date display The cameras can connect via Ethernet or by WT 6 wireless transmitters attached to both cameras 1 Select Enable for Wired LAN WT Wired LAN WT functions in the setup menu Repeat this step for the second camera Synchronizing Camera Clocks ...

Page 686: ...amera the master and press 2 Date synchronization mode will be enabled Master camera clock settings will be displayed 3 On the remote camera select Network settings Synchronize date and time then highlight Make this camera a remote and press 2 Date synchronization mode will be enabled Remote camera clock settings will be displayed ...

Page 687: ... clock on the master camera via the network If the operation succeeds the remote camera will display a message and exit to Network settings Repeat Steps 3 4 to synchronize the clocks on additional cameras 5 Press J on the master camera Date synchronization mode will end and Network settings options will be displayed ...

Page 688: ... listed below Ethernet Wireless Transmitter Troubleshooting Problem Solution The camera displays a wireless error The camera displays a TCP IP error The camera displays an ftp error Connection settings require adjustment Check settings for the wireless router ftp server or host computer and adjust camera settings appropriately 0 522 544 Check the error code For more information see Error Codes 0 6...

Page 689: ...se hardware 0 520 521 The camera displays a no memory card error The memory card is inserted incorrectly or not at all Confirm that the memory card is correctly inserted 0 38 Upload is interrupted and fails to resume Upload will resume if the camera is turned off and then on again 0 592 No connection is established when the camera URL is entered in a web browser in http server mode Confirm that th...

Page 690: ...ing to connect is on Check the SSID 0 941 Err 12 Confirm that you are using the correct password for the selected SSID Confirm that you are using the correct authentication method 0 941 Err 13 Confirm that the device to which you are attempting to connect is on Turn the camera off and then on again Err 1F Turn the camera off and then on again Error code Solution Err 21 Check that the TCP IP addres...

Page 691: ...address is correct 0 945 Err 32 Check that the login name and password are correct 0 945 Err 34 Check that the destination folder name is correct 0 945 Err 35 Confirm that the destination folder is not write protected Err 36 Check the DNS 0 944 Err 37 Check firewall settings 0 519 Check PASV mode settings 0 945 Err 3F Turn the camera off and then on again Error code Solution Err 5F Turn the camera...

Page 692: ...te flash units Camera Mounted Flash Units Take pictures using a flash unit mounted on the camera See the following pages for more information 0 641 Remote Flash Photography Take pictures with one or more remote flash units using wireless flash control Advanced Wireless Lighting or AWL For more information see Remote Flash Photography 0 663 On Camera Versus Remote ...

Page 693: ...e manual provided with the unit for details 2 Turn on the camera and flash unit The flash will begin charging the flash ready indicator N will be displayed in the viewfinder when charging is complete 3 Choose the flash control mode 0 645 and flash mode 0 131 648 Using an On Camera Flash ...

Page 694: ...ync or slow sync with red eye reduction is selected for flash mode D Third Party Flash Units Do not use third party flash units units that apply negative voltages or voltages over 250 V to the accessory shoe Use of third party flash units could not only interfere with normal operation but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash Mode Shutter speed P A Set automatically by camera 1 250 s 1 ...

Page 695: ...scription i TTL balanced fill flash The camera uses i TTL balanced fill flash flash control for a natural balance between the main subject and ambient background lighting After the shutter release button is pressed and immediately before the main flash the flash unit emits a series of monitor pre flashes which the camera uses to optimize flash output for a balance between the main subject and ambi...

Page 696: ...sync cable can be connected to the sync terminal which features a JIS B locking nut as required Do not connect another flash unit via a sync cable when performing rear curtain sync flash photography with a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe ...

Page 697: ...flash settings can be adjusted using the Flash control Flash control mode item in the photo shooting menu The flash control modes available vary with the flash used The contents of the Flash control mode display vary with the options selected Settings for units other than the SB 5000 SB 500 SB 400 and SB 300 can only be adjusted via the controls on the flash unit Flash Control Mode ...

Page 698: ...e sub command dial Auto external flash Light from the flash is reflected from the subject to an auto external flash sensor and flash output adjusted automatically Output can be adjusted using Auto external flash compensation Auto external flash supports auto aperture qA and non TTL auto A modes See the flash unit manual for details Distance priority manual Choose the distance to the subject flash ...

Page 699: ...lash control Manual Choose the flash level manually Flash output is selected using Manual output amount Repeating flash The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open producing a multiple exposure effect Use Repeating flash Output to adjust flash output and Times to choose the number of times the unit fires Frequency controls how often the unit fires per second measured in Hz The maximum num...

Page 700: ...ues between 1 250 s or 1 8000 s with Auto FP High Speed Sync and 1 60 s P S A M Red eye reduction Use for portraits The flash fires before the photograph is taken reducing red eye A flash unit with red eye reduction is required The desired results may not be achieved if the subject or camera moves before the shutter is released this setting is not recommended with moving subjects or in other situa...

Page 701: ...ow shutter speeds Use of a tripod is recommended P A Slow sync red eye red eye reduction with slow sync Use to include background lighting in portraits Red eye reduction is combined with slow shutter speeds to capture background lighting at night or under low light Note that photos may be prone to blurring due to camera shake at slow shutter speeds Use of a tripod is recommended P A Option Descrip...

Page 702: ...s just before the shutter closes creating the effect of a stream of light behind moving light sources Selecting mode P or A after choosing this option sets the flash mode to slow sync Note that photos may be prone to blurring due to camera shake at slow shutter speeds Use of a tripod is recommended P S A M s Flash off The flash does not fire P S A M Option Description Available in ...

Page 703: ...ode Hold the W M button and rotate the main command dial The selected option is displayed in the top control panel 1 Fill flash 2 Red eye reduction 1 3 Slow sync 2 4 Red eye reduction with slow sync 1 3 5 Rear curtain sync 4 6 Flash off ...

Page 704: ...upport red eye reduction 2 Not available in modes S and M Fill flash is selected instead 3 Not available in modes S and M Red eye reduction is selected instead 4 In modes P and A slow rear curtain sync will be selected as shown when the W M button is released ...

Page 705: ...he main subject appear brighter reduced to prevent glare or otherwise fine tuned to produce the desired result Adjusting Flash Compensation Hold the W M button and rotate the sub command dial Choose from values of from 3 to 1 At default settings changes to flash output are made in increments of 1 3 EV The size of the increment can be selected using Custom Setting b3 Exp flash comp step value Flash...

Page 706: ...ghtly lit At values other than 0 0 a Y icon will appear in the viewfinder and top control panel Flash compensation can be viewed in the top control panel and viewfinder by pressing the W M button Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash compensation to 0 0 Flash compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off 0 3 EV ...

Page 707: ...anging the flash level Your subject need not be in the center of the frame giving you more freedom when composing shots Flash output is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture 1 Assign FV lock to a control using Custom Setting f3 Custom controls 2 Mount a CLS compatible flash unit on the camera accessory shoe FV Lock ...

Page 708: ...0 SB 500 SB 400 or SB 300 mounted on the camera accessory shoe choose TTL or Auto external flash for Flash control Flash control mode For information on other flash units see the documentation provided with the unit 4 Focus Position the subject in the center of the frame and press the shutter release button halfway to focus ...

Page 709: ... flash ready indicator N appears in the viewfinder press the FV lock control the flash unit will emit a monitor pre flash to determine the appropriate flash level Flash output will lock and an FV lock icon r will appear in the viewfinder 6 Recompose the shot ...

Page 710: ...down to shoot If desired additional pictures can be taken without releasing FV lock Repeat Steps 6 to 7 to take additional shots 8 Release FV lock Press the FV lock control to release FV lock and confirm that the FV lock icon r is no longer displayed in the viewfinder ...

Page 711: ...5000 SB 500 SB 400 or SB 300 is mounted on the camera accessory shoe flash info can be viewed in the camera display To view flash info during viewfinder photography press the R button to activate the information display 0 1026 and then press the R button again Flash Info for On Camera Units ...

Page 712: ... 0 641 2 Bounce icon displayed if flash head is tilted up left or right 3 Zoom head position warning displayed if zoom head is not in correct position 4 Flash control mode 0 645 FP indicator 0 836 5 TTL flash compensation 0 645 6 Flash mode 0 131 648 7 FV lock indicator 0 655 8 Flash compensation 0 133 653 ...

Page 713: ...ual 2 1 1 Flash control mode 0 645 FP indicator 0 836 2 Auto external flash compensation 0 645 3 2 1 1 Flash control mode 0 645 FP indicator 0 836 2 Distance priority manual flash compensation 0 645 3 Distance 0 645 2 1 1 Flash control mode 0 645 FP indicator 0 836 2 Flash level 0 645 ...

Page 714: ...ing exposure mode shutter speed aperture and ISO sensitivity D Changing Flash Settings Flash settings can be changed by pressing the i button in the flash info display The options available vary with the flash unit and the settings selected You can also test fire the flash 2 1 3 1 Flash control mode 0 645 2 Output 0 645 3 Times 0 645 Frequency 0 645 ...

Page 715: ...nformation on using a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe see On Camera Flash Photography 0 640 What Is Remote Flash Photography Throughout this chapter operations involving an accessory connected to the camera are indicated by C operations involving remote flash units by f For more information on using remote flash units f see the manual provided with the flash unit ...

Page 716: ... radio signals 0 665 optical signals from a flash unit mounted on the camera accessory shoe 0 680 radio signals with additional lighting provided by a shoe mounted flash unit 0 679 or combined radio and optical signals 0 694 Radio flash control is available only when a WR R10 is connected to the camera ...

Page 717: ...anced Wireless Lighting or radio AWL Radio AWL is available with SB 5000 flash units Establishing a Wireless Connection Before using radio AWL establish a wireless connection between the WR R10 and the remote flash units 1 C Connect the WR R10 For more information see the documentation provided with the WR R10 Radio AWL ...

Page 718: ... A WR A10 adapter is required when using the WR R10 Be sure to update the firmware for the optional WR R10 wireless remote controller to version 3 0 or later before using radio AWL For information on firmware updates see the Nikon website for your area 3 C Choose a channel for the WR R10 Set the WR R10 channel selector to the desired channel ...

Page 719: ...en that each device must be paired separately PIN is recommended when connecting to a large number of devices PIN Communication is shared among all devices with the same four digit PIN This is therefore a good choice for photography featuring a large number of remote devices If there are multiple cameras present that share the same PIN the flash units will be under the sole control of the camera t...

Page 720: ...te pairing on the remote unit and press the WR R10 pairing button Pairing is complete when the LINK lamps on the WR R10 and flash unit flash orange and green Once a connection is established the LINK lamp on the remote flash unit will light green PIN Use the controls on the remote flash unit to enter the PIN you selected in the previous step Pairing begins when the PIN is entered Once a connection...

Page 721: ...select Flash control Radio remote flash info in the camera photo shooting menu The identifier remote flash unit name for each unit can be changed using flash unit controls D Reconnecting As long as the channel link mode and other settings remain the same the WR R10 will automatically connect to previously paired flash units when you select remote mode and Steps 3 6 can be omitted The flash unit LI...

Page 722: ...ing menu Choose a remote flash control mode and take pictures as described below Group Flash Select this item if you want to adjust settings separately for the flash units in each group 1 C Select Group flash for Flash control Remote flash control 2 C Highlight Group flash options in the Flash control display and press 2 ...

Page 723: ...are available 4 f Group the remote flash units Choose a group A F for each of the remote flash units The master flash can control up to 18 flash units in any combination Option Description TTL i TTL flash control qA Auto aperture Available only with compatible flash units M Choose the flash level manually off The remote units do not fire Comp cannot be adjusted ...

Page 724: ... the documentation provided with the flash units for more information Test fire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally To test fire the units press the i button in the flash info display highlight N Test flash and press J 0 697 6 C Take the photograph ...

Page 725: ...e between the remote flash units in groups A and B and adjust flash output for group C Output for group C is adjusted manually 1 C Select Quick wireless control for Flash control Remote flash control 2 C Highlight Quick wireless control options in the Flash control display and press 2 ...

Page 726: ... settings Choose the balance between groups A and B Adjust flash compensation for groups A and B Adjust settings for group C Select M to enable or to disable the units in group C When M is selected the units in group C will fire at the chosen output ...

Page 727: ...bination 5 C f Compose the shot and arrange the flash units See the documentation provided with the flash units for more information Test fire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally To test fire the units press the i button in the flash info display highlight N Test flash and press J 0 697 6 C Take the photograph ...

Page 728: ...flash units fire repeatedly while the shutter is open producing a multiple exposure effect 1 C Select Remote repeating for Flash control Remote flash control 2 C Highlight Remote repeating options in the Flash control display and press 2 ...

Page 729: ...and frequency Enable or disable selected groups Select ON to enable the selected group to disable the selected group 4 f Group the remote flash units Choose a group A F for each of the remote flash units The master flash can control up to 18 flash units in any combination ...

Page 730: ... the documentation provided with the flash units for more information Test fire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally To test fire the units press the i button in the flash info display highlight N Test flash and press J 0 697 6 C Take the photograph ...

Page 731: ...repeating flash control Once the unit is attached settings can be adjusted from the camera menus or using the controls on the SB 5000 In the case of the camera menus use the options listed under Group flash options Master flash or under M in the Remote repeating options display SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 Configure the flash for standalone use Use the controls on the flash unit to adjust fl...

Page 732: ...ystem CLS 0 1051 If the flash unit in question is an SB 5000 or SB 500 settings can be adjusted from the camera For more information see Using Optical AWL with the SB 5000 or SB 500 0 681 For information on flash placement and other topics see the documentation provided with the flash units Settings for other flash units must be adjusted using flash unit controls For more information see the docum...

Page 733: ... Wireless flash options in the photo shooting menu and choose a remote flash control mode the SB 500 supports only Group flash Choose a remote flash control mode and take pictures as described below D The SB 5000 When an SB 5000 is mounted on the camera accessory shoe Flash control settings can also be changed using the controls on the flash unit ...

Page 734: ...Select this item if you want to adjust settings separately for the flash units in each group 1 C Select Group flash for Flash control Remote flash control 2 C Highlight Group flash options in the Flash control display and press 2 ...

Page 735: ... The following options are available For Channel choose the channel 1 4 the master flash will use for optical remote flash control If the remote flash units include an SB 500 you must choose channel 3 Option Description TTL i TTL flash control qA Auto aperture Available only with compatible flash units M Choose the flash level manually off The remote units do not fire Comp cannot be adjusted ...

Page 736: ...h units that may be used The practical maximum however is three per group as the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with performance if more flash units are used 6 C f Compose the shot and arrange the flash units See the documentation provided with the flash units for more information Test fire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally To test fire the units pres...

Page 737: ...685 Optical AWL 7 C f Take the photograph after confirming that the flash ready lights for all flash units are lit ...

Page 738: ...e balance between the remote flash units in groups A and B and adjust flash output for group C Output for group C is adjusted manually 1 C Select Quick wireless control for Flash control Remote flash control 2 C Highlight Quick wireless control options in the Flash control display and press 2 ...

Page 739: ...l settings Choose the balance between groups A and B Adjust flash compensation for groups A and B Adjust settings for group C Select M to enable or to disable the units in group C When M is selected the units in group C will fire at the chosen output ...

Page 740: ...f Choose a channel for the remote flash units Set the remote flash units to the channel selected for Channel in Step 3 5 f Group the remote flash units Choose a group A B or C There is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may be used The practical maximum however is three per group as the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with performance if more flash units are u...

Page 741: ...more information Test fire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally To test fire the units press the test button on the master flash or press the i button in the flash info display and select N Test flash 0 697 7 C f Take the photograph after confirming that the flash ready lights for all flash units are lit ...

Page 742: ...ly The flash units fire repeatedly while the shutter is open producing a multiple exposure effect 1 C Select Remote repeating for Flash control Remote flash control 2 C Highlight Remote repeating options in the Flash control display and press 2 ...

Page 743: ... Enable or disable selected groups Select ON to enable the selected group to disable the selected group Choose the channel For Channel choose the channel 1 4 the master flash will use for optical remote flash control If the remote flash units include an SB 500 you must choose channel 3 ...

Page 744: ...l maximum however is three per group as the light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with performance if more flash units are used 6 C f Compose the shot and arrange the flash units See the documentation provided with the flash units for more information Test fire the units and confirm that they are functioning normally To test fire the units press the test button on the master flash...

Page 745: ...eflections from the remote flash units do not enter the camera lens in TTL mode or the photocells on the remote flash units qA mode Otherwise light from the flash units may interfere with exposure Even if is selected for Master flash Mode the master flash may emit low intensity timing flashes These flashes may appear in photographs taken at short range This can be prevented by choosing low ISO sen...

Page 746: ...e camera accessory shoe select Optical radio AWL for Wireless flash options With other flash units or the SU 800 Wireless flash options is set to Optical radio AWL automatically The only option available for Remote flash control will be Group flash The remote flash units can be placed in up to six groups A through F Place optically controlled units in groups A through C and radio controlled units ...

Page 747: ...lash info during viewfinder photography press the R button to activate the information display 0 1026 and then press the R button again Flash Control Mode Displays Group Flash Flash Info for Remote Units 2 5 3 6 1 4 1 Flash ready indicator 1 2 Remote flash control 0 777 FP indicator 0 836 3 Remote flash control mode 2 0 776 4 Group flash control mode 3 Group flash mode 0 670 682 Flash compensation...

Page 748: ...A B ratio 0 673 686 5 Flash compensation 0 673 686 6 Group C flash control mode and flash level output 0 673 686 7 Channel 2 0 665 686 8 Link mode 4 0 926 7 4 8 6 2 3 1 5 1 Flash ready indicator 1 2 Remote flash control 0 777 3 Output 0 676 690 4 Remote flash control mode 2 0 776 5 Times 0 676 690 Frequency 0 676 690 6 Group status enabled disabled 0 676 690 7 Channel 2 0 665 690 8 Link mode 4 0 9...

Page 749: ...e displayed for each group only when joint optical and radio AWL is used 4 Displayed only when radio AWL or joint optical and radio AWL is used D Flash Info and Camera Settings The flash information display shows select camera settings including exposure mode shutter speed aperture and ISO sensitivity D The i Button Flash settings can be changed by pressing the i button in the flash info display T...

Page 750: ...yback Menu Defaults Defaults Playback menu option Default Delete Playback folder All Playback display options Focus point U Exposure info U Highlights U RGB histogram U Shooting data U Overview U None image only U Basic shooting data M Flash data M Picture Control data M Other shooting data M Copyright info M Location data M IPTC data M ...

Page 751: ...lot Slot 1 Filtered playback criteria Protect U Rating U Select to send wired LAN WT U Image review Off After delete Show next After burst show Last image in burst Rotate tall On Copy image s Hide image Slide show Image type Still images and movies Frame interval 2 s Playback menu option Default ...

Page 752: ... menu bank A Extended photo menu banks Off Storage folder Rename NC_D6 Select folder by number 100 Select folder from list File naming DSC Role played by card in Slot 2 Overflow Image area Choose image area FX 36 24 Auto DX crop On Image quality JPEG normal Image size JPEG Large NEF RAW Large ...

Page 753: ... Off Maximum sensitivity 102400 Maximum sensitivity with N Same as without flash Minimum shutter speed Auto White balance Auto Keep white reduce warm colors Fine tune A B 0 G M 0 Choose color temperature 5000K Preset manual d 1 Set Picture Control Auto Manage Picture Control Color space sRGB Active D Lighting Off Long exposure NR Off Photo shooting menu option Default ...

Page 754: ... Off Flicker reduction Flicker reduction setting Disable Flicker reduction indicator On Flash control Flash control mode TTL Wireless flash options Off Remote flash control Group Flash Auto bracketing Auto bracketing set AE flash bracketing Number of shots 0F Increment 1 0 Photo shooting menu option Default ...

Page 755: ...Number of shots 2 Overlay mode Average Save individual images NEF On Overlay shooting On Select first exposure NEF HDR high dynamic range HDR mode Off Exposure differential Auto Smoothing Normal Save individual images NEF Off Photo shooting menu option Default ...

Page 756: ...time Now Interval 1 min Intervals shots interval 0001 1 Exposure smoothing On Silent photography On Interval priority Off Focus before each shot Off Options Off Starting storage folder New folder U Reset file numbering U Photo shooting menu option Default ...

Page 757: ...oting time 25 min Exposure smoothing On Silent photography On Image area Choose image area FX Auto DX crop On Frame size frame rate 1920x1080 60p Interval priority Off Focus before each shot Off Destination Slot 1 Photo shooting menu option Default ...

Page 758: ... of shots 100 Focus step width 5 Interval until next shot 0 First frame exposure lock On Silent photography On Starting storage folder New folder U Reset file numbering U Silent live view photography Off Photo shooting menu option Default ...

Page 759: ...ge area Choose image area FX Auto DX crop On Frame size frame rate 1920x1080 60p Movie quality High quality Movie file type MOV ISO sensitivity settings Maximum sensitivity 102400 Auto ISO control mode M Off ISO sensitivity mode M 100 White balance Same as photo settings Fine tune A B 0 G M 0 Choose color temperature 5000K Preset manual d 1 ...

Page 760: ...rmal Diffraction compensation On Flicker reduction Auto Electronic VR Off Microphone sensitivity Auto Attenuator Disable Frequency response Wide range Wind noise reduction Off Headphone volume 15 Timecode Record timecodes Off Count up method Record run Timecode origin Drop frame On Movie shooting menu option Default ...

Page 761: ... lock on Blocked shot AF response 3 Subject motion Steady a4 Focus points used 105 points a5 Store points by orientation Off a6 AF activation Shutter AF ON Out of focus release Enable a7 Single point AF watch area Normal a8 3D tracking face detection On a9 Group area AF face detection On a10 Custom groupings C1 C2 Group area AF C1 15 1 Group area AF C2 15 1 a11 Auto area AF face detection On ...

Page 762: ...area AF 25 points M Dynamic area AF 49 points M Dynamic area AF 105 points M 3D tracking M Group area AF M Group area AF C1 M Group area AF C2 M Auto area AF M a15 Autofocus mode restrictions No restrictions a16 Focus point wrap around No wrap a17 Focus point options Manual focus mode On Focus point brightness Normal Dynamic area AF assist On Custom Settings menu option Default ...

Page 763: ...ure compensation Off b5 Matrix metering Face detection on b6 Center weighted area φ12 mm b7 Fine tune optimal exposure Matrix metering 0 Center weighted metering 0 Spot metering 0 Highlight weighted metering 0 c1 Shutter release button AE L Off c2 Standby timer 6 s c3 Self timer Self timer delay 10 s Number of shots 1 Interval between shots 0 5 s Custom Settings menu option Default ...

Page 764: ...n d1 Continuous shooting speed Continuous high speed 14 fps Continuous low speed 5 fps Quiet shutter release Single frame d2 Max continuous release 200 d3 Limit release mode selection Single frame M fixed Continuous L M Continuous H M Quiet shutter release M Self timer M Mirror up M Custom Settings menu option Default ...

Page 765: ...eeds M Off d8 Limit selectable image area FX 36x24 M fixed 1 2x 30x20 M DX 24x16 M 5 4 30x24 M 1 1 24x24 M 16 9 36x20 M d9 File number sequence On d10 Peaking highlights Peaking level Off Peaking highlight color Red d11 Framing grid display Off d12 Rear control panel Release mode d13 LCD illumination Off Custom Settings menu option Default ...

Page 766: ...0 s e3 Exposure comp for flash Entire frame e4 Auto N ISO sensitivity control Subject and background e5 Flash burst priority Prioritize precise flash control e6 Modeling flash On e7 Auto bracketing mode M Flash speed e8 Bracketing order MTR under over e9 Bracketing burst options Disable Custom Settings menu option Default ...

Page 767: ...Picture Control Color space Photo shooting menu bank Select custom settings bank Flash mode Metering Wired LAN WT Active D Lighting Autofocus mode AF area mode Focus tracking with lock on Custom controls Custom Settings menu option Default ...

Page 768: ...v Set Picture Control Color space Peaking highlights Split screen display zoom Flash mode Metering Wired LAN WT Active D Lighting Autofocus mode AF area mode Photo live view display WB Custom controls Custom Settings menu option Default ...

Page 769: ...ton Voice memo AF ON button AF ON Sub selector Focus point selection Sub selector center AE AF lock AF ON button for vertical shooting Same as AF ON button Multi selector for vertical shooting Same as multi selector Metering button Metering BKT button Auto bracketing Movie record button None Lens focus function buttons AE lock only Custom Settings menu option Default ...

Page 770: ...on off 1 1 100 f5 Shutter spd aperture lock Shutter speed lock Off Aperture lock Off f6 Customize command dials Reverse rotation Exposure compensation U Shutter speed aperture U Change main sub Exposure setting Off Autofocus setting Off Aperture setting Sub command dial Menus and playback Off Sub dial frame advance 10 frames Custom Settings menu option Default ...

Page 771: ...elease button to use dial No f9 Reverse indicators f10 Live view button options Enable f11 D switch LCD backlight D f12 Full frame playback flicks Flick up None Flick down None Flick advance direction Left Right Custom Settings menu option Default ...

Page 772: ...sensitivity Wind noise reduction Metering Wired LAN WT Electronic VR Autofocus mode AF area mode Destination Custom controls g2 Custom controls Preview button None Fn1 button None Fn2 button None Fn3 button None Sub selector center AE AF lock Shutter release button Take photos Custom Settings menu option Default ...

Page 773: ...721 Defaults g3 Multi selector center button Select center focus point g4 Highlight display Display pattern Off Highlight display threshold 248 Custom Settings menu option Default ...

Page 774: ...ry or region of purchase Time zone and date Time zone Varies with country or region of purchase Date and time Date format Varies with country or region of purchase Daylight saving time Off Monitor brightness 0 Monitor color balance A B 0 G M 0 Virtual horizon Information display Auto Manual Dark on light ...

Page 775: ...ved values Choose value for current lens Non CPU lens data Lens number 1 Focal length mm Maximum aperture Clean image sensor Clean at startup shutdown Clean at startup shutdown Lock mirror up for cleaning Image Dust Off ref photo Pixel mapping Image comment Attach comment U Setup menu option Default ...

Page 776: ... IPTC Edit save Delete Auto embed during shooting Off Load save Voice memo options Voice memo Off Voice memo overwrite Disable Voice memo control Press and hold Audio output Speaker headphones Beep options Beep on off Off Volume 2 Pitch Low Setup menu option Default ...

Page 777: ... HDMI Output resolution Auto Advanced Output range Auto Live view on screen display On Dual monitor On External recording control Off Location data built in Record location data Off Standby timer Enable Set clock from satellite No Create log Log list Position Setup menu option Default ...

Page 778: ...ring Assign remote WR Fn button None Airplane mode Disable Connect to smart device Pairing Bluetooth Bluetooth connection Disable Select to send Bluetooth Auto select to send Off Wi Fi connection Send while off On Location data smart device Setup menu option Default ...

Page 779: ...ect to PC built in Wi Fi Wi Fi connection Disable Network settings Options Auto send Off Delete after send No Send file as NEF RAW JPEG JPEG JPEG slot selection Slot 1 Deselect all MAC address Setup menu option Default ...

Page 780: ...ns Auto send Off Delete after send No Send file as NEF RAW JPEG JPEG JPEG slot selection Slot 1 Overwrite if same name No Protect if marked to send No Send marking Off Send folder Deselect all HTTP user settings Power saving Prioritize network speed MAC address Conformity marking Setup menu option Default ...

Page 781: ...729 Defaults Battery info Slot empty release lock Enable release Save load menu settings Reset all settings Firmware version Setup menu option Default ...

Page 782: ... the following items D The Playback Menu Managing Images Item 0 Delete 731 Playback folder 732 Playback display options 733 Delete images from both slots 734 Dual format recording PB slot 735 Filtered playback criteria 735 Image review 735 After delete 736 After burst show 737 Rotate tall 738 Copy image s 738 Hide image 746 Slide show 748 Item 0 ...

Page 783: ...ed images Delete selected pictures d Candidates for deletion Delete pictures rated d candidate for deletion i Images shot on selected dates Delete all pictures taken on selected dates R All images Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for Playback folder in the playback menu If two memory cards are inserted you can select the card from which pictures will be deleted ...

Page 784: ...cription Folder name Pictures in all folders with the selected name will be visible during playback Folders can be renamed using the Storage folder Rename option in the photo shooting menu All Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback Current Only pictures in the current folder will be visible during playback ...

Page 785: ...back You can also choose the types of photo information that can be viewed during full frame playback The shooting data displayed when Shooting data is selected can be chosen using Detailed shooting data Highlight options and press 2 to select M or deselect U To complete the operation press J Playback Display Options G button U D playback menu ...

Page 786: ...copy Delete Images from Both Slots G button U D playback menu Option Description Yes confirmation required Before deleting one copy you will be prompted to choose whether to delete the other To choose the option highlighted by default press 2 Yes Same images on w and x is always selected selecting Yes in the confirmation dialog deletes both copies No The confirmation dialog displayed is the same a...

Page 787: ...are played back Choose the criteria used to choose the pictures displayed during filtered playback 0 427 Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor immediately after shooting If Off is selected pictures can only be displayed by pressing the K button Dual Format Recording PB Slot G button U D playback menu Filtered Playback Criteria G button U D playback menu Image Review G ...

Page 788: ...re the preceding picture will be displayed T Show previous The preceding picture is displayed If the deleted image was the first picture the next picture will be displayed U Continue as before If you were scrolling through pictures in the order recorded the following picture will be displayed as described for Show next If you were scrolling through pictures in reverse order the next picture will b...

Page 789: ...irst or last shot in the burst This option takes effect only when Off is selected for Image review After Burst Show G button U D playback menu DSC_0001 jpg DSC_0002 jpg DSC_0003 jpg DSC_0004 jpg DSC_0014 jpg DSC_0015 jpg 1 2 3 1 Most recent shots burst 2 Displayed if First image in burst is selected 3 Displayed if Last image in burst is selected ...

Page 790: ...or Rotate tall Copy pictures from one memory card to another when two memory cards are inserted Rotate Tall G button U D playback menu Copy Image s G button U D playback menu Option Description Select source Choose the card from which pictures will be copied Select image s Select pictures to be copied Select destination folder Select the destination folder on the remaining card the card not chosen...

Page 791: ...urce Highlight Select source and press 2 to display Select source options 2 Select the card containing the pictures to be copied Highlight the slot for the card containing the pictures to be copied and press J to select the highlighted slot and return to the Copy image s menu ...

Page 792: ...ss 2 to view the Select image s display 4 Select the source folder Highlight the folder containing the images to be copied and press 2 to display the Images selected by default menu To copy all pictures from the card in the selected slot highlight All images in slot press J and proceed to Step 10 ...

Page 793: ...s in the chosen folder will be selected by default Choose this option when you want to select pictures individually Select all images All of the pictures in the chosen folder will be selected by default Choose this option if you want to copy all or most of the pictures in the folder Select protected images Only the protected images in the folder will be selected by default ...

Page 794: ...icture press the center of the multi selector again the check L will no longer be displayed To view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the X button After confirming that you have selected L all the pictures you want to copy press J to return to the Copy image s menu 7 Choose Select destination folder Highlight Select destination folder and press 2 to display Select destination fold...

Page 795: ...owing options and press 2 Option Description Select folder by number Enter the number of the destination folder 0 756 If the folder with the selected number does not already exist a new folder will be created Select folder from list Choose the destination folder from a list of existing folders ...

Page 796: ...the folder and return to the Copy image s menu 10Choose Copy image s Highlight Copy image s and press J to display a confirmation dialog 11Choose Yes The camera will display the message Copy together with the number of pictures that will be copied Highlight Yes and press J to copy the selected pictures Press J again to exit when copying is complete ...

Page 797: ...splayed Select Replace existing image or Replace all to replace the existing file or files Protected files in the destination folder will not be replaced To continue without replacing existing files select Skip Select Cancel to exit without copying any further pictures Ratings and protected status are copied with the pictures Hidden pictures cannot be copied To prevent loss of power while copying ...

Page 798: ...s Highlight pictures using the multi selector and press the center of the multi selector to select Selected pictures are marked with R icons To deselect the current picture removing the R icon press the center of the multi selector again Continue until you have selected all the desired pictures To view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the X button Hide Image G button U D playback...

Page 799: ...ation D Hidden Pictures Hidden pictures will be deleted when the memory card is formatted Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the image A Revealing All Hidden Pictures To reveal all pictures hidden using Hide image choose Deselect all in the Hide image display ...

Page 800: ...es hidden using Hide image 0 746 are not displayed Viewing Slide Shows To start the slide show highlight Start and press J Slide Show G button U D playback menu Option Description Start Start the slide show Image type Choose the type of picture displayed Select By rating to view only pictures with selected ratings Highlight ratings and press 2 to select M or deselect U Frame interval Choose how lo...

Page 801: ...next frame View additional photo info Press 1 or 3 to choose the photo info displayed To hide photo info select None image only Pause Press J to pause the slide show To restart highlight Restart and press J Adjust volume Press X to increase volume W M to decrease Exit to the playback menu Press G to end the slide show and return to the playback menu Exit to playback mode Press K to end the slide s...

Page 802: ...nu bank 752 Extended photo menu banks 754 Storage folder 755 File naming 760 Role played by card in Slot 2 761 Image area 761 Image quality 761 Image size 762 NEF RAW recording 762 ISO sensitivity settings 764 White balance 764 Set Picture Control 764 Manage Picture Control 765 Color space 765 Active D Lighting 766 Long exposure NR 767 High ISO NR 768 Vignette control 769 Diffraction compensation ...

Page 803: ...g Options Flicker reduction 772 Flash control 774 Auto bracketing 778 Multiple exposure 779 HDR high dynamic range 779 Item 0 Interval timer shooting 780 Time lapse movie 780 Focus shift shooting 780 Silent live view photography 781 Item 0 ...

Page 804: ...ultiple exposure Interval timer shooting Time lapse movie and Focus shift shooting apply to all banks To store a particular combination of frequently used settings select one of the four banks using Photo shooting menu bank and adjust settings as desired A Photo Shooting Menu Bank The information and top control panel displays show the current photo shooting menu bank as k followed by bank name A ...

Page 805: ...2 Captions can be up to 20 characters long Restoring Default Settings You can restore default settings for a selected photo shooting menu bank To do so highlight the bank and press O Q a confirmation dialog will be displayed Highlight Yes and press J to restore default settings for the selected bank Photo shooting menu reset is not available while a multiple exposure is in progress ...

Page 806: ... shooting menu banks Changes to exposure mode shutter speed aperture and flash mode will be stored in the bank currently selected for Photo shooting menu bank The settings stored in the bank will be recalled the next time the bank is selected Selecting Off restores the exposure and flash modes shutter speed and aperture in effect before On was selected Extended Photo Menu Banks G button U C photo ...

Page 807: ...r the folder number is NC_D6 To change the name assigned to new folders select Rename Existing folders cannot be renamed If desired the default name can be restored for subsequent folders by pressing and holding the O Q button while the keyboard is displayed Storage Folder G button U C photo shooting menu 100NC_D6 D 15 10 2019 1 1 Folder 2 Folder number 3 Folder name ...

Page 808: ...ghlight Select folder by number and press 2 to display the Select folder by number dialog The card on which the new folder will be created is underlined in the card slot display area at the top right corner of the Select folder by number dialog The card used for new folders depends on the option currently selected for Role played by card in Slot 2 in the photo shooting menu 2 Choose a folder numbe...

Page 809: ...or new pictures If you chose a folder number that does not already exist a new folder will be created with that number when you press J In either case subsequent pictures will be stored in the chosen folder To exit without changing the storage folder press the G button D Folder Icons Folders in the Select folder by number dialog are shown by W if empty by Y if full containing either 5000 pictures ...

Page 810: ...t folder from list Highlight Select folder from list and press 2 to display the Select folder from list dialog 2 Highlight a folder Press 1 or 3 to highlight a folder 3 Select the highlighted folder Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the main menu Subsequent photographs will be stored in the selected folder ...

Page 811: ...00 or the file number reaches 9999 or during movie recording when camera calculates that the number of files needed to create a movie of maximum length would result in a file numbered higher than 9999 If there is space on the memory card you will nevertheless be able to continue shooting by creating a folder with a number less than 999 and selecting it as the storage folder or changing the options...

Page 812: ...is one of the following extensions assigned according to the options selected for image quality and file type NEF NEF RAW photos JPG JPEG fine normal or basic photos MOV MOV movies MP4 MP4 movies NDF Dust off reference data Images created with Adobe RGB selected for Color space have file names of the form _DSCnnnn xxx Both files in each pair of dual format photographs have the same name In the cas...

Page 813: ...ee Using Two Memory Cards 0 308 Adjust image area settings For more information see Adjusting Image Area Settings 0 136 Choose a file format for photographs For more information see Adjusting Image Quality 0 142 Role Played by Card in Slot 2 G button U C photo shooting menu Image Area G button U C photo shooting menu Image Quality G button U C photo shooting menu ...

Page 814: ...xels of JPEG or NEF RAW pictures recorded with the camera For more information see Choosing an Image Size 0 145 Choose a compression type and bit depth for NEF RAW photographs Image Size G button U C photo shooting menu NEF RAW Recording G button U C photo shooting menu ...

Page 815: ... are about 45 to 65 the size of pictures recorded using Uncompressed Image quality is nearly the same as pictures recorded using Uncompressed Uncompressed NEF pictures are not compressed the resulting files are larger than those for pictures recorded using Lossless compressed or Compressed Option Description q 12 bit NEF RAW images are recorded at a bit depth of 12 bits r 14 bit NEF RAW images are...

Page 816: ...he light source For more information see Achieving Natural Colors with Different Light Sources White Balance 0 221 Adjust image processing Picture Control settings according to your subject or creative intent For more information see Image Processing Picture Controls 0 271 ISO Sensitivity Settings G button U C photo shooting menu White Balance G button U C photo shooting menu Set Picture Control G...

Page 817: ...f colors than sRGB Adobe RGB is a better choice for professional publication and commercial printing D Color Space Capture NX D and ViewNX i automatically select the correct color space when opening photographs created with this camera Results cannot be guaranteed with third party software D Adobe RGB For accurate color reproduction Adobe RGB images require applications displays and printers that ...

Page 818: ...o Shooting Menu Shooting Options Preserve details in highlights and shadows creating pictures with natural contrast For more information see Active D Lighting 0 281 Active D Lighting G button U C photo shooting menu ...

Page 819: ... Pictures cannot be taken until the display stops flashing The time required to process photos after shooting roughly doubles D Long Exposure Noise Reduction If the camera is turned off before processing is complete the picture will be saved but noise reduction will not be performed Long Exposure NR G button U C photo shooting menu Option Description On Reduce noise in photographs taken at shutter...

Page 820: ...on U C photo shooting menu Option Description High Reduce noise in photographs taken at all ISO sensitivities The higher the sensitivity the greater the effect Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from High Normal and Low Normal Low Off Noise reduction is performed only as required The amount of noise reduction performed is always lower than when Low is selected ...

Page 821: ...photo shooting menu or movies Depending on the scene shooting conditions and type of lens JPEG images may exhibit noise fog or over processing at the edge of the frame that introduces variations in peripheral brightness In addition custom Picture Controls and preset Picture Controls that have been modified from default settings may not produce the desired effect Take test shots and view the result...

Page 822: ... to reduce diffraction at small apertures high f numbers To apply diffraction compensation to pictures taken with non CPU lenses enter the lens data using the Non CPU lens data item in the setup menu Diffraction Compensation G button U C photo shooting menu ...

Page 823: ... not supported D Auto Distortion Control When On is selected the time needed to process photographs before recording begins may increase The greater the amount of distortion control the greater the area cropped from the edges of the frame Before using auto distortion control with DX lenses choose On for Image area Auto DX crop or select DX 24 16 for Choose image area Selecting other options may re...

Page 824: ...e is selected the camera will time photographs to reduce the effects of flicker Note that the frame rate for burst shooting may drop or become erratic when Enable is selected Flicker reduction indicator Choose whether a FLICKER icon is displayed in the viewfinder when flicker is detected Selecting Enable for Flicker reduction setting and On for Flicker reduction indicator during viewfinder photogr...

Page 825: ... results before taking additional photographs Depending on the light source flicker reduction may slightly delay shutter response During burst shooting the frame rate may slow or become erratic Flicker reduction can detect flicker at 100 and 120 Hz associated respectively with AC power supplies of 50 and 60 Hz The desired results may not be achieved if the frequency of the power supply changes dur...

Page 826: ...or optional flash units mounted on the camera accessory shoe For information on adjusting settings for optional flash units mounted on the camera accessory shoe see On Camera Flash Photography 0 640 For information on adjusting settings for wireless remote flash units see Remote Flash Photography 0 663 Flash Control G button U C photo shooting menu ...

Page 827: ...on the flash unit Settings for the SB 5000 can also be adjusted using the controls on the flash unit Option Description TTL Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to lighting conditions Auto external flash Light from the flash is reflected from the subject to an auto external flash sensor and flash output adjusted automatically Distance priority manual Choose the distance to the subjec...

Page 828: ...less remote controller is mounted on the camera Option Description Y Optical AWL The remote flash units are controlled using low intensity flashes emitted by the master flash 0 680 Y Z Optical radio AWL Choose this option when using both optically and radio controlled flash units 0 694 Z Radio AWL The remote flash units are controlled by radio signals from a WR R10 attached to the camera 0 665 Off...

Page 829: ...ol Radio Remote Flash Info View the flash units currently controlled via radio AWL Option Description m Group flash Choose a separate flash control mode for each group of remote flash units 0 670 682 x Quick wireless control Choose the balance between groups A and B and adjust output for group C manually 0 673 686 u Remote repeating The flash units fire repeatedly while the shutter is open produci...

Page 830: ...For more information see Varying Exposure or White Balance over a Series of Photographs Bracketing 0 249 Auto Bracketing G button U C photo shooting menu Option Description Auto bracketing set Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing is in effect AE flash bracketing Perform both exposure and flash level bracketing AE bracketing Bracket only exposure Flash bracketing Perform on...

Page 831: ...adows by combining two shots taken at different exposures For more information see High Dynamic Range HDR 0 283 Increment Choose the amount the selected settings vary with each shot when an option other than ADL bracketing is selected for Auto bracketing set Amount Choose how Active D Lighting varies with each shot when ADL bracketing is selected for Auto bracketing set Multiple Exposure G button ...

Page 832: ...ie For more information see Creating a Movie from Photos Time Lapse Movie 0 348 Focus shift automatically varies focus over a series of shots Use it to take photos that will later be combined using focus stacking to create a single image with increased depth of field For more information see Varying Focus over a Series of Photos Focus Shift Shooting 0 360 Interval Timer Shooting G button U C photo...

Page 833: ... shutter during live view photography to mute shutter sounds and eliminate the vibrations produced by the mechanical shutter For more information see The Electronic Shutter Silent Live View Photography 0 374 Silent Live View Photography G button U C photo shooting menu ...

Page 834: ...enu 783 File naming 783 Destination 783 Image area 784 Frame size frame rate 784 Movie quality 785 Movie file type 785 ISO sensitivity settings 786 White balance 787 Set Picture Control 788 Manage Picture Control 788 Active D Lighting 788 High ISO NR 789 Diffraction compensation 789 Flicker reduction 790 Electronic VR 791 Microphone sensitivity 792 Attenuator 793 Frequency response 793 Wind noise ...

Page 835: ...s are stored the default prefix is DSC 0 760 Choose the slot to which movies are recorded when two memory cards are inserted The menu shows the time available on each card Recording ends automatically when no time remains on the current card Reset Movie Shooting Menu G button U 1 movie shooting menu File Naming G button U 1 movie shooting menu Destination G button U 1 movie shooting menu ...

Page 836: ...ther the camera automatically uses the DX image area for movies recorded with a DX lens Choose the movie frame size in pixels and frame rate For more information see Frame Size Frame Rate and Movie Quality 0 294 Image Area G button U 1 movie shooting menu Frame Size Frame Rate G button U 1 movie shooting menu ...

Page 837: ...formation see Frame Size Frame Rate and Movie Quality 0 294 Record movies in MOV or MP4 format The audio recording format varies with movie file format Linear PCM is used for MOV files and AAC for MP4 files Movie Quality G button U 1 movie shooting menu Movie File Type G button U 1 movie shooting menu ...

Page 838: ...selected value serves as the upper limit for ISO sensitivity in modes P S and A and when On is selected for Auto ISO control mode M in mode M Auto ISO control mode M On Enable auto ISO sensitivity control in mode M Off Disable auto ISO sensitivity control in mode M and instead use the value selected for ISO sensitivity mode M Regardless of the option selected auto ISO sensitivity control is used i...

Page 839: ...ISO sensitivities At high ISO sensitivities the camera may have difficulty focusing The foregoing can be prevented by choosing a lower value for ISO sensitivity settings Maximum sensitivity Choose the white balance for movies Select Same as photo settings to use the option currently selected for photos 0 764 White Balance G button U 1 movie shooting menu ...

Page 840: ...ently selected for photos 0 764 Save modified Picture Controls as custom Picture Controls 0 765 Preserve details in highlights and shadows creating movies with natural contrast 0 281 Set Picture Control G button U 1 movie shooting menu Manage Picture Control G button U 1 movie shooting menu Active D Lighting G button U 1 movie shooting menu ...

Page 841: ...ing Options Reduce noise randomly spaced bright pixels in movies recorded at high ISO sensitivities 0 768 Reduce diffraction in movies 0 770 High ISO NR G button U 1 movie shooting menu Diffraction Compensation G button U 1 movie shooting menu ...

Page 842: ... supply D Flicker Reduction If Auto fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the frequency of the local power supply test both the 50 and 60 Hz options and choose the one that produces the best results Flicker reduction may not produce the desired results if the subject is very bright If this is the case try choosing a smaller aperture higher f number Flicker reduction may fai...

Page 843: ...e electronic vibration reduction during filming Electronic vibration reduction is not available at frame sizes of 3840 2160 or 1920 1080 crop Note that when On is selected for electronic vibration reduction the angle of view will be reduced slightly increasing the apparent focal length The maximum sensitivity for movie recording is fixed at ISO 102400 Off Electronic vibration reduction is disabled...

Page 844: ...f selected for Microphone sensitivity are indicated by a 2 icon Microphone Sensitivity G button U 1 movie shooting menu Option Description Auto Microphone sensitivity is adjusted automatically Manual Adjust microphone sensitivity manually Choose from values of from 1 to 20 The higher the value the higher the sensitivity the lower the value the lower the sensitivity Microphone off Turn sound record...

Page 845: ...nts Choose the frequency response of external microphones and the built in movie microphone Attenuator G button U 1 movie shooting menu Frequency Response G button U 1 movie shooting menu Option Description S Wide range Record a wide range of frequencies Choose for everything from music to the bustling hum of a city street T Vocal range Choose for human voices ...

Page 846: ...other sounds may also be affected Selecting On for Wind noise reduction has no effect on optional stereo microphones Wind noise reduction for optional stereo microphones that support this feature can be enabled or disabled using microphone controls Press 1 or 3 to adjust headphone volume Wind Noise Reduction G button U 1 movie shooting menu Headphone Volume G button U 1 movie shooting menu ...

Page 847: ... zone and date in the setup menu and make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date Timecode G button U 1 movie shooting menu Option Description Record timecodes On Record time codes The time code appears in the monitor On with HDMI output Time codes will be included with footage saved to external recorders connected to the camera via an HDMI cable The camera supports Atomos S...

Page 848: ...e codes are incremented continuously Time codes continue to be incremented while the camera is off Timecode origin Reset Reset the time code to 00 00 00 00 Enter manually Enter the hour minute second and frame number manually Current time Set the time code to the current time as reported by the camera clock Drop frame Select On to compensate for discrepancies between the frame count and the actual...

Page 849: ...ngs To view Custom Settings select the A tab in the camera menus Custom Settings are used to customize camera settings to suit individual preferences The Custom Settings menu is divided into two levels A Custom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings ...

Page 850: ...ore points by orientation 808 a6 AF activation 810 a7 Single point AF watch area 811 a8 3D tracking face detection 811 a9 Group area AF face detection 812 a10 Custom groupings C1 C2 812 a11 Auto area AF face detection 812 a12 Auto area AF starting point 813 a13 Focus point persistence 813 a14 Limit AF area mode selection 814 a15 Autofocus mode restrictions 815 a16 Focus point wrap around 815 a17 F...

Page 851: ...ndby timer 822 c3 Self timer 823 c4 Monitor off delay 823 Item 0 d Shooting display d1 Continuous shooting speed 824 d2 Max continuous release 825 d3 Limit release mode selection 826 d4 Sync release mode options 826 d5 Exposure delay mode 827 d6 Electronic front curtain shutter 827 d7 Extended shutter speeds M 828 d8 Limit selectable image area 829 d9 File number sequence 830 d10 Peaking highlight...

Page 852: ...to bracketing mode M 841 e8 Bracketing order 842 e9 Bracketing burst options 843 Item 0 f Controls f1 Customize i menu 844 f2 Customize i menu Lv 846 f3 Custom controls 850 f4 Multi selector center button 863 f5 Shutter spd aperture lock 867 f6 Customize command dials 867 f7 Multi selector 872 f8 Release button to use dial 872 f9 Reverse indicators 873 f10 Live view button options 874 f11 D switch...

Page 853: ...lt values are indicated by asterisks U 2 Available with compatible lenses only 3 Available only with compatible AF P lenses not equipped with a vibration reduction switch g Movie g1 Customize i menu 877 g2 Custom controls 879 g3 Multi selector center button 884 g4 Highlight display 884 Item 0 ...

Page 854: ...of the four banks using Custom Settings bank and adjust settings as desired Renaming Custom Settings Banks A descriptive caption can be added to the bank name A B C or D by highlighting the bank and pressing 2 Captions can be up to 20 characters long A Custom Settings Banks The information and top control panel displays show the current Custom Settings bank as O followed by bank name A B C or D Cu...

Page 855: ...estoring Default Settings You can restore default settings for a selected Custom Settings bank To do so highlight the bank and press O Q a confirmation dialog will be displayed Highlight Yes and press J to restore default settings for the selected bank ...

Page 856: ... priority B Focus release Photos can be taken even when the camera is not in focus but if the subject is dark or low contrast and the camera is in continuous release mode priority will be given to focus for the first shot in each series For the remaining shots priority will be given to frame rate regardless of focus This helps ensure that the first shot in each series is in focus E Release focus P...

Page 857: ... while the button is kept in this position Choose how quickly focus responds if something passes between the subject and the camera during viewfinder photography when AF C is selected for autofocus mode a2 AF S Priority Selection G button U A Custom Settings menu Option Description G Release Photos can be taken whenever the shutter release button is pressed release priority F Focus Photos can be t...

Page 858: ...ted Subject Motion Option Description 5 Delayed Choose how quickly focus responds when something passes between the subject and the camera Choose 5 Delayed to help maintain focus on your original subject Choose 1 Quick to make it easier to shift focus to objects crossing your field of view 4 3 2 1 Quick Option Description Steady Choose for smooth focus when photographing subjects that approach the...

Page 859: ... area mode during viewfinder photography Choose 27 points or 15 points for quick focus point selection Different groupings are available when Group area AF is selected for AF area mode The groupings available when Group area AF C1 or Group area AF C2 is selected vary with the dimensions of the group a4 Focus Points Used G button U A Custom Settings menu 105 points 27 points 15 points ...

Page 860: ...entation for tall portrait orientation with the camera rotated 90 clockwise and for tall orientation with the camera rotated 90 counterclockwise The selected option applies only during viewfinder photography Select Off to use the same focus point regardless of camera orientation a5 Store Points by Orientation G button U A Custom Settings menu ...

Page 861: ...tom Settings Fine Tuning Camera Settings Choose Focus point to enable separate focus point selection To enable separate selection of both the focus point and the AF area mode choose Focus point and AF area mode ...

Page 862: ...utter release button is pressed halfway Option Description Enable Photos can be taken whenever the shutter release button is pressed release priority Disable Pictures can only be taken when the camera is able to focus note that this only applies if Focus is selected for Custom Setting a1 AF C priority selection and an option other than Auto area AF is selected for AF area mode or Focus is selected...

Page 863: ... a7 Single Point AF Watch Area G button U A Custom Settings menu Option Description Normal The camera locates subjects based solely on data from the vicinity of the selected point Wide The camera uses data from surrounding areas to locate subjects slightly outside the selected focus point Use for fast moving subjects If Wide is selected the AF area mode indicators in the viewfinder and top control...

Page 864: ...gs for Group area AF C1 or Group area AF C2 a total of 17 different options are available For more information see Custom Focus Groups 0 167 Choose whether the camera detects and focuses on faces when Auto area AF is selected for AF area mode a9 Group Area AF Face Detection G button U A Custom Settings menu a10 Custom Groupings C1 C2 G button U A Custom Settings menu a11 Auto Area AF Face Detectio...

Page 865: ...er you change AF area modes using a control to which AF area mode or AF area mode AF ON has been assigned via Custom Setting f3 Custom controls This only applies if you change AF area modes while focusing with the shutter release button pressed halfway Focus point persistence applies if while the control is pressed you switch from an AF area mode such as Auto area AF in which the focus point is ch...

Page 866: ...ight it and press 2 again Modes marked with a check M are available for selection via the sub command dial Press J to save changes when settings are complete Limit AF area mode selection applies only during viewfinder photography It has no effect during live view Option Description Auto The focus point last chosen by the camera before you switched AF area modes remains in effect Off The focus poin...

Page 867: ... selected focus point selection will wrap around from top to bottom bottom to top right to left and left to right so that for example pressing 2 when a focus point at the right edge of the viewfinder display is highlighted selects the corresponding focus point at the left edge of the display Choose from the viewfinder focus point display options below a15 Autofocus Mode Restrictions G button U A C...

Page 868: ...d focus point and the surrounding focus points used to assist the focus operation in dynamic area AF area mode Option Description On The focus point is displayed at all times in manual focus mode Off The focus point is displayed only during focus point selection Option Description On Display both the selected focus point and surrounding focus points Off Display only the selected focus point On Dyn...

Page 869: ...n U A Custom Settings menu Option Description Enable Autofocus can be overridden by rotating the lens focus ring autofocus with manual override The focus ring can be used for manual focus while the shutter release button is pressed halfway To refocus using autofocus lift your finger from the shutter release button and then press it halfway again Disable The lens focus ring cannot be used for manua...

Page 870: ...y will be set to the nearest available value Select the increments used for adjustments to shutter speed aperture and bracketing Select the increments used when making adjustments to exposure and flash compensation b Metering Exposure b1 ISO Sensitivity Step Value G button U A Custom Settings menu b2 EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl G button U A Custom Settings menu b3 Exp Flash Comp Step Value G butto...

Page 871: ...exposure mode b4 Easy Exposure Compensation G button U A Custom Settings menu Option Description On Auto reset Adjustments can be made using only a command dial Settings selected with a command dial alone are reset when the camera is turned off or the standby timer expires On Adjustments can be made using only a command dial Exposure compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off or the s...

Page 872: ... weighted area is used to choose the size of the area given the greatest weight when Center weighted metering is selected If a non CPU or AF S Fisheye NIKKOR 8 15 mm f 3 5 4 5E ED lens is attached the size of the area is fixed at a diameter of 12 mm b5 Matrix Metering G button U A Custom Settings menu Option Description U Face detection on Matrix metering assigns priority to faces detected by the ...

Page 873: ...7 Fine tune optimal exposure fine tunes exposure separately for each Custom Settings bank Be aware of different fine tuning values for Custom Setting b7 when switching banks Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting b7 Fine tune optimal exposure the exposure compensation icon E will not be displayed The only way to determine how much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in th...

Page 874: ...r speed and aperture displays in the top control panel turn off automatically when the standby timer expires Choose a shorter standby timer delay for longer battery life c Timers AE Lock c1 Shutter Release Button AE L G button U A Custom Settings menu Option Description O On half press Pressing the shutter release button halfway locks exposure P On burst mode Exposure only locks while the shutter ...

Page 875: ...nformation display and Live view Choose shorter monitor off delays for greater battery endurance c3 Self Timer G button U A Custom Settings menu Option Description Self timer delay Choose the length of the shutter release delay Number of shots Press 1 and 3 to choose the number of shots taken each time the shutter release button is pressed choose from values of from 1 to 9 Interval between shots C...

Page 876: ...nu Option Description Continuous high speed Set the frame advance rate for continuous high speed CH mode to values between 14 fps and 10 fps Continuous low speed Set the frame advance rate for continuous low speed CL mode to values between 10 fps and 1 fps Quiet shutter release Set the frame advance rate for burst photography in mode Q to values between 5 fps and 1 fps To take only one picture wit...

Page 877: ...single burst when a shutter speed of 4 s or slower is selected in mode S or M D The Memory Buffer Custom Setting d2 Max continuous release is used to select the number of shots that can be taken in a single burst The number of shots that can be taken before the memory buffer fills and shooting slows varies with image quality and other settings When the buffer is full the camera will display r00 an...

Page 878: ... the check from U a selected option highlight it and press 2 again Modes marked with a check M are available for selection via the main command dial Press J to save changes when settings are complete Choose whether the shutters on remote cameras controlled via an optional wireless transmitter or wireless remote controller synchronize with the shutter on the master camera d3 Limit Release Mode Sele...

Page 879: ... electronic front curtain shutter Enabling the electronic front curtain shutter helps reduce blur caused by camera shake The electronic front curtain shutter is available in Q and MUP release modes d5 Exposure Delay Mode G button U A Custom Settings menu d6 Electronic Front Curtain Shutter G button U A Custom Settings menu Option Description Enable Enable the electronic front curtain shutter Disab...

Page 880: ... than Q and MUP The fastest shutter speed and maximum ISO sensitivity available with the electronic front curtain shutter are 1 2000 s and ISO 102400 respectively Extend the range of shutter speeds available in mode M the slowest shutter speed available when On is selected is 900 s 15 minutes Extended shutter speeds can be used for pictures of the night sky and other long exposures To use extended...

Page 881: ...m Setting f3 Custom controls Highlight an option and press 2 to select selected items are marked with a check M To deselect remove the check from U a selected option highlight it and press 2 again Image area options marked with a check M are available for selection via a command dial Press J to save changes when settings are complete d8 Limit Selectable Image Area G button U A Custom Settings menu...

Page 882: ...mory card is inserted file numbering restarts from 0001 If the current folder already contains images file numbering will instead continue from the highest file number in the current folder If you select Off after selecting On the camera will store the current file number File numbering will resume from the previously stored value the next time On is selected Reset Reset the file numbering for On ...

Page 883: ...containing over 5000 files or the current folder contains a picture numbered 9999 in addition movie recording will be disabled if the camera calculates that the number of files needed to record a movie of the maximum length would result in a file numbered over 9999 To resume shooting choose Reset for Custom Setting d9 File number sequence and then either format the current memory card or insert a ...

Page 884: ...y a grid for reference when framing shots d10 Peaking Highlights G button U A Custom Settings menu Option Description Peaking level Choose from 3 high sensitivity 2 standard 1 low sensitivity and Off The higher the value the greater the depth that will be shown as being in focus Peaking highlight color Choose a peaking highlight color from Red Yellow Blue and White d11 Framing Grid Display G butto...

Page 885: ... is pressed If On is selected the backlights will light while the standby timer is active Note that this increases the drain on the battery The backlights will turn off while the shutter release button is pressed but will turn on again when the button is released d12 Rear Control Panel G button U A Custom Settings menu Option Description Release mode The camera displays the current release mode Fr...

Page 886: ...quipped with backlights 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 15 16 17 1 I button 2 BKT button 3 Release mode dial pointer 4 Y button 5 O Q button 6 K button 7 G button 8 g h Q button 9 X button 10 W M button 11 J button 12 Fn3 C button 13 S button 14 T button 15 a button 16 R button 17 U button ...

Page 887: ...ill turn off during exposures This item is available only with compatible AF P lenses not equipped with a vibration reduction switch Selecting On enables vibration reduction which takes effect whenever the shutter release button is pressed halfway Select Off to disable vibration reduction d14 Live View in Continuous Mode G button U A Custom Settings menu d15 Optical VR G button U A Custom Settings...

Page 888: ...the maximum sync speed for other flash units is set to 1 250 s When the camera shows a shutter speed of 1 250 s in mode P or A auto FP high speed sync will be activated if the actual shutter speed is faster than 1 250 s If the flash supports auto FP high speed sync the camera can select shutter speeds as fast as 1 8000 s In modes S and M the user can select shutter speeds as fast as 1 8000 s when ...

Page 889: ...to FP High Speed Sync Auto FP high speed sync allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by the camera When 1 250 s Auto FP is selected the camera automatically enables auto FP high speed sync at shutter speeds faster than the flash sync speed This makes it possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field even when the subject is backlit in bright sunlight...

Page 890: ...ync slow rear curtain sync or red eye reduction with slow sync Choose how the camera adjusts flash level when exposure compensation is used e2 Flash Shutter Speed G button U A Custom Settings menu e3 Exposure Comp for Flash G button U A Custom Settings menu Option Description Y E Entire frame The camera adjusts both the flash level and exposure This changes the exposure for the entire frame E Back...

Page 891: ...s enabled e4 Auto N ISO Sensitivity Control G button U A Custom Settings menu Option Description e Subject and background The camera takes both the main subject and background lighting into account when adjusting ISO sensitivity f Subject only ISO sensitivity is adjusted only to ensure that the main subject is correctly exposed ...

Page 892: ...gs menu Option Description S Prioritize frame advance rate The flash unit emits a monitor pre flash before the first shot in each sequence and locks output at the metered value for the remaining shots The frame advance rate drops less than when Prioritize precise flash control is selected An FV lock icon r is displayed in the viewfinder during burst photography y Prioritize precise flash control T...

Page 893: ...r Flash aperture is selected for Custom Setting e7 ISO sensitivity will be fixed at the value for the first shot in each bracketing sequence e7 Auto Bracketing Mode M G button U A Custom Settings menu Custom Setting e7 Auto bracketing Mode M Photo shooting menu Auto bracketing set AE flash AE only F Flash speed Shutter speed and flash level Shutter speed G Flash speed aperture Shutter speed apertu...

Page 894: ...ing order has no effect on the order of the shots taken when ADL bracketing is selected for Auto bracketing Auto bracketing set in the photo shooting menu e8 Bracketing Order G button U A Custom Settings menu Option Description H MTR under over The unmodified shot is taken first followed by the shot with the lowest value followed by the shot with the highest value I Under MTR over Shooting proceed...

Page 895: ...era will repeat the bracketing sequence while the shutter release button is pressed all the way down If WB bracketing is selected for Auto bracketing set in the photo shooting menu the camera will take pictures while the shutter release button is pressed all the way down and apply white balance bracketing to each shot regardless of the option chosen for release mode Disable In release modes S and ...

Page 896: ...mizing the i Menu Customize i Menu 0 377 f Controls f1 Customize i Menu G button U A Custom Settings menu Item 0 n Photo shooting menu bank 752 J Choose image area 136 8 Image quality 142 o Image size 145 E Exposure compensation 199 9 ISO sensitivity settings 213 m White balance 221 h Set Picture Control 271 p Color space 765 y Active D Lighting 281 Long exposure NR 767 High ISO NR 768 w Metering ...

Page 897: ...ng 249 Multiple exposure 318 2 HDR high dynamic range 283 7 Interval timer shooting 331 8 Time lapse movie 348 Item 0 9 Focus shift shooting 360 E Select custom settings bank 802 F Focus tracking with lock on 805 w Custom controls 850 z Exposure delay mode 827 x Electronic front curtain shutter 827 Z Bluetooth connection 929 U Wi Fi connection 932 j Wired LAN WT 937 Item 0 ...

Page 898: ... G button U A Custom Settings menu Item 0 J Choose image area 136 8 Image quality 142 o Image size 145 E Exposure compensation 199 9 ISO sensitivity settings 213 m White balance 221 h Set Picture Control 271 p Color space 765 y Active D Lighting 281 Long exposure NR 767 High ISO NR 768 w Metering 178 N Flash mode 648 Y Flash compensation 653 m Group flash options 670 D Autofocus mode 151 t AF area...

Page 899: ...s shift shooting 360 L Silent live view photography 374 w Custom controls 850 Item 0 z Exposure delay mode 827 x Electronic front curtain shutter 827 W Peaking highlights 832 3 Monitor brightness 889 k Photo live view display WB 848 Z Bluetooth connection 929 U Wi Fi connection 932 j Wired LAN WT 937 z Split screen display zoom 849 Item 0 ...

Page 900: ...ken with an option such as Flash or Preset manual selected for photographic white balance Matching monitor hue to photographic white balance gives you a more accurate preview of how pictures will turn out Monitor white balance is reset when the camera is turned off Option Description None Monitor hue matches photographic white balance Auto The monitor uses Keep white reduce warm colors white balan...

Page 901: ...side by side showing the two areas at a high zoom ratio split screen display zoom The boxes display magnified views of the areas indicated by the frames r in the navigation window Use the X and W M buttons to zoom in and out Press 4 or 2 to scroll the selected area left or right Use the g h Q button to select a box Press 1 or 3 to scroll both areas up or down simultaneously To focus on the subject...

Page 902: ... by the controls below Highlight the desired control and press J f3 Custom Controls G button U A Custom Settings menu 0 Preview button v Fn1 button x Fn2 button s Fn button for vertical shooting z Fn3 button V AF ON button 7 Sub selector 8 Sub selector center l AF ON button for vertical shooting m Multi selector for vertical shooting 2 Metering button n BKT button 3 Movie record button S Lens focu...

Page 903: ...oints can be selected for wide landscape orientation and for each of the two tall portrait orientations if an option other than Off is selected for Custom Setting a5 Store points by orientation The behavior of the selected control can be chosen by pressing 2 when Preset focus point is highlighted Press to recall focus point Pressing the control recalls the preset focus point Hold to recall focus p...

Page 904: ...initiates autofocus duplicating the function of the AF ON button F AF lock only Focus locks while the control is pressed E AE lock Hold Exposure locks when the control is pressed Exposure lock does not end when the shutter is released Exposure remains locked until the control is pressed a second time or the standby timer expires X AE AWB lock hold Exposure locks when the control is pressed If Auto...

Page 905: ...ssed r FV lock Press the control to lock flash value for optional flash units press again to cancel FV lock h N Disable enable If the flash is currently enabled it will be disabled while the control is pressed If the flash is currently off front curtain sync will be selected while the control is pressed q Preview Viewfinder photography Hold the control to stop aperture down and preview depth of fi...

Page 906: ...eed and aperture can be changed by holding the control and rotating a command dial In mode P you can adjust flexible program settings If an option other than Off is selected for Custom Setting b4 Easy exposure compensation exposure compensation can be adjusted by rotating a command dial Settings cannot be saved or recalled if a non CPU lens or a PC Micro Nikkor 85mm f 2 8D lens is attached a CPU l...

Page 907: ...acketing program and repeat the bracketing burst while the shutter release button is pressed In release modes S and Q shooting will end after the first bracketing burst If the control is kept pressed when WB bracketing is selected for Auto bracketing Auto bracketing set the camera will take pictures while the shutter release button is pressed and apply white balance bracketing to each shot Selecti...

Page 908: ...ions are available when Sync is selected for Sync release mode options c Master release only Keep the control pressed to take pictures with the master camera only d Remote release only Keep the control pressed to take pictures only with the remote cameras The following options are available when No sync is selected for Sync release mode options 6 Synchronized release Keep the control pressed to sy...

Page 909: ...W recording and Image size NEF RAW in the photo shooting menu b Framing grid display Press the control to display a framing grid in the viewfinder or monitor Press the control again to turn the display off Viewfinder virtual horizon Press the control to view a virtual horizon display in the viewfinder Press the control again to turn the display off b Voice memo Use the control for voice memo opera...

Page 910: ...load to a computer via Ethernet or using a wireless transmitter K Select center focus point Press the control to select the center focus point G Same as AF ON button The control performs the role currently selected for the AF ON button n Photo shooting menu bank Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose the photo shooting menu bank z AF mode AF area mode Hold the control and rotate the...

Page 911: ...ents of 1 EV regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl In modes S and M shutter speed can be adjusted in increments of 1 EV by holding the control and rotating the main command dial In modes A and M aperture can be adjusted in increments of 1 EV by holding the control and rotating the sub command dial w Choose non CPU lens number Press the control and rota...

Page 912: ... press 2 If an option other than None is selected the chosen rating can be assigned to pictures simply by pressing the selected control Pressing the control again selects a no star rating t Auto bracketing Press the control and rotate the main command dial to choose the number of shots and the sub command dial to select the bracketing increment or Active D Lighting amount Multiple exposure Press t...

Page 913: ... by the control during playback using Photo info playback If Info C Playback D is selected you can press the control up or down to display other pictures left or right to view photo info If this option is assigned to the multi selector for vertical shooting the role played by the center of the multi selector for vertical shooting is the same as that performed by the center of the multi selector x ...

Page 914: ... control to which Press Viewfinder virtual horizon has been assigned the camera will display pitch and roll indicators in the viewfinder based on information from its built in tilt sensor These indicators can be read as follows Roll Camera tilted right Camera level Camera tilted left ...

Page 915: ...ators when held at angles at which tilt cannot be measured The roles of the pitch and roll indicators are reversed when the camera is rotated to take pictures in tall portrait orientation Choose the role assigned to the center of the multi selector during playback and still photography Camera tilted forward Camera level Camera tilted back f4 Multi Selector Center Button G button U A Custom Setting...

Page 916: ...d for wide landscape orientation and for each of the two tall portrait orientations if an option other than Off is selected for Custom Setting a5 Store points by orientation The behavior of the center of the multi selector can be chosen by pressing 2 when Preset focus point is highlighted Press to recall focus point Pressing the center of the multi selector recalls the preset focus point Hold to r...

Page 917: ...lects the center focus point X Zoom on off Press the center of the multi selector to zoom the display in on the area around the current focus point the zoom ratio is selected in advance Press again to return to the previous display To choose the zoom ratio highlight Zoom on off and press 2 None Pressing the center of the multi selector has no effect ...

Page 918: ... frame thumbnail playback o View histograms A histogram is displayed while the center of the multi selector is pressed The histogram display is available in both full frame and thumbnail playback X Zoom on off Press the center of the multi selector to zoom the display in on the area around the active focus point the zoom ratio is selected in advance Press again to return to the previous display To...

Page 919: ...de S or M Selecting On for Aperture lock locks aperture at the value currently selected in mode A or M Shutter speed and aperture lock are not available in mode P Customize the operation of the main and sub command dials f5 Shutter Spd Aperture Lock G button U A Custom Settings menu f6 Customize Command Dials G button U A Custom Settings menu ...

Page 920: ...oting Change Main Sub Reverse the roles of the main and sub command dials The changes apply also to the command dials for vertical shooting Option Description Exposure setting If On is selected the main command dial will control aperture and the sub command dial shutter speed If On Mode A is selected the main command dial will be used to set aperture in mode A only Autofocus setting If On is selec...

Page 921: ... command dial Regardless of the option selected for Aperture setting aperture for non CPU lenses must be adjusted using the lens aperture ring Option Description Sub command dial Aperture can only be adjusted with the sub command dial or with the main command dial if On is selected for Change main sub Exposure setting Aperture ring Aperture can be adjusted with the lens aperture ring The camera ap...

Page 922: ... used to skip forward or back according to the option selected for Sub dial frame advance During thumbnail playback the main command dial can be used to highlight thumbnails and the sub command dial to page up or down Menus Use the main command dial to highlight menu items Rotating the sub command dial clockwise displays the sub menu for the highlighted option Rotating it counter clockwise display...

Page 923: ...and playback Option Description 10 frames Skip forward or back 10 frames at a time 50 frames Skip forward or back 50 frames at a time c Rating Skip to the next or previous pictures with the selected rating To choose the rating highlight Rating and press 2 P Protect Skip to the next or previous protected picture C Still images only Skip to the next or previous photo 1 Movies only Skip to the next o...

Page 924: ...d again the shutter release button is pressed halfway or the standby timer expires Release button to use dial applies to the E S Q I BKT Y W M S T U and AF mode buttons Release button to use dial also applies to controls to which the following roles have been assigned using Custom Settings f3 Custom controls Exposure mode Exposure compensation AF mode AF area mode ISO sensitivity Active D Lighting...

Page 925: ...he left and positive values on the right or with positive values on the left and negative values on the right f9 Reverse Indicators G button U A Custom Settings menu Option Description V The indicator is displayed with positive values on the left and negative values on the right W The indicator is displayed with negative values on the left and positive values on the right ...

Page 926: ...e control panel and button backlights or also turns on the information display f10 Live View Button Options G button U A Custom Settings menu Option Description Enable Pressing the a button starts live view f Enable standby timer active Pressing the a button starts live view only when the standby timer is active Disable Pressing the a button does not start live view f11 D Switch G button U A Custo...

Page 927: ...ame Playback Flicks G button U A Custom Settings menu Option Description Rating Assign the current picture a pre selected rating The rating can be chosen by pressing 2 Select to send wired LAN WT Mark the current picture for upload to a computer or ftp server to which the camera is connected via Ethernet or using a wireless transmitter Protect Protect the current picture Voice memo Flick to start ...

Page 928: ...ning Camera Settings Flick Advance Direction Choose the gesture used for frame advance Option Description S Left Right Flick from right to left to view the next picture T Left Right Flick from left to right to view the next picture ...

Page 929: ...0 377 g Movie g1 Customize i Menu G button U A Custom Settings menu Item 0 J Choose image area 292 G Frame size and rate Image quality 294 N Destination 783 E Exposure compensation 199 9 ISO sensitivity settings 786 m White balance 787 h Set Picture Control 788 y Active D Lighting 788 w Metering 178 D Autofocus mode 151 t AF area mode 160 4 Electronic VR 791 H Microphone sensitivity 792 5 Attenuat...

Page 930: ...omp Choose whether the multi selector can be used to adjust exposure compensation Selecting Enable allows exposure compensation to be set by pressing 1 or 3 7 Wind noise reduction 794 8 Headphone volume 794 w Custom controls 879 W Peaking highlights 832 9 Highlight display 884 3 Monitor brightness 889 Item 0 Z Bluetooth connection 929 U Wi Fi connection 932 j Wired LAN WT 937 W Multi selector powe...

Page 931: ... or by pressing controls and rotating command dials during filming Choose the roles played by the controls below Highlight the desired control and press J g2 Custom Controls G button U A Custom Settings menu Option 0 Preview button v Fn1 button x Fn2 button z Fn3 button 8 Sub selector center G Shutter release button ...

Page 932: ... Custom controls Preview button Power aperture open for button controlled aperture adjustment i Exposure compensation Exposure compensation increases while the Pv button is pressed Use in combination with Custom Setting g2 Custom controls Fn1 button Exposure compensation for button controlled exposure compensation h Exposure compensation Exposure compensation decreases while the Fn1 button is pres...

Page 933: ...he control to select the center focus point F AF lock only Focus locks while the control is pressed E AE lock Hold Exposure locks when the control is pressed Exposure lock does not end when the shutter is released Exposure remains locked until the control is pressed a second time or the standby timer expires X AE AWB lock hold Exposure locks when the control is pressed If Auto or Natural light aut...

Page 934: ...the focus mode selector is in the AF position you can then press the shutter release button halfway again to focus To start movie recording press the shutter release button the rest of the way down Press the shutter release button again to end recording When Record movies is selected the shutter release button cannot be used for any purpose other than recording movies To end live view press the a ...

Page 935: ...not be used The display may flicker while aperture is adjusted J Choose image area Press the control and rotate a command dial to choose the image area for movies Note that the image area cannot be changed while recording is in progress H Microphone sensitivity Press the control and rotate a command dial to adjust microphone sensitivity None The control has no effect Role Description ...

Page 936: ...ng the center of the multi selector selects the center focus point X Zoom on off Press the center of the multi selector to zoom the display in on the area around the current focus point the zoom ratio is selected in advance Press again to return to the previous display To choose the zoom ratio highlight Zoom on off and press 2 1 Record movies Press the center of the multi selector to start recordi...

Page 937: ... value the greater the range of brightnesses that will be shown as highlights If 255 is selected the highlight display will show only areas that are potentially overexposed D Highlight Display If both the highlight display and peaking highlights are enabled only peaking highlights will be displayed in manual focus mode To view the highlight display in manual focus mode select Off for Custom Settin...

Page 938: ...89 Monitor brightness 889 Monitor color balance 890 Virtual horizon 892 Information display 893 AF fine tuning options 894 Non CPU lens data 904 Clean image sensor 905 Lock mirror up for cleaning 906 Image Dust Off ref photo 906 Pixel mapping 910 Image comment 911 Copyright information 912 IPTC 914 Voice memo options 920 Beep options 923 Touch controls 924 HDMI 925 Location data built in 925 Wirel...

Page 939: ...es and other data on the card Before formatting be sure to make backup copies as required Assign remote WR Fn button 928 Airplane mode 929 Connect to smart device 929 Connect to PC built in Wi Fi 932 Item 0 Wired LAN WT 937 Conformity marking 949 Battery info 950 Slot empty release lock 951 Save load menu settings 952 Reset all settings 957 Firmware version 957 Item 0 Format Memory Card G button U...

Page 940: ...ttons O Q and S Q again to format the memory card shown by the flashing indicator in the top control panel If two memory cards are inserted the flashing indicator will show the card selected for formatting To select a different card rotate the main command dial while the C indicator is flashing Do not turn the camera off or remove the battery or memory card during formatting Choose a language for ...

Page 941: ...uced brightness Time Zone and Date G button U B setup menu Option Description Time zone Choose a time zone Date and time is automatically set to the time in the new time zone Date and time Set the camera clock to the time in the selected Time zone Date format Choose the order in which the day month and year are displayed Daylight saving time Select On to turn daylight saving time on Off to turn it...

Page 942: ...2 to adjust color balance as shown below Press J to save changes Monitor color balance applies only to menus playback and the view through the lens displayed during live view pictures taken with the camera are not affected Monitor Color Balance G button U B setup menu 1 3 2 4 1 Increase green 2 Increase amber 3 Increase magenta 4 Increase blue ...

Page 943: ... mode the picture last displayed If the memory card contains no pictures an empty frame will be displayed instead To choose a different picture press the W M button Highlight the desired picture and press J to select it as the reference image To view the highlighted picture full frame press and hold X ...

Page 944: ... nor back the dot I in the center of the display will turn green Each division is equivalent to 5 D The Virtual Horizon Display Note that the display may not be accurate when the camera is tilted at a sharp angle forward or back The camera will not display pitch and roll indicators when held at angles at which tilt cannot be measured Virtual Horizon G button U B setup menu Camera level Camera tilt...

Page 945: ...r of the lettering in the information display to make it easier to read Black is used in bright locations a dim white in dark locations Manual Manually choose the color of the lettering w Dark on light To make the display easier to read in bright locations the monitor lights and the lettering is displayed in black x Light on dark To make the display easier to read in dark locations the monitor dim...

Page 946: ... AF Fine Tuning Options G button U B setup menu Option Description AF fine tune on off On Turn AF fine tuning on Off Turn AF fine tuning off Fine tune and save lens Fine tune focus for the current CPU lens 0 897 The camera can store values for up to 40 lens types The camera will not save fine tuning values for non CPU lenses New values overwrite existing values Default Choose the fine tuning value...

Page 947: ...ber dialog is used to choose the lens identifier Choosing a unique identifier such as the last two digits of the lens serial number helps you distinguish between multiple lenses of the same type With some lenses the serial number will automatically be entered as the lens identifier Choose value for current lens Choose from multiple fine tuning values saved for lenses of the same type Option Descri...

Page 948: ...ofocus during live view photography D Teleconverters Separate values can be saved for lenses with teleconverters attached even if values already exist for the same lenses without teleconverters D Deleting Saved Values To delete values saved using Fine tune and save lens highlight the desired lens in the List saved values list and press O Q ...

Page 949: ...to the camera 2 Select AF fine tuning options in the setup menu then highlight Fine tune and save lens and press 2 An AF fine tuning dialog will be displayed The options displayed vary with whether the attached lens is a zoom lens or has a fixed focal length Zoom lens Fixed focal length lens ...

Page 950: ...ues for maximum angle WIDE and maximum zoom TELE Use 1 and 3 to choose between the two The larger the fine tuning value the farther the focal point is from the lens the smaller the value the closer the focal point 4 Press J to save the new value A Auto AF Fine Tuning You can fine tune autofocus automatically while viewing the results in the live view display 0 900 Pressing the W M button in Step 3...

Page 951: ...ighlight Default and press 2 2 Press 4 or 2 to fine tune autofocus Choose from values between 20 and 20 The current value is shown by g the previously selected value by j The larger the fine tuning value the farther the focal point is from the lens the smaller the value the closer the focal point 3 Press J to save the new value ...

Page 952: ...Camera Setup Auto AF Fine Tuning To use auto AF fine tuning 1 Rotate the live view selector to C and press the a button 2 Press the AF mode and movie record buttons simultaneously and keep them pressed for over two seconds ...

Page 953: ...t maximum angle and maximum zoom Highlight WIDE maximum angle or TELE maximum zoom and press J the camera will select the center focus point and the auto AF fine tuning dialog will be displayed Fixed Focal Length Lenses The camera will select the center focus point and the auto AF fine tuning dialog will be displayed ...

Page 954: ...e focusing Before focusing mount the camera on a tripod and aim the camera at a flat high contrast subject parallel to the camera focal plane Auto AF fine tuning works best at maximum aperture Zoom in on the view through the lens to confirm that the subject is in focus Focus can be adjusted manually if necessary Note that live view autofocus and auto AF fine tuning may not function in dark surroun...

Page 955: ...fine tuning is successful AF fine tune on off item will be set to On enabling AF fine tuning Zoom Lenses After completing AF fine tuning for either the maximum angle or maximum zoom you will need to repeat the process for the remaining item Press the X button select Overwrite value for existing lens and repeat Steps 2 to 4 5 Press J to save changes and exit ...

Page 956: ...uning value exists for the current lens you can choose to overwrite the existing value or save the new value separately in Step 2 Record data for non CPU lenses Recording the focal length and maximum aperture of non CPU lenses allows them to be used with some functions normally reserved for CPU lenses Non CPU Lens Data G button U B setup menu Option Description Lens number Choose a lens identifier...

Page 957: ...Image Sensor G button U B setup menu Option Description Clean now Perform image sensor cleaning immediately Clean at startup shutdown Clean at startup The image sensor is automatically cleaned each time the camera is turned on Clean at shutdown The image sensor is automatically cleaned during shutdown each time the camera is turned off Clean at startup shutdown The image sensor is cleaned automati...

Page 958: ...ation see Manual Cleaning 0 1078 Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in Capture NX D Image Dust Off processes NEF RAW images to mitigate effects caused by dust adhering to the low pass filter in front of the camera image sensor For more information refer to Capture NX D online help Lock Mirror Up for Cleaning G button U B setup menu Image Dust Off Ref Photo G button U B setup menu...

Page 959: ...lay the Image Dust Off ref photo dialog Highlight Clean sensor and then start and press J to clean the image sensor before starting The Image Dust Off ref photo dialog will be displayed when image sensor cleaning is complete F will appear in the viewfinder and control panel displays To exit without acquiring Image Dust Off reference data press G ...

Page 960: ...cus mode set focus to infinity manually 3 Press the shutter release button the rest of the way down to acquire Image Dust Off reference data The monitor turns off when the shutter release button is pressed If the reference object is too bright or too dark the camera may be unable to acquire Image Dust Off reference data in which case a message will be displayed and the camera will return to the di...

Page 961: ...Image Dust Off ref photo is not available when a non CPU lens is mounted on the camera An FX format CPU lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is recommended DX format lenses are not recommended When using a zoom lens zoom all the way in The same reference data can be used for photographs taken with different lenses or at different apertures Image Dust Off cannot be used with NEF RAW images re...

Page 962: ...prevent unexpected loss of power Attach the lens cap front cap and close the eyepiece shutter before performing pixel mapping 1 Select Pixel mapping in the setup menu Turn the camera on press the G button and select Pixel mapping in the setup menu 2 Select Start Pixel mapping will start 1 appears in the top control panel while the operation is in progress 3 Turn the camera off when pixel mapping i...

Page 963: ...g may not be available if the camera s internal temperature is elevated Create a comment that can be appended to subsequent images Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX i or Capture NX D Input Comment Input a comment up to 36 characters long Highlight Input comment and press 2 to display a text entry dialog For information on text entry see Text Entry 0 86 Image Comment G button U B setup m...

Page 964: ...all subsequent photographs D Photo Info Comments can be viewed on the Other shooting data page in the photo information display To display the Other shooting data page select M both Shooting data and Other shooting data for Playback display options in the playback menu Add copyright information to new photographs as they are taken Copyright information can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX i or in C...

Page 965: ...ch copyright information press 2 and confirm that a check M appears in the adjacent check box Press J to save changes and exit copyright information will be attached to all subsequent photographs D Copyright Information To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names disable Attach copyright information before lending or transferring the camera to another person You will also n...

Page 966: ...t info page select M both Shooting data and Copyright info for Playback display options in the playback menu IPTC presets can be created or edited on the camera and embedded in new photographs as described below You can also load IPTC presets created on a computer To create IPTC presets and save them to memory cards for later import use IPTC Preset Manager 0 919 IPTC G button U B setup menu ...

Page 967: ...dit or rename a preset highlight it and press 2 To create a new preset highlight Unused and press 2 Rename Rename the preset Edit IPTC information Display the selected preset 0 918 Selected fields can be edited as desired To copy a preset highlight it and press X Highlight the destination press J and name the copy Deleting Presets To delete presets highlight Delete and press 2 ...

Page 968: ... IPTC Data Embedded presets can be viewed on the IPTC data page of the camera photo information display To display the IPTC data page select M both Shooting data and IPTC data for Playback display options in the playback menu Copying Presets to a Memory Card To copy IPTC presets from the camera to a memory card choose Load save select Slot 1 or Slot 2 then highlight Copy to card and press 2 Highli...

Page 969: ...eview the highlighted preset press W M instead of pressing J After previewing the preset press J to proceed to the Select destination list Highlight a destination and press J to display a dialog where you can name the preset Name the preset as desired and press J to copy the preset to the camera In addition to the ten presets mentioned above the camera can store up to three XMP IPTC presets create...

Page 970: ...a longer name is created using a computer all characters after the eighteenth will be deleted The number of characters that may appear in each field is given below Any characters over the limit will be deleted Field Maximum length Caption 2000 Event ID 64 Headline 256 Object Name 256 City 256 State 256 Country 256 Category 3 Supp Cat Supplemental Categories 256 Byline 256 Byline Title 256 Writer E...

Page 971: ... Manager IPTC presets can be created on a computer and saved to memory cards using IPTC Preset Manager software IPTC Preset Manager can be downloaded free of charge from the URL below Instructions on use are available via online help https downloadcenter nikonimglib com A Creating IPTC Presets in a Web Browser When connected to the camera from a computer or smart device in http server mode 0 601 y...

Page 972: ...h is taken Voice Memo Options G button U B setup menu Option Description 7 Off Voice memos cannot be recorded in shooting mode 8 On Auto and manual Voice memos are recorded automatically when shooting ends Selecting On Auto and manual displays an Auto menu where you can select the recording time 9 Manual only Memos can be manually added to the most recent photograph ...

Page 973: ...on Disable Voice memos cannot be recorded in shooting mode if one already exists for most recent photograph Enable Each new voice memo overwrites the memo for the most recent photograph if any Option Description Press and hold Voice memos up to 60 seconds long can be recorded while the Fn3 C button is pressed Press to start stop Recording begins when the Fn3 C button is pressed and ends after abou...

Page 974: ...k over headphones if connected or the camera s built in speaker Press 1 or 3 to choose a volume between 1 and 15 Press J to save changes and exit HDMI Voice memos are output to the HDMI terminal at a fixed volume Off Voice memos cannot be played even using the Fn3 C button b icons are displayed when photographs for which memos exist are viewed in the monitor ...

Page 975: ...ote that this does not apply if AF C is selected for autofocus mode or if Release is selected for Custom Setting a2 AF S priority selection or characters are entered using the on screen keyboard Select Off touch controls only to disable the beep for touch controls while enabling it for other purposes Note that regardless of the settings selected for Beep options a beep will not sound when the came...

Page 976: ...settings for monitor touch controls Enable Disable Touch Controls Enable or disable touch controls Select Playback only to enable touch controls in playback mode only Glove Mode Selecting Enabled raises the sensitivity of the touch screen making it easier to use while wearing gloves Touch Controls G button U B setup menu ...

Page 977: ...choose a link mode for connection to optional radio controlled flash units that support Advanced Wireless Lighting D The WR R10 Wireless Remote Controller A WR A10 adapter is required when using the WR R10 Be sure the firmware for the WR R10 has been updated to the latest version version 3 0 or later For information on firmware updates see the Nikon website for your area HDMI G button U B setup me...

Page 978: ...ighting Be sure that the same mode is selected for the other devices Option Description Pairing The camera connects only to devices with which it has previously been paired Press the pairing button on the WR R10 wireless remote controller connected to the camera to pair it with other devices As the camera will not communicate with devices with which it has not been paired this option can be used t...

Page 979: ...igit PIN You can enter any four digit PIN of your choice Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits and press 1 or 3 to change Press J to enter and display the selected PIN This option is a good choice for photography featuring a large number of remote devices If there are multiple cameras present that share the same PIN the flash units will be under the sole control of the camera that connects first preven...

Page 980: ...ee Custom Setting f3 Custom controls for more information Performs the same function as the camera a button Assign Remote WR Fn Button G button U B setup menu Option A AF ON F AF lock only D AE lock Reset on release C AE lock only B AE AF lock r FV lock h N Disable enable q Preview 4 NEF RAW a Live view o Recall shooting functions None Option ...

Page 981: ... Fi functions The wireless functions of optional peripheral devices connected to the camera can only be disabled by disconnecting the devices Connect to smartphones or tablets smart devices via Bluetooth or Wi Fi Airplane Mode G button U B setup menu Connect to Smart Device G button U B setup menu ...

Page 982: ...nnect select a device from the list Bluetooth connection Select Enable to enable Bluetooth Option Description Auto select to send Select On to mark pictures for upload as they are taken Photos are uploaded in JPEG format at a size of 2 megapixels even if other upload size and format options are selected with the camera Photos taken during filming will not be uploaded They must be uploaded manually...

Page 983: ...e to Close Wi Fi connection Use Close Wi Fi connection to end the connection when desired Wi Fi Connection Settings Access the following Wi Fi settings Option Description SSID Choose the camera SSID Authentication encryption Choose OPEN or WPA2 PSK AES Password Choose the camera password Channel Choose a channel Select Auto to have the camera choose the channel automatically Select Manual to choos...

Page 984: ...n when the camera is off Location Data Smart Device Display latitude longitude altitude and UTC Universal Coordinated Time data downloaded from a smart device Connect to computers via Wi Fi Wi Fi Connection Select Enable to connect using the settings currently selected for Network settings Connect to PC Built in Wi Fi G button U B setup menu ...

Page 985: ...an press J to select a profile from a list To edit an existing profile highlight it and press 2 Option Description General Profile name Rename the profile The default profile name is the same as the network SSID Password protection Select On to require that a password be entered before the profile can be changed To change the password highlight On and press 2 ...

Page 986: ...the camera SSID Channel Choose Auto or Manual Authentication encryption Choose OPEN or WPA2 PSK AES Password If WPA2 PSK AES is selected for Authentication encryption you can choose the camera password TCP IP Adjust TCP IP settings for infrastructure connections An IP address is required If Enable is selected for Obtain automatically the IP address and sub net mask for infrastructure mode connecti...

Page 987: ... inserted in the camera Movies and photos taken during filming are not uploaded automatically when recording is complete They must instead be uploaded from the playback display 0 504 Delete After Send Select Yes to delete photographs from the camera memory card automatically once upload is complete Files marked for transfer before you selected Yes are not deleted Deletion may be suspended during s...

Page 988: ...akes effect when On is selected for Auto send JPEG JPEG Slot Selection Choose a source slot for auto upload when taking pictures with JPEG Slot 1 JPEG Slot 2 selected for Role played by card in Slot 2 in the photo shooting menu Deselect All Select Yes to remove transfer marking from all images Upload of images with a sending icon will immediately be terminated MAC Address View the MAC address ...

Page 989: ...rnet cable or optional WT 6 wireless transmitter Wired LAN WT Functions Select Enable to enable connection via Ethernet or a wireless transmitter The camera s built in Bluetooth and Wi Fi turn off Choose Hardware Choose the connection type Ethernet wired LAN or wireless LAN Wired LAN WT G button U B setup menu ...

Page 990: ...e network profiles To delete the highlighted profile press O Q To view information on the highlighted profile press g h Q To edit the highlighted profile 0 940 press W M Synchronized Release When a WT 6 wireless transmitter is connected the shutters on remote cameras can be synchronized with the release on a master camera For more information see Synchronized Release 0 628 1 2 3 4 1 Profile name 2...

Page 991: ... see Synchronizing Camera Clocks 0 633 Create Profile Create new network profiles For more information see Creating a Network Profile Ethernet 0 522 and Creating Network Profiles WT 6 0 544 Option Description Connection wizard Create a new profile with the help of a wizard Configure manually Enter FTP upload or HTTP server settings manually ...

Page 992: ...t Edit wireless TCP IP ftp and other settings for existing profiles Highlight a profile in the profile list and press W M to display Edit options Option Description Copy profile from card Copy profiles from the root directory of the memory card to the camera profile list Copy profile to card Copy profiles from the camera to the memory card Highlight a profile and press J to copy it to the memory c...

Page 993: ...tion Description Profile name Edit the profile name Password protection Enable password protection to prevent others from viewing network settings Option Description SSID Enter the name SSID of the network on which the host computer or ftp server is located This is a required field Communication mode Choose an option according to the type of network Infrastructure Connect via a wireless LAN access...

Page 994: ...network If the network uses encryption enter an encryption key the number and type of characters in the key vary with the type of encryption selected No encryption An encryption key is not required WEP 64 bit base 16 WEP 128 bit base 16 Enter a key of 10 64 bit or 26 128 bit hexadecimal digits Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits and press 1 or 3 to change WEP 64 bit ASCII WEP 128 bit ASCII Enter a ke...

Page 995: ... 128 bit ASCII is selected for Encryption choose a key index matching that used by the access point or host computer Authentication Encryption Open No encryption WEP 64 bit base 16 WEP 64 bit ASCII WEP 128 bit base 16 WEP 128 bit ASCII The only option available when Access point is selected for Communication mode is No encryption Shared WEP 64 bit base 16 WEP 64 bit ASCII WEP 128 bit base 16 WEP 1...

Page 996: ...in either case Select Enable to use an IP address and sub net mask supplied by a DHCP server or automatic private IP addressing Select Disable to enter the IP address Address and sub net mask Mask manually Gateway If the network requires a gateway address enter the address supplied by the network administrator Domain Name Server DNS If a Domain Name Server exists on the network enter the address s...

Page 997: ...d photos taken during filming are not uploaded automatically when recording is complete They must instead be uploaded from the playback display Option Description Server type Choose the ftp server type and enter the URL or IP address destination folder and port number An IP address is required PASV mode Select Enable to enable PASV mode Anonymous login Select Enable for anonymous login This option...

Page 998: ...ed regardless of the item selected for Custom Setting d9 File number sequence Files marked for transfer before you selected Yes are not deleted Deletion may be suspended during some camera operations Send File As When uploading NEF JPEG images choose whether to upload both the NEF RAW and JPEG files or only the JPEG copy The option chosen for Send file as takes effect when On is selected for Auto ...

Page 999: ...se No to add numbers to the names of newly uploaded files as necessary to prevent existing files being overwritten Protect If Marked to Send Select Yes to automatically protect files marked for upload Protection is removed as the files are uploaded Send Marking Select On to add a timestamp to the pictures on the camera memory card giving the time of upload The timestamp can be viewed using ViewNX ...

Page 1000: ...e marked for upload Movies cannot be uploaded using this option They must instead be uploaded from the playback display Deselect All Remove transfer marking from all pictures Upload of images with a sending icon will immediately be terminated HTTP User Settings Enter a user name and password for connection to an http server http server connections only ...

Page 1001: ...n use the high speed 1000BASE T standard Prioritize power saving limits Ethernet connections to 100BASE TX LAN connections are terminated automatically when data transfer ends The camera network indicator will turn off MAC Address When Enable is selected for Wired LAN WT functions this option can be used to view the MAC address of the hardware selected for Choose hardware View some of the standard...

Page 1002: ...tion An indicator of whether the battery requires calibration Calibration ensures the accuracy of the battery level display after the battery has been charged a certain number of times j will be displayed We recommend that you calibrate the battery when j is displayed 0 1114 Calibration not required Battery age A five level display showing battery age A value of 0 k indicates that battery performa...

Page 1003: ...peratures under about 5 C 41 F may show a temporary increase from 0 to 1 in the value shown for Battery age but the display will return to normal once the battery has been recharged at a temperature of about 20 C 68 F or higher Choose whether the shutter can be released when no memory card is inserted in the camera Slot Empty Release Lock G button U B setup menu Option Description a Release locked...

Page 1004: ...s to be shared among cameras of the same model If two memory cards are inserted the settings will be saved to the card in Slot 1 The following settings are saved Save Load Menu Settings G button U B setup menu Settings that can be saved and loaded PLAYBACK MENU Playback display options Image review After delete After burst show Rotate tall ...

Page 1005: ...y Image size NEF RAW recording ISO sensitivity settings White balance Set Picture Control Custom Picture Controls are saved as Auto Color space Active D Lighting Long exposure NR High ISO NR Vignette control Diffraction compensation Auto distortion control Flicker reduction Flash control Auto bracketing Silent live view photography Settings that can be saved and loaded ...

Page 1006: ...sensitivity settings White balance Set Picture Control Custom Picture Controls are saved as Auto Active D Lighting High ISO NR Diffraction compensation Flicker reduction Electronic VR Microphone sensitivity Attenuator Frequency response Wind noise reduction Headphone volume Timecode excepting Timecode origin Settings that can be saved and loaded ...

Page 1007: ...rmation display Non CPU lens data Clean image sensor Image comment Copyright information IPTC Voice memo options Beep options Touch controls HDMI Location data built in Standby timer and Set clock from satellite only Wireless remote WR options Assign remote WR Fn button Slot empty release lock Settings that can be saved and loaded ...

Page 1008: ...be used with other cameras of the same model Load Menu Settings Load saved settings from a memory card Note that Load menu settings is available only when a memory card containing saved settings is inserted D Saved Settings Settings are saved to files named NCSET is an identifier that varies from camera to camera The camera will not be able to load settings if the file name is changed ...

Page 1009: ...tion and other user generated entries are also reset Once reset settings cannot be restored We recommend that you save settings using the Save load menu settings item in the setup menu before performing a reset View the current camera firmware version Reset All Settings G button U B setup menu Firmware Version G button U B setup menu ...

Page 1010: ...ted in the camera Retouched copies are saved to new files separate from the original pictures The retouch menu contains the following items Can only be displayed by pressing G and selecting the N tab N The Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies Item 0 7 NEF RAW processing 962 k Trim 967 8 Resize 968 i D Lighting 973 Y Red eye correction 974 Z Straighten 975 a Distortion control 976 e Perspective c...

Page 1011: ...highlight an item 2 to select 2 Select a picture Highlight a picture using the multi selector To view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the X button To view pictures in other locations press W M and choose the desired card and folder in the Choose slot and folder dialog Press J to select the highlighted picture ...

Page 1012: ... Retouching the Current Picture To create a retouched copy of the current picture press i and select Retouch or hold J and press 2 D Retouch The camera may not be able to display or retouch pictures that were taken or retouched using other cameras or that have been retouched on a computer If no actions are performed for a brief period the display will turn off and any unsaved changes will be lost ...

Page 1013: ...ms used to create the copy Items that cannot be applied to the current picture are grayed out and unavailable D Image Quality Copies created from NEF RAW pictures are saved at an Image quality of JPEG fine c Copies created from JPEG pictures are the same quality as the original In the case of dual format pictures recorded to the same memory card at image quality settings of NEF JPEG only the NEF R...

Page 1014: ... below 1 Select NEF RAW processing in the retouch menu Highlight NEF RAW processing and press 2 2 Choose a destination If two memory cards are inserted highlight Choose destination and press 2 Choose destination is not available when only one memory card is inserted Proceed to Step 3 Press 1 or 3 to highlight a card slot and press J NEF RAW Processing ConvertingNEF RAW to JPEG G button U N retouch...

Page 1015: ...ing the NEF RAW pictures and press 2 You will not be prompted to select the slot if only one memory card is inserted Option Description Select image s Create JPEG copies of selected NEF RAW pictures Multiple NEF RAW pictures can be selected Select date Create JPEG copies of all NEF RAW pictures taken on selected dates Select folder Create JPEG copies of all NEF RAW pictures in a selected folder ...

Page 1016: ...cted pictures are indicated by a L icon To deselect the current picture press the center of the multi selector again the L will no longer be displayed All pictures will be processed using the same settings Press J to proceed once selection is complete If you chose Select date Highlight dates using the multi selector and press 2 to select M or deselect U All pictures taken on dates marked with a ch...

Page 1017: ...s The settings in effect when the photograph was taken appear below a preview To use the setting in effect when the photograph was taken if applicable select Original 4 3 2 1 5 9 8 7 6 10 1 Image quality 0 142 2 Image size 0 145 3 White balance 0 221 4 Exposure compensation 0 199 5 Set Picture Control 0 271 6 High ISO NR 0 768 7 Color space 0 765 8 Vignette control 0 769 9 Active D Lighting 0 281 ...

Page 1018: ...light EXE and press J highlight Yes and press J to create JPEG copies of the selected photos To exit without copying the photographs press the G button D NEF RAW Processing NEF RAW processing is available only with NEF RAW pictures created with this camera Pictures in other formats and NEF RAW photos taken with other cameras or Camera Control Pro 2 cannot be selected Exposure compensation can only...

Page 1019: ...may not be available when cropped copies are displayed The crop size appears at upper left in the crop display The size of the copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio Trim G button U N retouch menu To Description Size the crop Press X or W M to choose the crop size Change the crop aspect ratio Rotate the main command dial to choose the aspect ratio Position the crop Use the multi selector to p...

Page 1020: ...ultiple Pictures If you accessed the retouch menu via the G button you can resize multiple selected pictures 1 Select Resize in the retouch menu Highlight Resize and press 2 2 Choose a destination If two memory cards are inserted highlight Choose destination and press 2 Choose destination is not available when only one memory card is inserted Proceed to Step 3 Resize G button U N retouch menu ...

Page 1021: ...e Retouch Menu Creating Retouched Copies Press 1 or 3 to highlight a card slot and press J 3 Choose a size Highlight Choose size and press 2 Highlight the desired size length in pixels using 1 and 3 and press J ...

Page 1022: ...ghlight the slot with the card containing the desired pictures and press 2 You will not be prompted to select the slot if only one memory card is inserted Option Description Select image s Resize selected pictures Multiple pictures can be selected Select date Resize all pictures taken on selected dates Select folder Resize all pictures in a selected folder ...

Page 1023: ...s are indicated by a 8 icon To deselect the current picture press the center of the multi selector again the 8 will no longer be displayed The selected pictures will all be copied at the size selected in Step 3 Press J to proceed once selection is complete If you chose Select date Highlight dates using the multi selector and press 2 to select M or deselect U All pictures taken on dates marked with...

Page 1024: ...select all pictures in the selected folder will be copied at the size selected in Step 3 7 Save the resized copies A confirmation dialog will be displayed highlight Yes and press J to save the resized copies D Resize Depending on the copy size playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are displayed ...

Page 1025: ...t is ideal for dark or backlit photographs The edit display shows before and after images Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of correction performed The effect can be previewed in the edit display Press J to save the retouched copy D Lighting G button U N retouch menu Before After ...

Page 1026: ... Red eye that cannot be detected by the camera will not be corrected Press J to save the retouched copy D Red Eye Correction Note the following Red eye correction may not always produce the expected results In very rare circumstances red eye correction may be applied to portions of the picture that are not affected by red eye Check the preview thoroughly before proceeding Red Eye Correction G butt...

Page 1027: ... increments of approximately 0 25 The effect can be previewed in the edit display The greater the rotation the more will be trimmed from the edges Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of straightening performed Press J to save the retouched copy Straighten G button U N retouch menu ...

Page 1028: ...o is for use only with pictures taken with type G E and D lenses Note however that automatic distortion control is not supported with some lenses of these types including PC and fisheyes lenses Results are not guaranteed with other lenses Note that Manual must be used with copies created using the Auto option and with photos taken using the Auto distortion control option in the photo shooting menu...

Page 1029: ...ortion Control Note that greater amounts of distortion control result in more of the edges being cropped out Distortion control may heavily crop or distort the edges of copies created from photographs taken with DX lenses at image areas other than DX 24 16 ...

Page 1030: ... up from the base of a tall object The effect can be previewed in the edit display Note that greater amounts of perspective control result in more of the edges being cropped out Use the multi selector 1 3 4 or 2 to adjust perspective Press J to save the retouched copy Perspective Control G button U N retouch menu Before After ...

Page 1031: ... the case of Sepia or Cyanotype color saturation can be adjusted using the multi selector Press 1 to increase 3 to decrease The changes are reflected in the preview Press J to save the retouched copy Monochrome G button U N retouch menu Option Description Black and white Copy photographs in black and white Sepia Copy photographs in sepia Cyanotype Copy photographs in blue and white monochrome ...

Page 1032: ...ately from the originals One NEF RAW image can be overlaid on another using additive blending Add or multiple images can be combined using Lighten or Darken Add Overlay two NEF RAW pictures to create a single new JPEG copy 1 Select Image overlay in the retouch menu Highlight Image overlay and press 2 Image Overlay G button U N retouch menu ...

Page 1033: ...irst image Press J to display a picture selection dialog listing only NEF RAW images where you can use the multi selector to highlight the first photograph in the overlay To view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the X button To view pictures in other locations press W M and choose the desired card and folder in the Choose slot and folder dialog ...

Page 1034: ...ress 2 and select Image 2 then select the second photo as described in Steps 3 and 4 6 Adjust gain The overlay of Image 1 and Image 2 can be previewed in the Preview column Highlight Image 1 or Image 2 and optimize exposure for the overlay by pressing 1 or 3 to adjust gain Choose from values between 0 1 and 2 0 in increments of 0 1 The effects are relative to the default value of 1 0 no gain For e...

Page 1035: ...n To proceed without previewing the overlay highlight Save and press J 8 Preview the overlay To preview the overlay highlight Overlay and press J To select new photos or adjust gain press W M You will be returned to Step 6 9 Save the overlay To save the overlay and display the resulting image press J while the preview is displayed ...

Page 1036: ...y if they were created with the same options selected for Image area Choose image area Image size NEF RAW and NEF RAW recording NEF RAW bit depth The overlay has the same photo info including date of recording metering shutter speed aperture exposure mode exposure compensation focal length and image orientation and values for white balance and Picture Control as the photograph selected for Image 1...

Page 1037: ...st pixels at each point in the image to create a single new JPEG copy 1 Select Lighten or Darken After selecting Image overlay in the retouch menu highlight either Lighten or Darken and press 2 Lighten The camera compares the pixels in each picture and uses only the brightest Darken The camera compares the pixels in each picture and uses only the darkest ...

Page 1038: ...es and press 2 You will not be prompted to select the slot if only one memory card is inserted Option Description Select individual images Select pictures for the overlay one by one Select consecutive images Select two pictures the overlay will include the two pictures and all images between them Select folder The overlay will include all pictures in the selected folder ...

Page 1039: ... screen press and hold the X button To select the highlighted picture press the center of the multi selector Selected pictures are marked by a icon To deselect the highlighted picture press the center of the multi selector again the icon will no longer be displayed The selected pictures will be combined using the option selected in Step 1 Press J to proceed once selection is complete ...

Page 1040: ...ulti selector to highlight different pictures to serve as the first or last frame Press the g h Q button to choose the current picture as the new start or end point To view the highlighted picture full screen press and hold the X button Press J to proceed once selection is complete If you chose Select folder Highlight the desired folder and press J to overlay all pictures in the folder using the o...

Page 1041: ...y settings will be saved at the same setting as the image with the highest image quality Overlays that include NEF RAW pictures will be saved at an image quality of JPEG finec Overlays that include NEF RAW pictures of different sizes will be the same size as the smallest picture If the overlay includes both NEF RAW and JPEG pictures the NEF RAW pictures cannot be smaller than their JPEG counterpar...

Page 1042: ...s O My Menu Creating a Custom Menu My Menu can be used to create and edit a customized list of up to 20 items from the playback photo shooting movie shooting Custom Settings setup and retouch menus Items can be added deleted and reordered as described below O My Menu m Recent Settings ...

Page 1043: ...g Items to My Menu 1 Select Add items in O MY MENU Highlight Add items and press 2 2 Select a menu Highlight the name of the menu containing the item you wish to add and press 2 3 Select an item Highlight the desired menu item and press J ...

Page 1044: ...em Press 1 or 3 to position the new item and press J to add it to My Menu 5 Add more items The items currently displayed in My Menu are indicated by a check mark L Items indicated by a V icon cannot be selected Repeat Steps 1 4 to select additional items ...

Page 1045: ...elect Continue until all the items you wish to remove are selected L 3 Remove the selected items Press J a confirmation dialog will be displayed Press J again to remove the selected items D Removing Items While in My Menu Items can also be removed by highlighting them in O MY MENU and pressing the O Q button a confirmation dialog will be displayed Press O Q again to remove the selected item ...

Page 1046: ...1 Select Rank items in O MY MENU Highlight Rank items and press 2 2 Select an item Highlight the item you wish to move and press J 3 Position the item Press 1 or 3 to move the item up or down in My Menu and press J Repeat Steps 2 3 to reposition additional items ...

Page 1047: ...995 O My Menu m Recent Settings 4 Exit to O MY MENU Press the G button to return to O MY MENU ...

Page 1048: ...ying RECENT SETTINGS 1 Select Choose tab in O MY MENU Highlight Choose tab and press 2 2 Select m RECENT SETTINGS Highlight mRECENT SETTINGS in the Choose tab menu and press J The name of the menu will change from MY MENU to RECENT SETTINGS ...

Page 1049: ...settings are listed D Removing Items from the Recent Settings Menu To remove an item from the RECENT SETTINGS menu highlight it and press the O Q button a confirmation dialog will be displayed Press O Q again to remove the selected item D Displaying My Menu Selecting Choose tab in the RECENT SETTINGS menu displays the items shown in Step 2 of Displaying RECENT SETTINGS 0 996 Highlight O MY MENU an...

Page 1050: ...ts and Error Messages 0 1012 STEP2 Turn the camera off and remove the battery then wait about a minute re insert the battery and turn the camera on D The camera may continue to write data to the memory card after shooting Wait at least a minute before removing the battery STEP3 Search Nikon websites For support information and answers to frequently asked questions visit the website for your countr...

Page 1051: ...be unavailable To access menu items that are grayed out or features that are otherwise unavailable try restoring default settings using the Reset all settings item in the setup menu Note however that wireless network profiles copyright information and other user generated entries will also be reset Once reset settings cannot be restored ...

Page 1052: ...ost Data that have already been recorded are not affected by removing or disconnecting the power source The viewfinder is out of focus Rotate the diopter adjustment control to adjust viewfinder focus If adjusting viewfinder focus does not correct the problem set the autofocus mode to AF S and the AF area mode to Single point AF Next select the center focus point choose a high contrast subject and ...

Page 1053: ...out warning Choose longer delays for Custom Setting c2 Standby timer or c4 Monitor off delay The display in control panel or viewfinder is dim and unresponsive The response times and brightness of these displays vary with temperature Patterns appear in the viewfinder The viewfinder display may turn red when a focus point is highlighted but this is normal for this type of viewfinder and does not in...

Page 1054: ...imum aperture the highest f number If B is displayed in the top control panel select Aperture ring for Custom Setting f6 Customize command dials Aperture setting and adjust aperture using the lens aperture ring If you selected mode S after selecting a shutter speed of A Bulb or Time in mode M choose a different shutter speed Is Release locked selected for Slot empty release lock in the setup menu ...

Page 1055: ...patterns the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting brightness background objects appear larger than the subject or the subject contains many fine details The beep does not sound A beep does not sound when the camera focuses with AF C selected for autofocus mode Select an option other than Off for Beep options Beep on off in the setup menu The full range of shutter speeds is not availab...

Page 1056: ...sition Focus point selection is not available when Auto area AF is selected for AF area mode Focus point selection is not available in playback mode or when menus are in use Has the standby timer expired To enable focus point selection press the shutter release button halfway AF mode selection is not available Select No restrictions for Custom Setting a15 Autofocus mode restrictions The camera is ...

Page 1057: ... pixels fog or lines appears in photos To reduce noise adjust settings such as ISO sensitivity shutter speed or Active D Lighting At high ISO sensitivities noise may become more noticeable in long exposures or in pictures recorded when the camera temperature is elevated ...

Page 1058: ...ource with brief duration is used during live view Smudges appear in photographs Are there smudges on the front or rear mount side lens elements Is there foreign matter on the low pass filter Perform image sensor cleaning Live view ends unexpectedly or does not start Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera s internal circuits for example if The ambient temperature is high T...

Page 1059: ...re affected by the option selected for Frame size frame rate in the movie shooting menu Note that the distribution of noise in the monitor may differ from that in the final picture Monitor hue changes sharply during live view Monitor hue may change sharply at high sensitivities Hi 0 3 to Hi 5 during burst photography or immediately after the shutter is released this does not indicate a malfunction...

Page 1060: ...nsistent results over a series of photographs choose a setting other than A auto The option selected for metering cannot be changed The option selected for metering cannot be changed during exposure lock Exposure compensation is not available Changes to exposure compensation in mode M apply only to the exposure indicator and have no effect on shutter speed or aperture Uneven shading may appear in ...

Page 1061: ... menu Tall portrait orientation photos are displayed in wide landscape orientation Is Off selected for Rotate tall in the playback menu Auto image rotation is not available during image review Camera orientation may not be correctly recorded in photos taken with the camera pointing up or down Pictures cannot be deleted Are the pictures protected Pictures cannot be retouched The pictures cannot be ...

Page 1062: ...a recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed are used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed The effects of Set Picture Control Active D Lighting or Vignette control are not visible In the case of NEF RAW images the effect can only be viewed using Nikon software View NEF RAW images using Capture NX D or ViewNX i Pictures cannot be copied to a computer Depending on ...

Page 1063: ...ss network features on the smart device The camera cannot connect to printers and other wireless devices The camera cannot establish wireless connections with devices other than smartphones tablets and computers The date of recording is not correct Is the camera clock set correctly The clock is less accurate than most watches and household clocks check it regularly against more accurate timepieces...

Page 1064: ...and monitor Alerts The following alerts appear in the top control panel and viewfinder Alerts and Error Messages Alert Problem solution Top control panel Viewfinder B flashes B flashes Lens aperture ring is not set to minimum aperture Set lens aperture ring to minimum aperture highest f number H d Low battery Ready spare battery ...

Page 1065: ...Battery cannot supply data to camera Replace third party batteries with genuine Nikon batteries High battery temperature Remove battery and wait for it to cool B flashes Camera clock is not set Set camera clock F F Aperture shown in stops from maximum aperture No lens attached or non CPU lens attached without specifying maximum aperture Aperture value will be displayed if maximum aperture is speci...

Page 1066: ...er speed Select mode M flashes flashes Time selected in mode S Change shutter speed Select mode M 1 flashes k flashes Processing in progress Wait for processing to complete N flashes Flash has fired at full power Photo may be underexposed Check distance to subject and settings such as aperture flash range and ISO sensitivity Alert Problem solution Top control panel Viewfinder ...

Page 1067: ...ter following settings are adjusted in mode S or A Mode S Choose faster shutter speed Mode A Choose smaller aperture higher f number Subject too dark limits of camera exposure metering system exceeded Increase ISO sensitivity Mode P Use optional flash unit flash can also be used if alert is still displayed after following settings are adjusted in mode S or A Mode S Choose slower shutter speed Mode...

Page 1068: ...ional pictures to be recorded Copy pictures you wish to keep to computer or other device before proceeding Insert new memory card Camera has run out of file numbers Delete pictures from memory card until there is room for additional pictures to be recorded Copy pictures you wish to keep to computer or other device before proceeding Insert new memory card O flashes O flashes Camera malfunction Pres...

Page 1069: ... memory card Insert another card W R flashes Error accessing memory card Check that camera supports memory card If error persists after card has been repeatedly ejected and reinserted card may be damaged Contact retailer or Nikon authorized service representative Unable to create new folder Delete pictures from memory card until there is room for additional pictures to be recorded Copy pictures yo...

Page 1070: ...rature is elevated Suspend shooting until camera has cooled Folder contains no images Folder contains no pictures Insert memory card that contains pictures No pictures in folder selected for playback Use Playback folder item in playback menu to select folder that contains pictures All images are hidden All pictures in current folder are hidden Use Hide image item in playback menu to reveal picture...

Page 1071: ...t Do not overwrite images using computer applications Cannot select this file Selected picture cannot be retouched Retouch options are available only with pictures taken with or previously retouched on camera This movie cannot be edited Selected movie cannot be edited Movies created with other devices cannot be edited Movies under two seconds long cannot be edited Alert Problem solution Monitor To...

Page 1072: ...ual for details Files 4 GB or larger can only be saved to memory cards formatted for exFAT They cannot be saved to cards formatted for other file systems such as FAT32 Use a memory card with a capacity over 32 GB formatted in the camera or keep file size to under 4 GB Alert Problem solution Monitor Top control panel ...

Page 1073: ...a Displays 4 5 8 3 7 6 1 2 1 Roll indicator1 2 0 862 2 Framing grid 3 0 832 3 AF area brackets 0 50 164 4 12 mm reference circle for center weighted metering 0 111 178 5 Focus points 0 164 Spot metering targets 0 111 178 AF area mode indicator 0 157 6 Flicker detection 0 772 7 Teleconverter indicator 4 8 Pitch indicator 1 5 0 862 ...

Page 1074: ...itch indicator when the camera is rotated to take pictures in tall portrait orientation 3 Displayed when On is selected for Custom Setting d11 Framing grid display 4 Displayed only when a lens with a built in teleconverter is attached and the teleconverter is in use 5 Functions as a roll indicator when the camera is rotated to take pictures in tall portrait orientation ...

Page 1075: ...posure compensation 0 117 199 Exposure and flash bracketing progress indicator 0 251 2 Flash compensation indicator 0 133 653 3 Exposure compensation indicator 0 117 199 4 Bracketing indicator Exposure and flash bracketing 0 251 WB bracketing 0 259 ADL bracketing 0 265 ...

Page 1076: ... 108 182 5 Shutter speed lock icon 0 194 6 Shutter speed 0 185 188 Autofocus mode 0 98 149 7 Aperture lock icon 0 194 8 Aperture f number 0 186 188 Aperture number of stops 0 187 9 ISO sensitivity indicator 0 114 213 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator 0 116 220 10 ISO sensitivity 0 114 213 Active D Lighting amount 0 281 AF area mode 0 101 157 11 Network display 0 593 ...

Page 1077: ...varies with temperature and response times may drop when the temperature is low the displays will return to normal at room temperature 12 Number of exposures remaining 0 48 1120 Number of shots remaining before memory buffer fills 0 207 1120 Preset white balance recording indicator 0 235 Exposure compensation value 0 117 199 Flash compensation value 0 133 653 PC mode indicator 0 1071 13 k appears ...

Page 1078: ...ure number of stops 0 187 9 Exposure and flash bracketing indicator 0 251 WB bracketing indicator 0 259 ADL bracketing indicator 0 265 HDR indicator 0 283 Multiple exposure indicator 0 318 10 k appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures 0 48 11 Number of exposures remaining 0 48 1120 12 Exposure indicator Exposure 0 190 Exposure compensation 0 199 Exposure and flash bracketing 0 251 WB br...

Page 1079: ...rol indicator 0 769 7 Electronic front curtain shutter 0 827 8 Exposure delay mode 0 827 9 Interval timer indicator 0 331 clock not set indicator 0 1028 10 Flash control mode 0 645 11 FP indicator 0 836 12 Beep indicator 0 923 13 Battery indicator 0 47 14 i menu display area 0 88 15 Guide 0 1028 16 Autoexposure AE lock 0 170 196 17 Flash compensation indicator 0 653 18 FV lock indicator 0 655 19 I...

Page 1080: ...will not be correct use the Time zone and date Date and time option in the setup menu to set the clock to the correct time and date A Using the i Menu To access the i menu press the i button or tap the guide in the information display Press the i button again or press the R button to return to the information display when settings are complete ...

Page 1081: ...8 27 32 33 21 23 1 Exposure mode 0 108 182 2 Flexible program indicator 0 184 3 No memory card indicator 4 Subject tracking AF 0 160 5 Focus point 0 164 6 Autofocus mode 0 98 151 7 AF area mode 0 101 160 8 Active D Lighting 0 281 9 Picture Control 0 125 271 10 Wi Fi connection indicator 0 461 931 932 11 White balance 0 121 221 12 Auto white balance locked indicator 0 850 ...

Page 1082: ...0 929 19 Flash ready indicator 0 641 20 k appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures 0 48 21 Number of exposures remaining 0 48 1120 22 Satellite signal indicator 0 386 23 ISO sensitivity 0 114 213 24 ISO sensitivity indicator 0 114 213 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator 0 116 220 25 Exposure compensation indicator 0 117 199 26 Flash compensation indicator 0 133 653 27 Aperture 0 186 188 28 A...

Page 1083: ...imer will be displayed When the timer reaches zero the monitor will turn off The timer turns red when the thirty second mark is reached In some cases the timer may be displayed immediately after the camera is turned on 39 Touch shooting 0 18 40 Photo live view display WB 0 848 41 Time remaining 0 60 Temperature warning 0 1031 ...

Page 1084: ...rnal recording control 0 455 3 Frame size and rate image quality 0 294 4 Time remaining 0 294 5 Time code 0 795 6 Wind noise reduction 0 794 7 Headphone volume 0 794 8 Release mode still photography 0 70 9 Sound level 0 66 10 Microphone sensitivity 0 792 11 Frequency response 0 793 12 Electronic VR indicator 0 791 ...

Page 1085: ... 0 259 Overlay mode 0 328 Number of intervals for interval timer photography 0 331 Focal length non CPU lenses 0 383 2 Flexible program indicator 0 184 3 Exposure mode 0 108 182 4 AF area mode indicator 0 101 163 5 Photo shooting menu bank 0 752 6 Custom settings bank 0 802 7 Autofocus mode 0 98 149 8 Bluetooth connection indicator 0 469 929 9 Memory card icon Slot 2 0 41 48 10 Memory card icon Sl...

Page 1086: ... 220 5 Aperture stop indicator 0 187 6 Aperture f number 0 186 188 Aperture number of stops 0 187 Bracketing increment exposure and flash bracketing 0 251 Bracketing increment WB bracketing 0 259 Number of shots in ADL bracketing sequence 0 265 Number of shots per interval 0 331 HDR exposure differential 0 291 Number of exposures multiple exposure 0 328 Maximum aperture non CPU lenses 0 383 PC mod...

Page 1087: ...tiple exposure indicator 0 321 7 Aperture lock icon 0 194 8 Exposure compensation indicator 0 117 199 9 Clock battery indicator 0 46 1083 10 k appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures 0 48 11 Number of exposures remaining 0 48 1120 Number of shots remaining before memory buffer fills 0 207 1120 Preset white balance recording indicator 0 234 Active D Lighting amount 0 281 HDR mode 0 291 ...

Page 1088: ...ength of voice memo 0 437 Sub option selected for Auto or Fluorescent white balance 0 121 225 White balance preset number 0 234 Color temperature 0 231 PC mode indicator 0 1071 6 k appears when memory remains for over 1000 exposures 0 48 Color temperature indicator 0 231 Supplementary seconds display 0 209 437 7 Remaining indicator 0 1120 8 Image size JPEG 0 120 145 9 Image quality 0 118 144 10 Wh...

Page 1089: ...mended CPU lenses Compatible F Mount Lenses Lens 1 accessory Autofocus 2 Exposure mode Metering P S A M L M N t 3D RGB RGB Type G E or D 3 AF S AF P AF I 4 4 4 4 44 4 PC NIKKOR 19mm f 4E ED 5 46 46 46 44 6 46 PC E NIKKOR series 5 46 46 46 44 6 46 PC Micro 85mm f 2 8D 5 7 48 46 44 6 46 AF S AF I Teleconverter 9 4 4 4 4 44 4 Other AF NIKKOR except lenses for F3AF 410 4 4 4 44 AI P NIKKOR 4 4 4 44 ...

Page 1090: ...or when an aperture other than the maximum aperture is used 8 Mode M manual only 9 For information on the focus points available for autofocus and electronic rangefinding see AF S AF I Teleconverters and Available Focus Points 0 1042 10 When an AF 80 200mm f 2 8 AF 35 70mm f 2 8 AF 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 New or AF 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 lens is focused at the minimum distance at maximum zoom the in focus in...

Page 1091: ...Nikkor 24 120mm f 3 5 5 6G IF ED AF S VR Zoom Nikkor 70 200mm f 2 8G IF ED AF S VR Zoom Nikkor 70 300mm f 4 5 5 6G IF ED AF S VR Nikkor 200mm f 2G IF ED AF S VR Nikkor 300mm f 2 8G IF ED AF S NIKKOR 16 35mm f 4G ED VR AF S NIKKOR 24 120mm f 4G ED VR AF S NIKKOR 28 300mm f 3 5 5 6G ED VR AF S NIKKOR 400mm f 2 8G ED VR AF S NIKKOR 500mm f 4G ED VR AF S DX VR Zoom Nikkor 18 200mm f 3 5 5 6G IF ED AF ...

Page 1092: ...at lens or a lens that supports the FX format is attached you can reduce the angle of view by selecting DX 24 16 The picture diagonal for 35 mm format is about 1 5 times that of the DX 24 16 crop Selecting DX 24 16 therefore multiplies the apparent focal length of 35 mm format lenses attached to the camera by about 1 5 For example selecting DX 24 16 when a lens with a focal length of 50 mm is atta...

Page 1093: ...th maximum apertures of f 4 or faster1 105 cross sensors AF S DX Zoom Nikkor 12 24mm f 4G IF ED AF S NIKKOR 500mm f 4E FL ED VR AF S NIKKOR 600mm f 4G ED VR AF S NIKKOR 600mm f 4E FL ED VR AF S Nikkor 600mm f 4D IF ED II AF S Nikkor 600mm f 4D IF ED 91 cross sensors AF S NIKKOR 500mm f 4G ED VR AF S Nikkor 500mm f 4D IF ED II AF S Nikkor 500mm f 4D IF ED 77 cross sensors AF S NIKKOR 200 400mm f 4G...

Page 1094: ...t at maximum combined apertures slower than f 5 6 the camera may not be able to focus on dark or low contrast subjects Teleconverter Max lens aperture1 Available focus points cross sensor focus points highlighted in gray2 TC 14E TC 14E II TC 14E III TC 17E II TC 20E TC 20E II TC 20E III f 2 105 focus points 105 cross sensors TC 14E TC 14E II TC 14E III f 2 8 TC 17E II TC 20E TC 20E II TC 20E III f...

Page 1095: ...t available when teleconverters are used with AF S VR Micro Nikkor 105mm f 2 8G IF ED lenses TC 17E II f 4 23 focus points 9 cross sensors TC 800 1 25E ED f 5 6 TC 20E TC 20E II TC 20E III f 4 15 focus points 1 cross sensor TC 14E TC 14E II TC 14E III f 5 6 Teleconverter Max lens aperture1 Available focus points cross sensor focus points highlighted in gray2 ...

Page 1096: ...and D Lenses CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts q Type G lenses are marked with a G type E lenses with an E and type D lenses with a D Type G and E lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring w CPU lens Type G or E lens Type D lens ...

Page 1097: ... 3 If the maximum aperture is specified using the Non CPU lens data item in the setup menu the aperture value will be displayed in the viewfinder and control panel Lens1 accessory Exposure mode Metering P S A M L M N t 3D RGB RGB AI AI modified NIKKOR or Nikon Series E lenses 2 43 44 45 Medical NIKKOR 120mm f 4 46 Reflex NIKKOR 43 45 PC NIKKOR 47 4 AI type Teleconverter 8 43 44 45 PB 6 Bellows Foc...

Page 1098: ...the flash sync speed 7 Use stop down metering In mode A stop aperture down using the controls on the lens and lock exposure before shifting the lens In mode M stop aperture down using the controls on the lens and meter exposure before shifting the lens 8 Exposure compensation required with AI 28 85mm f 3 5 4 5 AI 35 105mm f 3 5 4 5 AI 35 135mm f 3 5 4 5 or AF S 80 200mm f 2 8D lenses 9 Requires a ...

Page 1099: ... 6 7 5mm f 5 6 8mm f 8 OP 10mm f 5 6 2 1cm f 4 K2 extension rings 180 600mm f 8 ED lenses serial numbers 174041 174180 360 1200mm f 11 ED lenses serial numbers 174031 174127 200 600mm f 9 5 lenses serial numbers 280001 300490 AF lenses for the F3AF AF 80mm f 2 8 AF 200mm f 3 5 ED TC 16 AF teleconverters PC 28mm f 4 lenses serial numbers 180900 or earlier PC 35mm f 2 8 lenses serial numbers 851001 ...

Page 1100: ...be used with non CPU lenses If the focal length and maximum aperture are not provided and Matrix metering is selected for metering Center weighted metering will be used instead Aperture must be set using the lens aperture ring If the maximum aperture is not provided using Non CPU lens data the aperture displays in the camera top control panel and viewfinder will show the number of stops from maxim...

Page 1101: ...cused at the minimum distance at maximum zoom the in focus indicator may be displayed when the image on the matte screen in the viewfinder is not in focus Adjust focus manually until the image in the viewfinder is in focus 3 With a maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster Lens accessory Viewfinder photography Live view Type G E or D AF S AF P AF I 4 PC NIKKOR 19mm f 4E ED 41 PC E NIKKOR series 41 PC Mi...

Page 1102: ...ifting or tilting 3 With a maximum effective aperture of f 5 6 or faster Lens accessory Viewfinder photography Live view AI AI modified NIKKOR or Nikon Series E lenses 41 Medical NIKKOR 120mm f 4 4 Reflex NIKKOR PC NIKKOR 42 AI type Teleconverter 43 PB 6 Bellows Focusing Attachment 43 Auto extension rings PK series 11A 12 or 13 PN 11 43 ...

Page 1103: ... Available with CLS Compatible Flash Units Compatible Flash Units Supported features Flash unit SB 5000 SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 SB 500 SU 800 SB R200 SB 400 SB 300 Single flash i TTL i TTL balanced fill flash for digital SLR1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Standard i TTL fill flash for digital SLR 42 42 4 42 4 4 4 qA Auto aperture 4 43 A Non TTL auto 43 GN Distance priority manual 4 4 4 M Manual 4 4 4 4...

Page 1104: ...4 4 45 qA Auto aperture 4 4 A Non TTL auto M Manual 4 4 4 44 RPT Repeating flash 4 4 Remote i TTL i TTL 4 4 4 4 4 4 A B Quick wireless flash control 4 4 4 4 4 4 qA A Auto aperture non TTL auto 46 46 M Manual 4 4 4 4 4 4 RPT Repeating flash 4 4 4 4 4 Supported features Flash unit SB 5000 SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 SB 500 SU 800 SB R200 SB 400 SB 300 ...

Page 1105: ...mmunication LED light 4 Auto FP high speed sync 8 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 FV lock 9 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Red eye reduction 4 4 4 4 4 4 Camera modeling illumination 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Unified flash control 4 4 4 4 Camera flash unit firmware update 4 410 4 4 4 Supported features Flash unit SB 5000 SB 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 SB 500 SU 800 SB R200 SB 400 SB 300 ...

Page 1106: ...ilable during close up photography only 6 Choice of qA and A depends on the option selected with the master flash 7 Supports the same features as remote flash units with optical AWL 8 Available only in i TTL qA A GN and M flash control modes 9 Available only in i TTL flash control mode or when the flash is configured to emit monitor preflashes in qA or A flash control mode 10 Firmware updates for ...

Page 1107: ...can be used in non TTL auto A and manual modes The options available do not vary with the lens used 1 Mounting an SB 27 on the camera automatically sets the flash mode to TTL but setting the flash mode to TTL disables the shutter release Set the SB 27 to A 2 Available when the camera is used to select the flash mode Supported features Flash unit SB 80DX SB 28DX SB 50DX SB 28 SB 26 SB 25 SB 24 SB 3...

Page 1108: ... the flash ready indicator N flashes for about three seconds after a photograph is taken in i TTL or non TTL auto mode the flash has fired at full power and the photograph may be underexposed CLS compatible flash units only i TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and 12800 Picture taken with Flash control mode Metered area Stand alone flash unit i TTL 6 mm circle in center...

Page 1109: ... 910 SB 900 SB 800 SB 700 SB 600 SB 500 and SB 400 provide red eye reduction in red eye reduction and slow sync with red eye reduction flash modes Noise in the form of lines may appear in flash photographs taken with an SD 9 or SD 8A high performance battery pack attached directly to the camera Reduce ISO sensitivity or increase the distance between the camera and the battery pack The SB 5000 SB 9...

Page 1110: ...hen the subject is not in focus or the camera may be unable to focus and the shutter release will be disabled Flash unit Examples of focus points for which AF assist illumination is available SB 5000 Focal length 24 mm Focal length 135 mm SB 910 SB 900 Focal length 17 mm Focal length 135 mm SB 800 SB 600 SU 800 wireless speedlight commander Focal length 24 mm Focal length 105 mm SB 700 Focal lengt...

Page 1111: ...may produce incorrect exposure D Flash Compensation for Optional Flash Units In i TTL and auto aperture qA flash control modes the flash compensation selected with the optional flash unit or the Flash control item in the photo shooting menu is added to the flash compensation selected with the W M button A Modeling Illumination Optional CLS compatible flash units emit a modeling flash when the came...

Page 1112: ...le charge with an EN EL18 than with an EN EL18c EN EL18b EN EL18a 0 1125 MH 26a Battery Charger The MH 26a can be used to recharge EN EL18c EN EL18b EN EL18a EN EL18 batteries The MH 26a can also be used to calibrate batteries MH 26 battery chargers can be used in place of the MH 26a EP 6 Power Connector EH 6c AC Adapter Use AC adapters to power the camera for extended periods The EP 6 is needed t...

Page 1113: ...hers Choose from lenses with diopters of 3 2 0 1 and 2 m 1 Be sure to try the lenses in the store before purchase as results can vary widely from person to person Diopter adjustment lenses 0 1067 can be used for diopters beyond the range of the camera s diopter adjustment control 3 to 1 m 1 DK 17M Magnifying Eyepiece When fitted to the camera viewfinder the DK 17M increases magnification by approx...

Page 1114: ...he viewfinder eyepiece at a right angle allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed from above when the camera is used to take pictures in wide landscape orientation Filters Neutral Color NC filters can be used to protect the lens The camera cannot be used with linear polarizing filters Use the C PL or C PLII circular polarizing filter instead Filters may cause ghosting when the subject is f...

Page 1115: ...olled flash units For synchronized release involving more than one camera ready multiple cameras with paired WR R10 units attached WR 1 Wireless Remote Controller WR 1 units are used with WR R10 or WR T10 wireless remote controllers or with other WR 1 remote controllers with the WR 1 units functioning as either transmitters or receivers When a WR R10 or a WR 1 configured as a receiver is connected...

Page 1116: ...roximately 85 cm 2 8 ft Remote shutter releases with timers for interval timer photography MC 21 MC 21A Extension Cords length approximately 3 m 9 9 ft Can be connected to ML 3 or MC series 20 22 22A 23 23A 25 25A 30 30A 36 or 36A but note that two or more extensions cords cannot be connected together MC 23 MC 23A Connecting Cords length approximately 40 cm 1 4 ft Use an MC 23 or 23A to connect tw...

Page 1117: ...pe A connector for connection to HDMI devices Microphones ME 1 Stereo Microphone Connect the ME 1 to the camera microphone jack to record stereo sound Using an external microphone also reduces the chance of picking up equipment noise such as the sounds produced by the lens during autofocus ME W1 Wireless Microphone A wireless Bluetooth microphone Use the ME W1 for off camera recording Connector Co...

Page 1118: ...mation D The BS 3 Accessory Shoe Cover The supplied accessory shoe cover can be used to protect the accessory shoe or to prevent light reflected from the metal parts of the shoe appearing in photographs The cover slides into the shoe as shown To remove the cover hold the camera firmly press the cover down with a thumb and slide it in the direction shown ...

Page 1119: ... before attaching a diopter adjustment viewfinder lens Press the latches on both sides of the eyepiece adapter simultaneously to release the eyepiece lock q and then unscrew the eyepiece as shown w D Removing the Eyepiece Adapter Press and lift the latches on both sides simultaneously q and remove the adapter as shown w ...

Page 1120: ...ent accidental disconnection attach the supplied clip to HDMI cables or to the supplied USB cable as shown note that the clip may not fit all third party HDMI cables The illustrations show the USB cable USB cable HDMI cable HDMI cable and USB cable used simultaneously ...

Page 1121: ...ve the BL 6 battery chamber cover Lift the battery chamber cover latch turn it to the open A position q and remove the BL 6 battery chamber cover w 2 Connect the EH 6c AC adapter to the EP 6 power connector Pass the DC cable over the power connector cable guide q and slide it down until it is at the bottom of the slot Insert the DC plug into the DC IN connector w ...

Page 1122: ...own 4 Latch the power connector Rotate the latch to the closed position q and fold it down as shown w To prevent the power connector being dislodged during operation be sure that it is securely latched The battery level is not displayed in the top control panel while the camera is powered by the AC adapter and power connector ...

Page 1123: ...e camera is connected to the computer ViewNX i More than a tool for viewing and editing photos and movies shot with Nikon digital cameras ViewNX i can be used in combination with other Nikon imaging applications to help you get the most from your pictures It also offers smooth access to online services Existing users should be sure to download the latest version as earlier versions may not support...

Page 1124: ... network Pair the camera with the computer and download pictures via Wi Fi Smartphone Tablet Apps Smartphone apps can be downloaded from the Apple App Store or on Google Play Visit the Nikon website for the latest information SnapBridge Download photos and movies from the camera to your smart device via a wireless connection ...

Page 1125: ...ons that are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60 are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields such as televisions or radios are exposed to temperatures above 50 C 122 F or below 10 C 14 F Cleaning The procedure varies with the part that requires cleaning The procedures are detailed below Do not use alcohol thinner or other volatile chemicals Caring for the Ca...

Page 1126: ...inside the camera is not covered under warranty Lens Mirror and Viewfinder These glass elements are easily damaged remove dust and lint with a blower If using an aerosol blower keep the can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid that could damage glass elements To remove fingerprints and other stains apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care Monitor Remove dust ...

Page 1127: ...er can be cleaned at any time from the menus or cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off Using the Menus For maximum effect hold the camera in normal orientation base down Select Clean image sensor in the setup menu then highlight Clean now and press J to begin cleaning Camera controls cannot be used while cleaning is in progress Do not remove or disconnect the p...

Page 1128: ...s 2 Highlight an option Press J to select the highlighted option Option Description 5 Clean at startup The image sensor is automatically cleaned each time the camera is turned on 6 Clean at shutdown The image sensor is automatically cleaned during shutdown each time the camera is turned off 7 Clean at startup shutdown The image sensor is cleaned automatically at startup and at shutdown Cleaning of...

Page 1129: ...ge sensor cleaning may not fully remove all foreign matter from the filter Clean the filter manually 0 1078 or consult a Nikon authorized service representative If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession image sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera s internal circuitry Cleaning can be performed again after a short wait ...

Page 1130: ...event loss of power during the operation use a fully charged battery or connect an optional AC adapter and power connector Manual cleaning requires use of the Lock mirror up for cleaning item in the setup menu The Lock mirror up for cleaning item is not available at battery levels of J or below or if the camera is connected to a smart device via Bluetooth or other devices via USB 1 Turn the camera...

Page 1131: ...ontrol panel will flash The displays in the viewfinder and rear control panel will turn off To restore normal operation without inspecting the low pass filter turn the camera off 4 Holding the camera so that light can enter the camera examine the filter for dust or lint If no foreign objects are present proceed to Step 6 ...

Page 1132: ...h The bristles could damage the filter Dirt that cannot be removed with a blower can only be removed by Nikon authorized service personnel Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe the filter 6 Turn the camera off and replace the lens The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter curtain will close ...

Page 1133: ...ng the camera when lenses or body caps are removed or exchanged or in rare circumstances lubricant or fine particles from the camera itself may adhere to the low pass filter where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions To prevent entry of foreign matter when attaching the body cap or exchanging lenses avoid dusty environments and be sure to remove all dust and other foreign ma...

Page 1134: ...cted once every one to two years and that it be serviced once every three to five years note that fees apply to these services Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally Any accessories regularly used with the camera such as lenses or optional flash units should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced ...

Page 1135: ...w and needs to be replaced When the battery is exhausted the B icon will flash while the standby timer is on indicating that although photographs can still be taken they will not be stamped with the correct time and date Replacing the Clock Battery 1 Turn the camera off and remove the main battery 2 Slide the clock battery chamber cover which is located on the roof of the main battery chamber towa...

Page 1136: ...s the back of the main battery chamber Stop when the cover clicks into place 6 Reinsert the main battery 7 Set the camera clock The B icon will flash in the top control panel until the clock is set D Inserting the Clock Battery Insert the clock battery in the correct orientation Inserting the battery incorrectly could not only prevent the clock from functioning but could damage the camera ...

Page 1137: ... Changes in Temperature Sudden changes in temperature such as those that occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold day can cause condensation inside the device To prevent condensation place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to sudden changes in temperature Keep Away from Strong Magnetic Fields Static charges or the magnetic fields produced by equipmen...

Page 1138: ...After using the camera at the beach or seaside wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly dampened in fresh water and then dry the camera thoroughly In rare instances static electricity may cause the LCD displays to light up or go dark this does not indicate a malfunction The display will soon return to normal Cleaning the Lens and Mirror These elements are easily damaged remove dust and lint...

Page 1139: ...moth balls next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic or where it will be exposed to extremely high temperatures for example near a heater or in an enclosed vehicle on a hot day Failure to observe these precautions could result in product malfunction Long Term Storage To prevent damage caused by for example leaking battery fluid remove the battery if the product will not be used for an...

Page 1140: ...or always off black this is not a malfunction Images recorded with the device are unaffected Your understanding is requested Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light Do not apply pressure to the monitor The monitor could malfunction or suffer damage Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower Stains can be removed by wiping the monitor lightly with a soft cloth ...

Page 1141: ...g Attempting to charge the battery while its internal temperature is elevated will impair battery performance and the battery may not charge or charge only partially If the battery will not be used for some time insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it from the camera for storage The battery should be stored in a cool location with an ambient temperature of 15 C to 25 C 59 F to 7...

Page 1142: ...may show a temporary increase from 0 to 1 in the setup menu Battery info age display but the display will return to normal once the battery has been recharged at a temperature of about 20 C 68 F or higher Battery capacity drops at low temperatures The change in capacity with temperature is reflected in the camera battery level display As a result the battery display may show a drop in capacity as ...

Page 1143: ... when the battery is fully discharged will shorten battery life Batteries that have been fully discharged must be charged before use A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement Purchase a new rechargeable battery Do Not Attempt to Charge Fully Charged Batteries Continuing to charge the battery after it is...

Page 1144: ... terminals Failure to observe this precaution could result in overheating and damage to the charger Unplug the charger when it is not in use Use the MH 26a with compatible batteries only Do not use chargers with damage that leaves the interior exposed or that produce unusual sounds when used ...

Page 1145: ... 1 3 EV are reduced to 17 1 3 EV Exposure Program 1 2 3 f 1 4 f 1 f 2 f 2 8 f 4 f 5 6 f 8 f 11 f 16 f 22 f 32 EV 5 3 1 2 1 4 2 4 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 0 1 1 30 15 8 4 2 1 1 2 1 4 1 8 1 15 1 30 1 60 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 1 4000 1 8000 1 3 1 16000 4 6 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 0 1 9 1 8 1 7 1 6 1 5 2 4 1 7 1 3 1 F lens focal length 55 mm 2 55 mm F 135 mm 3 135 mm F 4 Metering range 3 to 20 EV 5 Aper...

Page 1146: ...unt Nikon F mount with AF coupling and AF contacts Effective angle of view Nikon FX format Effective pixels Effective pixels 20 8 million Image sensor Type 35 9 23 9 mm CMOS sensor Total pixels 21 33 million Dust reduction system Image sensor cleaning Image Dust Off reference data Capture NX D software required ...

Page 1147: ... 2 2 M 5 4 30 24 selected for image area 4640 3712 Large 17 2 M 3472 2784 Medium 9 7 M 2320 1856 Small 4 3 M 1 1 24 24 selected for image area 3712 3712 Large 13 8 M 2784 2784 Medium 7 8 M 1856 1856 Small 3 4 M 16 9 36 20 selected for image area 5568 3128 Large 17 4 M 4176 2344 Medium 9 8 M 2784 1560 Small 4 3 M Photographs taken while filming movies at a frame size of 3840 2160 3840 2160 Photogra...

Page 1148: ...Auto Standard Neutral Vivid Monochrome Portrait Landscape Flat Creative Picture Controls Dream Morning Pop Sunday Somber Dramatic Silence Bleached Melancholic Pure Denim Toy Sepia Blue Red Pink Charcoal Graphite Binary Carbon selected Picture Control can be modified storage for custom Picture Controls Media CFexpress Type B and XQD memory cards Double card slots The card in Slot 2 can be used for ...

Page 1149: ...prox 100 horizontal and 96 vertical Magnification Approx 0 72 50 mm f 1 4 lens at infinity 1 0 m 1 Eyepoint 17 mm 1 0 m 1 from center surface of viewfinder eyepiece lens Diopter adjustment 3 1 m 1 Focusing screen Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark X screen with AF area brackets framing grid can be displayed Reflex mirror Quick return Depth of field preview Pressing Pv button stops lens aperture dow...

Page 1150: ... used with lenses that have a maximum aperture of f 5 6 or faster With lenses that have a maximum aperture of f 8 or faster the electronic rangefinder supports 15 focus points Shutter Type Electronically controlled vertical travel focal plane mechanical shutter electronic front curtain shutter electronic shutter Speed 1 8000 30 s choose from step sizes of 1 3 1 2 and 1 EV extendable to 900 s in mo...

Page 1151: ...er MUP mirror up Approximate frame advance rate CL 1 10 fps CH 10 14 fps Q 1 5 fps Self timer 2 s 5 s 10 s 20 s 1 9 exposures at intervals of 0 5 1 2 or 3 s Exposure Metering system Viewfinder photography TTL exposure metering using RGB sensor with approximately 180K 180 000 pixels Live view TTL exposure metering performed by image sensor ...

Page 1152: ...n average of entire frame non CPU and AF S Fisheye NIKKOR 8 15mm f 3 5 4 5E ED lenses use 12 mm circle Spot Meters circle approximately 4 mm in diameter about 1 5 of frame centered on selected focus point on center focus point when non CPU or AF S Fisheye NIKKOR 8 15mm f 3 5 4 5E ED lens is used Highlight weighted Available with type G E and D lenses Range Matrix or center weighted metering 3 20 E...

Page 1153: ... 50 equivalent below ISO 100 or to approx 0 3 0 5 0 7 1 2 3 4 or 5 EV ISO 3280000 equivalent above ISO 102400 auto ISO sensitivity control available Active D Lighting Can be selected from Auto Extra high 2 Extra high 1 High Normal Low and Off Autofocus Type Viewfinder photography TTL phase detection 105 focus points all of which are cross type sensors and 15 of which support f 8 detection performe...

Page 1154: ...ic rangefinder can be used Focus points 105 focus points number available for selection in viewfinder photography can be chosen from 105 27 and 15 AF area mode Viewfinder photography Single point AF 9 25 49 or 105 point dynamic area AF 3D tracking group area AF group area AF C1 group area AF C2 auto area AF Live view Face detection AF wide area AF normal area AF subject tracking AF Focus lock Focu...

Page 1155: ...c off Flash compensation 3 1 EV choose from step sizes of 1 3 1 2 and 1 EV Flash ready indicator Lights when optional flash unit is fully charged flashes after flash is fired at full output Accessory shoe ISO 518 hot shoe with sync and data contacts and safety lock Nikon Creative Lighting System CLS i TTL flash control radio controlled Advanced Wireless Lighting optical Advanced Wireless Lighting ...

Page 1156: ...2500 K 10 000 K preset manual up to 6 values can be stored spot white balance measurement available during live view all with fine tuning Bracketing Bracketing Exposure and or flash white balance and ADL Live view Mode C photo live view 1 movie live view Movie Metering system TTL metering using camera image sensor Metering mode Matrix center weighted or highlight weighted ...

Page 1157: ...ecording format Linear PCM for movies recorded in MOV format or AAC for movies recorded in MP4 format Audio recording device Built in stereo or external microphone with attenuator option sensitivity adjustable ISO sensitivity Recommended Exposure Index Mode M Manual selection ISO 100 to 102400 choose from step sizes of 1 3 1 2 and 1 EV with additional options available equivalent to approximately ...

Page 1158: ...ewing angle approximately 100 frame coverage 11 level manual brightness adjustment and color balance control Playback Playback Full frame and thumbnail 4 9 or 72 images playback with playback zoom playback zoom cropping movie playback photo and or movie slide shows histogram display highlights photo information location data display picture rating auto image rotation index marking voice memo input...

Page 1159: ...reo mini pin jack 3 5 mm diameter Ten pin remote terminal Built in can be used with MC 30A MC 36A remote cords and other optional accessories Ethernet RJ 45 connector Standards IEEE 802 3ab 1000BASE T IEEE 802 3u 100BASE TX IEEE 802 3 10BASE T Data rates 10 100 1000 Mbps with auto detect Port 1000BASE T 100BASE TX 10BASE T AUTO MDIX Maximum logical data rates according to IEEE standard actual rate...

Page 1160: ...nel 11 Africa Asia and Oceania 2412 2462 MHz channel 11 and 5180 5825 MHz U S A Canada Mexico 2412 2462 MHz channel 11 and 5180 5805 MHz other countries in the Americas 2412 2462 MHz channel 11 and 5745 5805 MHz Georgia 2412 2462 MHz channel 11 and 5180 5320 MHz other European countries Maximum output power EIRP 2 4 GHz band 6 8 dBm 5 GHz band 6 3 dBm Georgia 5 GHz band 9 3 dBm other countries Aut...

Page 1161: ...dBm Range line of sight Approximately 10 m 32 ft Without interference Range may vary with signal strength and presence or absence of obstacles Location data Supported GNS systems GPS USA GLONASS Russia QZSS Japan Data acquired Latitude longitude altitude UTC Universal Coordinated Time Clock synchronization Camera clock can be set to time acquired via GNSS Track logs NMEA compliant Log interval 15 ...

Page 1162: ...on a single charge with an EN EL18 than with an EN EL18c EN EL18b EN EL18a AC adapter EH 6c AC adapter requires EP 6 power connector available separately Tripod socket Tripod socket 1 4 in ISO 1222 Dimensions weight Dimensions W H D Approx 160 163 92 mm 6 3 6 5 3 7 in Weight Approx 1450 g 3 lb 3 2 oz with battery and two CFexpress memory cards but without body cap and accessory shoe cover approx 1...

Page 1163: ... on the camera and the images and illustrations in the manuals are for expository purposes only Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice Nikon will not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain Operating environment Temperature 0 C 4...

Page 1164: ...geable Li ion batteries Charging time per battery Approx 2 hours and 35 minutes Time required to charge battery at an ambient temperature of 25 C 77 F when no charge remains Operating temperature 0 C 40 C 32 F 104 F Dimensions W H D Approx 160 85 50 5 mm 6 3 3 3 2 in Length of power cable Approx 1 8 m 6 ft U S A and Canada or 1 5 m 4 9 ft other countries Weight Approx 285 g 10 1 oz including two c...

Page 1165: ...eable Li ion Battery Type Rechargeable lithium ion battery Rated capacity 10 8 V 2500 mAh Operating temperature 0 C 40 C 32 F 104 F Dimensions W H D Approx 56 5 27 82 5 mm 2 2 1 1 3 2 in Weight Approx 160 g 5 6 oz excluding terminal cover ...

Page 1166: ... the battery charger If the calibration lamp for the current battery chamber flashes when a battery is inserted the battery needs to be calibrated To begin calibration press the calibration button for the current chamber for about a second The chamber lamp for the current battery chamber flashes while calibration is in progress The display can be read as follows 1 Chamber lamps green 2 Charge lamp...

Page 1167: ...ormal charging will begin after about ten seconds To interrupt calibration press the calibration button again Calibration will end and charging will begin When calibration is complete the calibration and charge lamps will turn off and charging will begin immediately Approximate time needed to recalibrate battery Under 2 hours 2 4 hours 4 6 hours Over 6 hours Charge lamps green 2h I off K on K on K...

Page 1168: ...serted a problem has occurred with the battery or charger during charging Remove the battery unplug the charger and consult a Nikon authorized service representative A Charging and Calibrating Two Batteries If batteries are inserted in both chambers they will be charged in the order inserted If a calibration button is pressed when either calibration lamp is flashing the charger will calibrate and ...

Page 1169: ...of such data is the user s responsibility Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another person erase all data using commercial deletion software or format the device and then completely refill it with images containing no private information for example pictures of empty sky Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices Before d...

Page 1170: ...h the goal of improving the interoperability of printers and digital cameras making it easier to produce high quality prints Information stored with photographs is used for optimal color reproduction when the images are output on Exif compliant printers See the printer manual for details HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics ...

Page 1171: ... of 45 MB s 300 or better are recommended for movie recording and playback Slower speeds may result in recording being interrupted Playback may also be interrupted or jerky when movies are viewed on the camera Contact the manufacturer for information on features operation and limitations on use Approved Memory Cards ...

Page 1172: ...nses when On is selected for Image area Auto DX crop Memory Card Capacity Image quality Image size File size Number of exposures remaining 2 Buffer capacity 2 3 NEF RAW Lossless compressed 12 bit Large Approx 20 2 MB 3500 frames 184 frames Medium Approx 14 6 MB 4700 frames 79 frames Small Approx 11 1 MB 6200 frames 84 frames NEF RAW Lossless compressed 14 bit Large Approx 25 1 MB 3000 frames 146 f...

Page 1173: ...900 frames 200 frames Small Approx 3 8 MB 25 600 frames 200 frames JPEG normal4 Large Approx 5 7 MB 16 500 frames 200 frames Medium Approx 3 5 MB 27 000 frames 200 frames Small Approx 2 0 MB 48 700 frames 200 frames JPEG basic4 Large Approx 2 6 MB 31 400 frames 200 frames Medium Approx 1 8 MB 51 300 frames 200 frames Small Approx 1 1 MB 88 600 frames 200 frames Image quality Image size File size N...

Page 1174: ... Approx 9 8 MB 7600 frames 200 frames Medium Approx 7 2 MB 10 100 frames 129 frames Small Approx 5 6 MB 13 000 frames 142 frames NEF RAW Lossless compressed 14 bit Large Approx 11 9 MB 6700 frames 200 frames NEF RAW Compressed 12 bit Large Approx 9 0 MB 10 000 frames 200 frames NEF RAW Compressed 14 bit Large Approx 10 8 MB 8500 frames 200 frames NEF RAW Uncompressed 12 bit Large Approx 15 1 MB 76...

Page 1175: ...normal4 Large Approx 2 9 MB 33 600 frames 200 frames Medium Approx 2 0 MB 48 700 frames 200 frames Small Approx 1 3 MB 75 000 frames 200 frames JPEG basic4 Large Approx 1 6 MB 60 900 frames 200 frames Medium Approx 1 1 MB 88 600 frames 200 frames Small Approx 0 8 MB 121 000 frames 200 frames Image quality Image size File size Number of exposures remaining 2 Buffer capacity 2 3 ...

Page 1176: ...ng when An optimal compression c JPEG option is selected for Image quality On is selected for Auto distortion control 4 Figures assume a size priority option an option not marked with c is selected for Image quality Selecting an optimal compression c option increases file size the number of images and buffer capacity drop accordingly D Maximum Number of Photo per Burst The maximum number of photog...

Page 1177: ...options selected in the camera menus Photographs single frame release mode Approximately 3580 CIPA standard2 Photographs continuous release modes Approximately 8670 Nikon standard 3 Movies Approximately 105 minutes4 Actions such as the following can reduce battery endurance Using the monitor for example for live view photography Keeping the shutter release button pressed halfway Repeated autofocus...

Page 1178: ...argeable Nikon EN EL18c batteries Keep the battery contacts clean Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance Use batteries immediately after charging Batteries will lose their charge if left unused Check the condition of the battery regularly using the Battery info option in the setup menu If a j icon appears in the Calibration field calibrate the battery in the MH 26a battery charger 0 1114 I...

Page 1179: ...three times after shutter release button has been pressed halfway for 3 s six shots are then taken in succession and monitor turned on for 5 s and then turned off no operations performed until stand by timer has expired The cycle is then repeated Measured at 23 C 73 4 F 2 C 3 6 F with an AF S NIKKOR 70 200mm f 2 8E FL ED VR lens VR off 4 Actual battery endurance as measured under conditions specif...

Page 1180: ...1117 Navigation This product is a camera It is not intended for use as a navigation or surveying device The location reported by the camera is an approximation only It is not to be used for surveying or for navigation when travelling by air or car on foot or by other means Overseas Use Before travelling check with your travel agent or the embassy or tourism board of the countries you will be visit...

Page 1181: ...or other countries Apple App Store the Apple logos iPhone iPad iPod touch Mac and macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and or other countries Android Google Play and the Google Play logo are trademarks of Google LLC The Android robot is reproduced or modified from work created and shared by Google and used according to terms described in the Creative Commons 3 0 Attribution Lice...

Page 1182: ...de names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders Use of the Made for Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to connect specifically to the Apple products identified in the badge and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards Apple is not respo...

Page 1183: ...9 Unicode Inc All rights reserved Distributed under the Terms of Use in https www unicode org copyright html Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data files and any associated documentation the Data Files or Unicode software and any associated documentation the Software to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction including without ...

Page 1184: ...F THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder D AVC Patent Portfolio License THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON COMME...

Page 1185: ...am and the accompanying materials are licensed and made available under the terms and conditions of the BSD License which accompanies this distribution The full text of the license may be found at http opensource org licenses bsd license php THE PROGRAM IS DISTRIBUTED UNDER THE BSD LICENSE ON AN AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED NvmExpress h C ...

Page 1186: ...TED UNDER THE BSD LICENSE ON AN AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED NvmExpressDiskInfo c Copyright c 2013 Intel Corporation All rights reserved This program and the accompanying materials are licensed and made available under the terms and conditions of the BSD License which accompanies this distribution The full text of the license may be found ...

Page 1187: ...DER THE BSD LICENSE ON AN AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED NvmExpressDxeExtra uni Copyright c 2014 2018 Intel Corporation All rights reserved This program and the accompanying materials are licensed and made available under the terms and conditions of the BSD License which accompanies this distribution The full text of the license may be found...

Page 1188: ...DER THE BSD LICENSE ON AN AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED NvmExpressPassthru c C Copyright 2014 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P Copyright c 2013 2018 Intel Corporation All rights reserved This program and the accompanying materials are licensed and made available under the terms and conditions of the BSD License which accompanies this...

Page 1189: ...105 160 L Matrix metering 111 178 820 M Center weighted metering 111 178 N Spot metering 112 179 t Highlight weighted metering 112 179 a Live view button 55 63 i button 88 399 R button 94 E Exposure compensation button 117 Y button 111 g h Q button 125 W N button 131 d Help 87 i menu 88 t memory buffer 207 D switch 874 Numerics 1 1 24 24 Image area 137 141 1 2 30 20 Image area 137 141 16 9 36 20 I...

Page 1190: ...Auto area AF face detection 812 Auto area AF starting point 813 Autoexposure lock 196 Autofocus 148 153 173 Autofocus mode 98 149 Autofocus mode restrictions 815 B Backup Role played by card in Slot 2 308 Battery 28 32 47 Battery charger 28 Battery info 950 Beep options 923 BKT button 113 252 259 265 Black and white Monochrome 979 Bluetooth 77 457 469 Body cap 1061 Bracketing 251 259 265 Bracketin...

Page 1191: ...7 Diffraction compensation770 789 Diopter adjustment control 14 Direct connection to PC 488 Direct sunlight White balance 122 222 Distortion control 976 D Lighting 973 Dual format recording PB slot 735 DX 24 16 Image area 137 141 DX format 137 DX based movie format 293 Dynamic area AF 102 153 157 E Easy Connect 495 Easy exposure compensation 819 Edit movie 300 Effect level 128 Electronic front cur...

Page 1192: ...ocus point options 815 Focus point persistence 813 Focus point wrap around 815 Focus points used 807 Focus ring 174 Focus selector lock 106 Focus shift shooting 360 Focus tracking with lock on 805 Focus mode selector 97 148 174 Format memory card 887 Frame rate 294 Frame size frame rate 294 Framing grid display 832 Frequency response 793 FTP server 585 FTP upload 536 571 Full frame playback 390 Fu...

Page 1193: ...e view button options 874 Live view in continuous mode 835 Live view photography 55 Live view selector 55 63 Lo ISO sensitivity 215 Location data 7 384 Location data built in 384 925 Lock mirror up for cleaning 1078 Long exposure NR 767 Long time exposures 191 Low sensitivity Lo 215 Low pass filter 1075 M M manual focus 174 M medium 120 145 Manage Picture Control 276 Manual Exposure mode 108 188 M...

Page 1194: ...graphy641 Optical VR 835 Overflow Role played by card in Slot 2 308 Overview 416 P Peaking highlights 832 Peripheral connector 1107 Perspective control 978 Photo information 405 Photo shooting menu 750 Photo shooting menu bank 752 Picture Controls 125 271 PIN entry WPS 495 Pitch 892 Pixel mapping 910 Playback 71 73 390 Playback display options 733 Playback folder 732 Playback menu 730 Playback zoo...

Page 1195: ...r 110 204 209 823 Sepia Monochrome 979 Setup menu 886 Shade White balance 122 222 Sharpening 128 Shooting data 410 Shutter spd aperture lock 194 867 Shutter speed 185 188 194 Shutter speed lock 194 Shutter priority auto 108 185 Shutter release button 51 170 196 Shutter release button AE L 822 Silent live view photography 374 Single AF 99 100 149 151 Single frame 109 203 Single point AF 102 153 157...

Page 1196: ...769 Virtual horizon 95 96 862 892 Vivid Set Picture Control 125 272 Voice memo 436 Voice memo options 920 W WB bracketing Auto bracketing set 259 U button 121 White balance 121 221 Wide area AF 105 160 Wi Fi 77 461 485 521 Wi Fi mode 461 Wind noise reduction 794 Wired LAN 78 520 Wired LAN WT 937 Wireless LAN 77 457 521 1063 Wireless remote WR options 925 Wireless remote controller 666 925 1063 Wir...

Page 1197: ......

Page 1198: ...reproduction in any form of this manual in whole or in part except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews may be made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION SB0C01 11 6MB46511 01 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for D6

Brand: WildSpot Pages: 12

Brand: Hyundai Pages: 13

Princeton Instruments Nano-XF

Brand: Teledyne Pages: 56

Brand: Digimerge Pages: 20

Brand: Uniden Pages: 28

Brand: FujiFilm Pages: 134

Brand: Casio Pages: 246

Brand: Gator Pages: 16

Brand: Gator Pages: 22

Brand: Pentax Pages: 68

Talking Picture frame with Travel alarm...

Brand: Radio Shack Pages: 4

Brand: Panasonic Pages: 45

Brand: Insignia Pages: 25

Brand: Red Arrow Pages: 3

Brand: Huawei Pages: 49

Brand: Huawei Pages: 99

Brand: Canon Pages: 676

EF-610 ST NA-ITTL

Brand: Sigma Pages: 2

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands